GIFT OF f Digitized by tine Internet Arciiive in 2007 with funding from IVIicrosoft Corporation littp://www.arcliive.org/details/coursewpracticalOOmonsricli A PRACTICAL COURSE SPANISH LANGUAGE. ON WOODBURY'S PLAN WITH GERMAN. H. M. ^ONSANTO, A.M., LATE ASSISTANT PROFESSOR IN THE UNITED STATES NAVAL ACADEMY AT ANNAPOLIS, AND LOUIS A. LANGUELLIER, LL.D., LATE TUTOR IN THE COLLEGE OF THE CITY OF NEW YORK. "Pocos preceptos y mucha practica.' lYISON, BLAKEMAN, TAYLOR, & CO. NEW YORK AND CHICAGO. PRESERVATION COPY ADDED /V9ff Copyright, 1875. Bx H. M. MONSANTO and LOUIS A. LANGUELLIEU PEEFAOE, In preparing the present work it has been the aim of the authors, wliile excluding nothing of practical value which has already been placed before the public, to combine with the best features of the most approved methods the results of their own experience. Wliile endeavoring to render this work a valuable assistant in the class-room, they have sought at the same time to adapt it to the purposes of private instruction, and in so doing have availed themselves to a great extent of the admi- rable plan presented in Woodbury^s Practical Course with the German Language. Accordingly the lessons are arranged in the following order : — 1. The Subjects of the Lesson. 2. Examples, accompanied by their nearest English equiv- alents," and made to illustrate the grammatical and idiomatic principles which are involved in the Lessons. 3. Yoga BUL ARIES placed before the Exercises, the masculine and feminine names being grouped separately, and other parts of speech arranged alphabetically for convenience of reference. 4. Spanish Exercises. The sentences in Spanish require only the application of the instructions contained in the Les- son, or in the preceding ones, for their translation into Eng- lish. 5. English Exercises. The analogous sentences in English are presented in immediate connection with the preceding ones in Spanish. The principles applied in the Spanish Ex- ercises are thus made a most convenient and effective auxiliary IV PREFACE. in the still more advanced and difficult work of translating English into Spanish. 6. Grammatical and Idiomatic Principles. This division may be employed by means of the references either in connec- tion with the preceding instructions, or, when not thus re- quired, may be applied both as a test of the pupil's previous deductions, and at the same time as an appropriate and impres- sive review. The rules on pronunciation will, it is hoped, be found as complete as possible, and the selection of sentences in the Exercises an improvement on those of many former methods. The conjugation of all the irregular verbs in general use will be found at the end of the book, together with a brief sketch on the formation of the Spanish language, and also a com- plete dictionary of all the words used in the different Exer- cises. It will be seen that the book does not contain a Second Part devoted to a systematic rearrangement of the grammati- cal facts contained in the several lessons. Such a Second Part is, we believe, seldom used by students, and we have been careful, as far as possible, in the construction of our lessons to insert together all the facts pertaining to each part of the subject. So the course of our book corresponds very nearly to that which would be adopted in a systematic gram- mar. While respectfully presenting this work to the public, the authors indulge the hope that it may prove a welcome auxil- iary to the acquisition of the Spanish language. H. M. MONSANTO. LOUIS A. LANGUELLIER. New York, July, 1875. CONTENTS. Pages Preface iii Index vii Introduction .13 § 1. Letters and Sounds. — Alphabet 13 § 2. Pronunciation 14 1. Vowels 14 2. Diphthongs 14 3. Triphthongs 15 § 3. Consonants ......... 15 § 4. Double Letters . 19 §5. Syllables 19 § 6. Accent 20 §7. Punctuation 22 § 8. Exercises in Pronunciation 22 Lessons : I. Article, different Forms 25 II. Plural 28 III. Contraction of Preposition with Article . . . .32 IV. Pronouns 35 V. Verbs ser and estar 40 VI. Use of the Prepositions de and para . . . . . 46 VII. -The Negative 49 VIII. Adjectives, Formation of the Feminine .... 54 IX. Place of Adjectives 59 X. Diminutive and Augmentative Nouns . . . . 64 XI. Adjectives. Comparative and Superlative Relative . . 70 XII. Superlative Absolute. Adjectives and Adverbs . . 76 XIII. Possessive Adjectives .81 XIV. Possessive Pronouns 86 XV. Demonstrative Adjectives 91 XVI. Demonstrative Pronouns 94 XVII. Auxiliary Verb haber 99 XVI 1 1. AuxiXmry Yerhhaiber (continiced) 103 XIX. Present Participle, or Gerund 107 XX. Cardinal Numbers . . . . . . . .112 XXI. Ordinal Numbers 117 XXII. Pronouns in Simple Tenses ...... 122 CONTENTS. XXX. XXXI. XXXII. XXXIII. - XXXIV. XXXV. XXXVI. XXXVII. XXXVIII. XU. XLII. XLIII. XLIV. XLV. XLVI. XLIX. L. LI. LI I. LIII. LIV. LV. LVL LVII. LVin. XXIII. Relative and Interrogative Pronouns . . . .129 XXIV. Auxiliary Verbs, haber, tener . . . . . 136 XXV. Idiomatic Uses of tener 143 XXVI. Auxiliary Verbs, ser, estar 149 XXVII. Haber and ser used as Impersonal Verbs . . .156 XXVIII. The Time of the Day, etc 161 XXIX. Use of the Article . .165 Personal Pronouns with Prepositions and Verbs . 171 The Respective Place of Pronouns 176 Regular Verbs, Present Indicative . . . . 180 Irregular Verbs of the First Conjug., Present Indicative 183 Irregular Verbs of the Second Conjug., Present Indicative 188 Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjug., Present Indicative 193 Imperfect Tense, Indicative Mood 199 The Past Definite or Preterite, and the Past Indefinite 203 Irregularities of the Preterite 209 XXXIX. The Past Anterior and the Pluperfect (Indicative) . 215 •XL. The Future and Future Anterior ■ 218 Imperative Mood 223 Subjunctive Mood, Present 228 Imperfect and Pluperfect (Subjunctive) , . . 236 Coifditional and Potential (Subjunctive) . . . 243 Subjunctive Future and Future Perfect ... 251 Infinitive Mood . . . . . . . .253 XLVI I. The Infinitive governed by Prepositions . . . 261 XLVIII. The Gerund or Present Participle 264 The Past Participle . 269 The Past Participle (contimccd) 274 The Passive Verb 278 Reflective Verbs 282 Reflective Verbs {contmued) 288 Periphrastic Verbs 292 Impersonal Verbs 298 Government of Verbs 301 Government of Adjectives ..... 304 The Adverbs 308 LIX. The Preposition 313 LX. Defective Verbs 319 LXI. Agreement of the Verb with its Subject . . . 321 -.^^^LXII. Conjunctions and Interjections ..... 324 Tablk of Terminations of the Three Regular Conjugations, 327, 328 List of the Principal Irregular Verbs .... 328-369 Formation of the Spanish Language .... 370-372 General Vocabulary . 373-398 1. Spanish-English 373 2. English-Spanish 386 INDEX. The heavy-face figures refer to the Lessons, the light-face figures to the Rules ; as, for instance, 3. 1-3 denotes Lesson 3, Rules 1-3, &c. When page or section is referred to, p. or § is given with the figures. A. A or An, 1. 3. A, 3. 1. When used with active verbs, 18. 3. When not used with an active verb, 18. 4 ; 20. 6 ; 23. 2. When used with el cual {la cual, etc. ), 23. 6. When used before a following Infinitive, 46. p. 254, 3. Used after volver, 48. 9 in fine. Used with some Periphrastic verbs, 54. 1-6. Complement of another Preposition, 59. p. 314. Its use, 59. 1. Ablative absolute, 49. 5. Accent, p. 20, § 6. Accusative case, 22. 6; 23. 2-6; 30. 1 ; 31. 1, 2, 4. Active verb, 51. 1, 2. Becoming a Reflective Verb, 52. 1. When be- coming an Impersonal Verb, 55. 2. Adjectives, repeated before nouns, 1. 4. Plural formed as with nouns, 2. 8. Formation of the Feminine, 8. 1-5. Referring to two nouns in the singular, 8. 6. Referring to two nouns of different genders, 8. 7. Place of Adjectives, 9. 1-4. Used also as nouns, 9. 5. Comparative and Superlative Relative, 11. Gov- ernment of Adjectives, 57. 1-7. Used as adverbs, 58. 9. A donde. See donde. Adverbs, Comparative and Superla- tive, 11. 12 ; 13. 9, Rem. 3. Differ- ent sorts of Adverbs, 58. pp. 308, 309. Their place, 58. 1. Their for- mation, 58. 2. Used diminutively or augmentatively, 58. 8. Ago, its translation, 27. p. 157. Agreement of the verb with its sub- ject, 61. Al, 3. 1. A la, 3. 1. Alas, 3. 1. Algo, when used with tener, 25. 3. Algun. See alguno. Alguno (algunos, alguna, algunas), 4. 8 ; 7. 11, and Obs. ; 9. 6, Rem. 1. AUi esta and hay, p. 158. A los, 3. 1. Alphabet, p. 13, § 1. An or A, 1. 3. Andar, when it may be used instead of ir, 48. 4. Ante, its use, 59. 2. Anos, used with tenor, 25. 4. Any, 4. 8. Aquel, aquella ; este, esta ; ese, esa. Their different meaning, 15. 1 ; 16. 2. Aquello, eso and esto, their difference of meaning, 16. 1, 3-5. Article, Definite, 1. Indefinite, Vlll INDEX. 1. 3. 13. 9, Rem. 2. Not sepa- rated from the Demonstrative or .Relative Pronoun, 16. 8. When omitted, 23. 7. Its use, 29. 1-10 and 1-8. When used with an In- finitive, 46. 13, 14. Augmentative nouns and adjectives, 9. 1-4. Sometimes accented dif- ferently, R. 4, General Obs. Buen. See Bueno. Bueno, 9. 6, Rem. 1. Can, 44. 11, L Cardinal numbers, 20. When end- ing in OS and as, 20. 2. When used with y, 20. 3. When used instead of the ordinal numbers, 21. 4, Obs. ; R. 5, 6. Ch, p. 16, § 3. Cien. See Ciento. Ciento, when becoming cien, 20. 4. Used with mil, 20. 8. Collective noun, when put in the sin- gular o?' in the plural, 61. 8. Collective numbers, 21. Collective partitive, 61. 8. Como, when governing the Infinitive mood, 47. 2. Compound tenses, in Reflective Verbs, 52. 5. Comparative, its formation, 11. 1-9. Comparative and Superlative, 11, 12. Compound gerund, 48. 6, 8. Compound nouns, 1. 5 ; General Obs, Con, when used before a following In- finitive, 46. p. 255, R. 8 ; 48. 5, 2, Note. Complement of an Adjec- tive, 57. 4. Its use, 59. 3. Conditional, 44. Conjunctions, requiring the Subjunc- tive mood, 44. 2-4, 7, 10. List of the Principal Conjunctions, 62. Conjunctive expressions, requiring the Subjunctive mood, 42. 10. List of Conjiinctive expressions, 62. Conmigo, 30. 10. Conocer and Saber, 14. 9. Consigo, 30. 10. Contigo, 30. 10. Consonants, p. 15, § 3. Contents, pp. v, vi. Could, 44. 11, 2. Cual, when used with tal, 23. 7 c. Cual and que, 23. 9. Cual, Interrogative Pronoun, 23. 11. Cuando, used with Subjunctive future, 45. 1. Cuanto {cuanta, cvxintos, cuantas), how translated, 23. 13. Cuyo, its uses, 23. 8. As an Interro- gative Pronoun, 23. 11. D, when suppressed in Reflective Verbs, 52. 7. Dative case, 30. 1 ; 31. 1, 2, 4. Days of the week, 20. De, 3. 1, 2 ; 6. 1-3. Used with the Definite Article before nosotros, 14. 6. Used with ser, 14. 8. Used with tener, 25. 2. When used be- fore a following Infinitive, 46. p . 254, R. 2 note, 5 and note, 9 and note, 10, 3, 11. Used after a Past Parti- ciple, 49. 7. Used with some Peri- phrastic Verbs, 54. 1, 5, 6. Pre- ceded by a verb, 56. 1, 2. Comple- ment of an Adjective, 57. 1-4, 7. Complement of another Preposition, 59. p. 314. Its use, 59. 4. Used after a partitive noun, 61. 8. De and de, p. 20, § 6, 1. Deber, 18. 2. Defective verbs, 60. Definite article, 1. 1 ; 13. 5, 7. Used INDEX. IX with de before nosotros, 14. 6. Used with verbs expressing moral or phj'sical properties, 25. 6 andObs. When used to translate on, 28. 3. Its iise, 29. 1-10 and 1-8. When omitted, 29. 8. Exceptions, 1-5. Del, 3. 1. De la, 3. 1. De las, 3. 1. De los, 3. 1. Demonstrative adjectives, 15. 1-4. Generally precede the noun, 15. 2. Must be repeated before every noun, 15. 3. Demonstrative pronouns, 16. 1-10. Descriptive Tense, 36. 3. Diminutive nouns and adjectives, 10. 1-4. Sometimes accented dif- ferently, R. 4, General Obs. Diphthongs, p. 14, § 2. 2. Direct object, 52. 1, 2, 4. Direct pronouns, 30. 1-12. Divisions of the day, 20. p. 113 ; 28. p. 162. Doble. See p. 118 (Multiplicative Numbers) and 21. 8. Don, 9. 6. Dona, 9. 6. Donde, when preceded by a (a donde), and by en (en donde), 15. 4. Used as a Relative Pronoun, 23. 10. When goveniing the Infinitive, 47. 2. Double letters, p. 19, § 4. See also ch and 11. E E and y, 18. El, 1. 1. Used (by euphony) instead of la, 2 ; 13. 4. El de el {or de ella, de ellos, de ellas). ^ Used instead of el suyo, la suya, etc. El, 4. 6 ; 13. 5. El and el, p. 20, § 6. 1 ; 4. 6. El {or la, los, las, lo) de V, 14. 4. El cual {la ciial, etc. ) When used and how, 23. 6. Ella, 4. 6 ; 13. 5. Ellas, 4. 6 ; 13. 5. Ello, used instead of eso, 16. 9. Cor- responding to it, 16. 9. Ellos, 4. 6 ; 13. 5. El suyo, la suya, used instead of tmestro, vuestra, 14. 3. En, used with a Present Participle, 19. 8 and Obs. When used before a following Infinitive, 46. p. 254, R. 7. Its use as a Preposition, 59. 5. En donde. See Donde. English-Spanish Vocabulary, p. 386. Ese, esa ; este, esta ; a%uel, aquella ; their different meaning, 15. 5. Eso, esto and aquello, their difference of meaning, 16. 1, 3-5. Estar, used with a Past Participle, 18. 1. Used with a Present Parti- ciple, 19. 3. Not used with ser, ir, venir, 19. 4. Its Present Parti- ciple often preceding another Pres- ent Participle, 19. 9. Used instead of tener, 25. 1, Obs. a, h, c. Its' conjugation, 26. Estar and ser, 5. 1-3. Used instead of tener, 25. 1, Obs. a, h, c. Their conjugations, 26. Este, esta ; ese, esa ; aquel, aquella ; their different meaning, 15. 1 ; 16. 2. Esto, eso, and aquello, their differ- ence of meaning, 16. 1, 3-5. Exclamation-point (;), p. 22, § 7, 2. Exclamatory phrases, 62. Feminine gender, 1. 1. Formation of the Spanish language, pp. 370-372. Fractional numbers, 21. Future anterior, 40. 6. Future perfect, 45. 1. Future tense, 30. 5, Obs. Its forma- tion, 40. 1-4. When used instead INDEX. of the Imperative, 40. 5. Subjunc- tive future, 45. 1. Futuro perfecto, 42. 5, a. G. Genders, 1. 1 and General Ob». General Vocabulary, Spauisli-Eng- lish, p. 373. English-Spanish, 386. Genitive case, 30. 12. Genitive partitive, 46. 5 and Note. Gerund. See Present Participle. Government, of Verbs, 56. Of Ad- jectives, 57. Of Adverbs, 58. 6. Of Prepositions, 59. 1-7. Gran. See Grande. Grande, 9. 6, Rem. 3 and note. H. Haber, 17. 1, 2. Cannot be separated from the principal verb, R. 1. Its conjiigation, 24. Used as Imper- sonal Verb, 27. 1, and translated by ago, there to be, since, this, there, ,^ etc., 27. 2. Expressing an action "^r a state which still continues, p. 157. Expressing measure or dis- tance, p. 157. Used with que be- fore an Infinitive, 27. 3. Used im- personally, 55. p. 298. Haber and tener, 17. 1. Their con- jugations, 24. Haber de, 18. 2. Hacer, Avlien used instead of haber, 27. 2, Obs. When followed by an Infinitive, 46. 12. Used imperson- ally, 55. p. 298. Hay and alii esta, p. 158. Hijos mios ! 13. 9. Holidays, 28. p. 162. How exclamatory, rendered by que, 23. 12. I. Imperative mood, 41. 1-7. Used with pronouns, 41. p. 224, 3, 6. Of Reflective Verbs, 62. 7. lm-p&T2itive-affirmative, 31. p. 177 ; 41. 1-7. -Negative, 31. p. 177 ; 41. 5, c, 6. Imperfect, of the Indicative, its for- mation, 36. p. 199 ; its use, 36. 1-3. General Obs. on the Imperfect of the Indicative, 37. 7. Of the Subjunc- tive, its three forms, 43. 1 ; its use, 43. 2, 4, 5. Imperfect conditionals, 44. 2. Impersonal verbs, 55. 1-4. Essen- tially or Accidentally Impersonal Verbs, 55. 2. Peculiarities of some Impersonal Verbs, 55. 4. Indefinite article, 1. 3. When omit- ted, 5. 4 and Obs. ; 29. 8. Excep- tions, 1-5. Indicative mood. Present, 32. 35. Imperfect, 36. Preterite or Past Definite, 37. Past Anterior, 39. Pluperfect, 39. Future and Future Anterior, 40. Indirect object, 52. 1, 2, 4. Indirect pronouns, 30. 1, 2, 9-12. Infinitive mood, 46, 47. When used as a noun, 46. 13 ; with or without the Article, 14. Governed by Prep- ositions, 47. 1 ; by the conjunctions como, que, the adverb donde, or an Interrogative Pronoun, 2 ; ren- dered by the Present Indicative or the Subjunctive Mood, 3. When may be used instead of the Gerund, 48. 3, 5, Note. When used with con, 48. 5, 2, Note. Infinitive, preceded by que and ha- ber, 27. 3. In order to, 46. 6. Interjections, 62. Interjectional phrases, 62. Interrogation-point (i), p. 22, § 7, 1. Interrogative pronouns, 23. When governing the Infinitive, 47. 2. Interrogative sentence, 4. 7. Ir, not used with estar, 19. 4. Used INDEX. XI with an adverb, 35. 7. Used with por, 35. 7, Obs. Imperfect Indica- tive, 36. pp. 199, 200. When it may be nsed instead of andar, 48. 4. When it may be used instead of estar, 51. 7. Irregular verbs, tirst conjugation, 33. 1-4; second conjugation, 34. 1 - 10 ; third conjugation, 35. 1-9. Irregular verbs, list of the principal Irregular Verbs, pp. 328-369. Irse, 53. p. 288. It, sometimes not rendered in Span- ish, 16. 10. Different ways of trans- lating it, 22. 6. Its, 13. 6. J. Jamas, used with no, 7. 3. Jamas and nunca, 3-5. L. La, 1. 1 - 2 ; 13. 4. As a Pronoun in Simple Tenses, 22. 1-2. In com- pound tenses, 22. 3. Joined with the Infinitive and Gerund, 22. 4 and p. 124. Placed after the verb, p. 124. When translated by it, 22. 6. Used witli una to translate one o'clock, 28. 1. Las, 2. 1 ; 13. 4. As a Pronoun in Simple Tenses, 22. 1, 2. In Com- pound Tenses, 22. 3. Joined with the Infinitive and Gerund, 22. 4 and p. 124. Placed after the verb, p. 124. When translated by them. Used with a numeral to indicate the time of the day, 28. 1. Le, used in Simple Tenses, 22. 1, 2. In Compound Tenses, 22. 3. Joined with the Infinitive and Gerund, 22. 4 and p. 124. Placed after the verb, p. 124. When translated by it, 22. G. Used with a pronoun and V. or V. v., 30. 7. Les, grammatical translation of to them, 22. 6. LI, p. 17, § 3. Lo, 1. 1, 2 and Rem. 1, 2. Used with Possessive Pronoun, 14. 7. As a Pronoun in Simple Tenses, 22. 1, 2. In Compound Tenses, 22. 3. Joined with the Infinitive and Gerund, 22. 4 and p. 124. Placed after the verb, p. 124. Declinable and undeclin- able, p. 125 ; 22. 5. When trans- lated by it, 22. 6. Los, 2. 1 ; 13. 4. As a Pronoun in Simple Tenses, 22. 1, 2. In Com- pound Tenses, 22. 3. Joined with the Infinitive and Gerund, 22. 4 and p. 124. Placed after the verb, p. 124. When translated by them, 22. 6. M. Mai. SeeMalo. Malo, 9. 6, Rem. 1. W Mandar, when followed by an Infini- tive, 46. 12. Mas de, 20 7. Masculine gender, 1. 1. May, 44. 11, /. Medio (media), used to indicate the time of the day, 28. 1. Medio and mitad, 21. 7. Menos, used to indicate the time of the day, 28. 2. Menos de, 20. 7. Mi and mi, p. 20, § 6, 1. Might, 11, 2, 3. Might have, 44. 11, 7. Mil, when used in the plural, 20. 5. Used with ciento, 20. 8. Mio, 13. 9. Mismo, misma, used with a Posses- sive Pronoun, 14. 2. Used with a Demonstrative Pronoun, 16. 5. Mitad and medio, 21. 7. Xll INDEX. Months of the year, 21. Moods, Indicative, 32-40. Impera- tive, 41. Subjunctive, 42-45. In- finitive, 46-50. Multiplicative numbers, 21. Kada used with ni, 7. 6. Meaning not anything, 7. 11, Obs. When used with tener, 25. 3. Nadie used with ni, 7. 6. Meaning not anybody, 7. 11, Obs. Narrative tense, 37. 7. Negative, 7. Double negative, 7. 2. Two negatives after the verb, 7. 7. Neuter article, 1. 1 and Rem. 1, 2. Neuter gender, 1. 1 and Rem. 1, 2. Neuter verb, when becoming a Reflec- tive Verb, 52. 1. When becoming Impersonal Verb, 55. 2, 3. Ni used with jamas, nunca, nada, nadie, etc., 7. 6. Requiring the plural, 61. 2. Ningun. See ninguno. Ninguno (ningunos, ninguna, nin- gunas), 7. 9 and Obs. ; 9. 6, Rem. 1. No, put before the verb, 7. 1. When omitted, R. 2, Obs., R. 3. Used by emphasis with an affirmative sen- tence, 7. 8 and Note. Put at the end of a sentence, R. 10, Nos, when becoming no, 30. 8. Not anybody, 7. 11, Obs. Not anything, 7. 11, Obs. Nouns ending in o, a, cion or tion, tad or dad. See 1. 5, General Obs. Having ho plural, 2. 9. Having no singular, 2. 9. Nos and nosotros, 4. 2. Nosotros and nos, 4. 2. Numbers. See Cardinal, Ordinal, Collective, Fractional, and Mul- tiplicative numbers. Nunca used witli no, 7. 3. Nunca and jamas, R. 3, Obs. N, p. 17, h 3. N. 0. 0, when requiring the Plural, 61. 2. 6 and u, 18. p. 104. Object before the subject, 4. 5. Pre- ceded by a cardinal number, 20. 6. O'clock, its translation, 28. 1. On, when translated in Spanish by the Definite Article, 28. 3. One, 1. 3. Ordinal numbers, 21. Agree in gen- der and number with the noun, 21. 1. When used without the Article, 21. 4. When used instead of a Car- dinal Number, 21. 5. Otro, 16. 4. P. Para, 6. 3. When used before a fol- lowing Infinitive, 46. j). 254, 6. Its use, 59. 6. Para siempre used with jamas, 7. 5. Participio absolute, 30. 3. Participio de Preterite, 48. 6. * Participio pasivo, 49. 3. Participles actives, 48. 1. Participles de presente, 48. 1. Participle. See Present Participle and Past Participle. Passive verb, 51. 1-7. Past Anterior, its foraiation, 39. 1. Its use, R. 2 and Obs. 1, 2. Past Definite. See Preterite. Past Indefinite, 37. 1, 5-7. Past Participle, ends in Regular Con- jugation, viz, in ado for the first conjugation, and in ido for the sec- ond and third conjugations, 17. 5 ; 49. 1. Irregular Past Participles, 18. Agrees with its subject, when accompanied by estar, 18. 1. Al- ways formed regularly in the Irregu- lar Verbs of first conjugation, 33. 3. INDEX. Xlll In-egular Participle, 49. p. 269. Having sometimes an active mean- ing, 49. p. 269. Considered as an Ad- jective, 49. 2, 4. Invariable when joined with haber, 49. 3. Used as an abbreviation of the Gerund, 49. 5, 6, and Note. Preceded by a prepo- sition, 49. 6, and Note. Requiring after them de or por, 49. 7. Hav- ing an active and a passive meaning, 49. 8. Used as feminine nouns, 49. 9. Verbs having two past par- ticiples, one regular and one irregu- lar. Their different uses, 50. p. 274 and R. I. When invariable, 51. 5, 6. Used as adjective governs de or por, 57. 6. Perfect of the subjunctive, 42. 12. Periphrastic verbs, 54. Pero and sine, 18. 5. Personal pronouns, used with prepo- sitions, 30. 1 - 3, 9 - 11. Used with verbs, 30. 1 - 12. Used with Reflec- tive Verbs, 52. 1, 2. Plural of nouns, 2. 2-9. Of adjec- tives, 8. Used with verbs, 61. 1 - 3, 6. Pluperfect, of the Indicative, 39. 3, andObs. Of the Subjunctive, 43. 2, Obs., 6; 44. 9. Ponerse, 53. 2. Por, used with ir, 35. 7, Obs. Used with comenzar, empezar, and aca- bar, 46. 4. Meaning on account of or because; meaning insteadof, 47. 1. Used after a Past Participle, 49? 7. Used after an adjective, 57. 4. Its use, 59. 7. Por siempre used with jamas, 7. 5. Possessive adjectives, their agree- ment, 13. 1. Repeated before every noun, 2. Not used after a noun, 13. 9. Possessive pronouns, 14. Their agree- ment, 14. 1. Used empliatically with mismo, misma, propio, propia, 14. 2. Used witli lo, 14. 7. Postrer. See Postrero. Postrero, 9. 6, Rem. 1 ; 21. 2. Potential, 46. 11. Preface, pp. iii, iv. Prepositions, 30. 1-3, 7, 9, 10. Must be repeated before every pronoun, 30. 11. Preceding a Past Partici- ple, 49. 6, and Note. Following a verb, 56. 1, 2. Following an adjec- tive, 57. 1-7. Preceded by an ad- verb, 58. 6. Requiring de after them, 59. p. 314. Requiring a after them, 59. p. 314. Prepositional phrases, requiring de after them, 59. p. 314. Present indicative, 31. 1-5. Used instead of the Future, 32. 2. Used instead of the Past Tense, 32. 2. Its formation in Regular Verbs, 32. 4, 5 ; in Irregular Verbs of First Con- jugation, 33. 1, 2, 4 ; in Irregular Verbs of Second Conjugation, 34. 1-10; in Irregular Verbs of Third Conjugation, 35. 1-9. When used concurrently with the Present Sub- junctive, 42. 6, 9. May govern the Conditional, 44. 8. When used in- stead of the Present Indicative, 47. 3. Present Participle, or Gerund, ends (in Regular Verbs) in ando for the first conjugation, and in iendo for the second and third conjugation, 19. 1. Present Participle of verbs ending in eer and uir, 19. 2. Used with estar, 19. 3. Its use, 19. 5-7. Used with en, 19. 8, and Obs. Used with the Present Participle of estar, 19. 9. Used instead of an adverb, conjunction, or preposition, 19. 10. Always formed regularly in the Ir- regular Verbs of First Conjugation, 33. 3. When used after another verb, 46. 4 and Note, 8 and Note. Has two forms, the one in ante or ente and the second in ando or iendo, 48. 1. When used concur- XIV INDEX. rently with the Infinitive, 48. 3. When transhited in English by the conjunctions as, since, if, and the adverbs when, while, whilst, 48. 7, and by como, luego que, cuando, asi que, 7, Note. Its use, 48. 1-8. When ending in endo, 48. 9. Con- sianied by de, 14. 8. Not used with estar, 19. 4. Used instead of tener, 25. 1, Obs. «, h, c. Its conjugation, 26. Used as Impersonal V^erb, 27. 1. Imperfect Indicative, 36. pp. 199, 200. Used with Passive Verbs, 51. 1. Ser and estar, 5. 1-3. Used instead of tener, 25. 1, Obs. a, b, c. Their conjugations, 26. Ser de mas edad, 25. 4, Obs. Should, 44. U,2,l Should have, 44. 7. Should like to, 44. 11, 5. Si, when used in tlie subjunctive (or conditional), 44. 2-4 ; 45. 1. Singular, wlien the subject is put in the singular, 61. 4-8. Sine and pero, 18. 5. Solamente, when used instead of sino, 18. 6. Some, 4. 8. ■ Si and si, p. 20, ^6,1. Spanish-English Vocabulary, p. 373. Su, 13. 3, 6. Subject or nominative, 52. 1. When subjects are not of the same person, 61. 4. Composed of two Infinitives, 61. 5. Subjunctive mood, 42-45. Present, 42. Imperfect, 43. Pluperfect, 43. Conditional, 44. Potential, 44. 11. Future, 45. Future Perfect, 45. When used instead of the Infinitive, 47. 3. Required after some prepo- sitions, 57. 2. Superlative and comparative, 11, 12. Superlative absolute, its formation, 11. 1-9. Sus. See Su. Suyo, 13. 9. Syllables, p. 19, § 5. T. Tal, when used with cual, 23. 7, c. Tener, 9. 5 ; 17. 1, 3. Its conjuga- tion, 24. Its idiomatic uses, 25. 1, 2-5,7,8. Tener and haber, 17. 1. Tlieir con- jugations, 24. Tener algo malo, 25. 5. Tener mas edad, 25. 4, Obs. Tener que, 18. 2 ; 25, 8. Tercer. See Tercero. Tercero, 9. 6, Rem. 1 ; 21. 2, Obs. Tercio, when used instead of tercero, 21. 3. That of, 16. 6. That which, 16. 7. Them, Iiow to translate it, 22. 6. The one which, 16. 7. There to be, how translated, 27. 2. They, sometimes not rendered in Span- ish,. 16. 10. Those of, 16. 6. Those which, 16. 6. Time of the day, how indicated, 28. 1-2. To, meaning in order to, 46. 6. To be wrong, 25. 2, Obs. Todos, 27. p. 158. To them, how to translate it, 22. 6. Transitive verb, 51. 1, 2. Triphthongs, p. 15, § 2, 3. Triple. See p. 118 (Multiplicative Numbers) and 21. 8. Tu, 4. 1. Tuyo, 13. 9. TJ and o, 18. Tin. See Uno. XVI INDEX. Uno, una, 1. 3 ; 9. 6, Rem. 1. Their plural, 20. 1. When dropping its 0, 1. 3 ; 20. 4. Una used with la to indicate one o'clock, 28. 1. Usted (or V.), 4. 3 and Note, R. 6 ; 13. 3, 4. Used with le, 30. 7. Ustedes {V. V.), 4. 3 and Note, R. 6 ; 13. 3, 4. Used with le, 30. 7. Ve and ve, p. 20, ^ 6, 1. Venir, not used with estar, 19. 4. Venir por, 35. 5, Obs., R. 7, Obs. Ver, Imperfect Indicative, 36. pp. 199, 200. Verbs, conjugated interrogatively, 4. 4, 5. Conjugated without pronouns, 4. 6. First conjugation ending in ar, second conjugation in er, third in ir, 17. 4. Present Indicative, 32 - 35. Imperfect Indicative, 36. Past Definite or Preterite, 37. Past Indefinite, 37. Past Anterior, 39. Pluperfect Indicative, 39. Future and Future Anterior, 40. Impera- tive Mood, 41. Subjunctive Mood, 42-45. Infinitive Mood, 46, 47. Gerund or Present Participle, 48. Past Participle, 49, 50. Passive Verb, 51. Reflective Verbs, 52, 53. . Periphrastic Verbs, 54. Impersonal Verbs, 55. Government of Verbs, 56. Requiring no preposition be- fore the following Infinitive, 46. p. 253, R. 1, 10, 1. Requiring a be- fore the following Infinitive, 46. p. 254, R. 3, 10, 2. Requiring de before the following Infinitive, 46. p. 254, R. 2, Note, 5 and Note, 9 and Note, 10, 3, 11. Requiring para before the following Infinitive, 46. p. 254, R. 6. Requiring en before the following Infiijiitive, 46. p. 254, R. 7, 10, 4- Requiring con before a following Infinitive, 46. p. 255, R. 8, 10, 5. When used before a Gerund, 46. 4 and Note. Having a different meaning according to the following preposition, 46. 9 and Note. Verbs having two Past Par- ticiples, one regular, the other Ir- regular. Their different use, 50. p. 274 and R. 1. Defective verbs, CO. Agreement of the verb with its subject, 61. 1-8. Table of Termi- nations of the three Regular Verbs, p. 326, 327. List of the principal Irregular Verbs, pp. 328 - 369. Vocabulary, Spanish-English, p. 373. English -Spanish, p. 386. Volver a, 48. 9, in fine. Vos, 4. 3, and Note. Vosotros, 4. 3 and Note ; 41. 6. Vowels, p. 14, § 2, 1. Voz pasiva, 51. Vuestro, vuestra, 13. 3. W. We, 4. 2. Would, 44. 11, 2, 6. Y and e, 18. When used with Cardi- nal Numbers, 20. 3. Used to indi- cate the time of the day, 28. 2. Ya, 58. 10. You, 4. 3 and Note. PRACTICAL SPANISH COURSE. INTRODUCTION. § 1. Letters and Sounds. The Alphabet El Alfabeto. 1, The usual Spanish alphabet contains twenty-seven letters. The letters have the following names : Ixtters. Names. Letters, Names. Letters. Names. A, a. All. I, i. Ue. Q, q. Coo. B, b. Bay. J, j (^''0 equivalent). R, r. Ur'ay. C, c. Thay. L, 1. Ai'lay. S, S. Us' say. CH,ch. Tchay. LL, 11. Ai'lyay. T, t. Tay. D, d. Day. M, m. Ai'may. XT, u. U (in hull). E, e. Ay. N, n. Ai'nay. V, V. Vay. F, f. Alfa?/. N, n. Ai'nyay, X, X. Ay' kiss. G, g. Hmj. 0, 0. Oh. Y, y. Eegreeaygah. H, h. Ah' tchay. P, p. Pay. Z, z. Thai'tah. Kemark. — Th6 letter k does not belong to the Spanish alphabet, and is only found in a few foreign words, as Kirie eleison, Konisberga, etc. The same may be said of the letter w. Ex. : Washington, Newton, etc. 2. All these letters are of the feminine gender. Ex. : una h, iinajota, etc. 3« They are divided, as in English, into Yowels and Conso- nants. 14 INTRODUCTION. § 2. The Pronunciation. La Pronunciacion. The Spanish language does not present in its ^pronunciation the same difficulties as the English language. We may say, in fact, that Spanish is pronounced as it is written, and written as it is pronounced, all the letters, with very few exceptions, heing sounded in the words. The following rules on the way of pro- nouncing the Yowels and consonants, together with those refer- ring to the accentuation of the words, and to diphthongs and triphthongs, will, we trust, enable the students of the Spanish language to acquire a correct pronunciation in a comparatively limited time. 1. Vowels. Vocales. The vowels are a, e, i, o, u, y. They are sounded : a like a in far : Malaga, papa, bata. e like ay in ma^ : elemento, padre, come. i like ee in see : mira, libra, ira. like in no : obra, dorado, mono. U like 00 in food : muro, uno, comun. y as a vowel like the Spanish ^ ; voy, doy, soy. Remark. — The y is considered as a vowel when it stands by itself, as in y, and; at the end of a word, as in rey, king; or of a syllable immediately followed by a consonant. But, at the beginning of a syllable, y is generally considered as a consonant, as in ya, already ; yerj)a, hci'h. The custom of using the letter i instead of y is, however, becoming more general. 2. Diphthongs. Diptongos. Besides the simple sounds, there are in Spanish compound sounds, in which the two sounds are distinctly heard by a single emission of the voice. The sounds of Diphthongs are produced by the rapid utterance of the vowel sounds of which they are composed. CONSONANTS. The Diphthongs are sixteen in number : ( dabais, you gave ; ai or av * \ ^ * ( hay, there is, there are. io iu precio, price. ciudad, city. au : pausa, patise. oe heroe, hero. veis, gou see ; ea : linea, line. oi or oy ua { sois, you are ; ( voy, / go. fragua, forge. eo : virgineo, virginal. ue duefio, master. eu : deuda, debt. ia : gracia, grace. ie : cielo, heaven. ui or uy : uo (ruido, noise; (niuy, very. arduo, arduous 15 Remark. — There are some of these combinations, however, which are not always diphthongs, as ai and ei, which are diphthongs in baile, hall ; ley, 4aw ; but not in raiz, root ; lei, / read ; rei, / laughed ; etc. This is also the case with ia, io, ua, which are diphthongs in gracia, grace ; vicio, vice ; fragua, forge ; but not in varia, he varies ; brio, brio ; efectua, he effectuates ; etc. In fact, whenever in these combinations the i and u are accented (i, u), each vowel forms a distinct syllable. 3. Triphthongs. Triptongos. There are four Triphthongs in Spanish : iai : preciais, you value. ieis : vacieis, you may empty. uai : santiguais, you bless. uei or uey : averigueis, you may search ; buey, ox. § 3. Consonants. Consonantes. Many of the Consonants sound as in English. The following are the rules referring to those which differ in the two languages. C has two sounds, as it has in English. 1. Before the vowels e and i (ce, ci) it has nearly the sound of the English th in thick, thin, etc. : cena, cima, decente, recibe, dice. 16 INTRODUCTION. 2. Before the vowels a, O, and U (ca, co, and cu), and before Consonants, it sounds like k in English : cola, cabo, cuna, criado, clamor. CH is considered by the Spanish Academy as a distinct letter, double in figure, but simple in value. It has the same sound as the English ell in church, chair, chin, etc. : macho, mucho, chupa, rancho, dicha. Kemark. — In editions anterior to 1808, ch is found followed sometimes by a Consonant, as in Chris to, Christ; Chris tianismo, Christianity; and sometimes by a vowel with a circumflex accent, as in chimica, cJiemistry ; chimera, chimera; in both of which cases the ch has the sound of k. Nowadays the h is dropped in those words in which the ch was followed by a Consonant, while in those words in which the ch was followed by a vowel marked with a circumflex accent the letters qu (pronounced like k) have been substituted for ch. We therefore write to-day : Cristo, Cristi- anismo, quimera, quimica. G has two sounds, as it has in English. 1. Before a, O, U, 1, r it sounds as in English : gato, gorro, gusano, gloria, grito. 2. Before e and i it sounds like the English h aspirated : gente, gigante, ingenio, agilidad, ginete. 3. Before m and n it has the Latin and English pronunciation : digno, indigno, ignorante, enigma. 4. To preserve the hard sound of g before e and i the vowel U (gu) must be inserted before them : guerra, guia, guineo, guirlanda, guitarra. Note. — In this case the n is silent. When, however, the u is to be pro- nounced after the g, and before the letters e and i, a dimresis {") must be placed over the u (ii) : antigiiedad, argiiir, agiiero, magiieto. H is mute, and only lightly aspirated before ue : hombre, horca, alharaca, hora, honor, hueso, huevo, hueco, huerto, vihuela. Observation. — The letter h has been retained in many words, though not pronounced, and in many cases it has taken the place of the letter CONSONANTS. ' 17 f, formerly used. Tluis fijo, son; facer, to do; fermosura, beauty, are now written hijo, hacer, heriiiosura, etc. J is pronounced guttural before all the vowels, that is to say, like the Spanish g before e and i : paja, jabon, caja, cajita, jefe. Observation. — Some of the modern writers have adopted the j instead of the g when this letter comes before the vowels e and i. Thus they write yc?icmZ, jirafa, instead of general, general; girafa, giraffe; etc., but this change has not yet been generally sanctioned. LL is liquid, and pronounced as in the English words William, brilliant : llaga, calle, Hover, caballo, polio. S" has a liquid sound, and is pronounced nearly like ni in minion, or like the gn in French : senor, ensenar, niiio, sueno, anadir. Note. — The mark over the n (~) is called tilde in Spanish. Qi, is always followed by u and another vowel, and has the sound of k or hai-d C (the u being silent): parque, aqui, querido, despique, queja. Observation. — According to modern orthography, whenever the diph- thongs ua, ue, uo follow immediately the q, and the u is sounded, the q is replaced by a c: cuadro, cuervo, acuoso (instead of quadro, quervo, aquoso, etc.). B is trilled more than in English, but with less force between two vowels or in the middle of a word. When double, both letters must be distinctly heard : rosa, pintura, lirio, cara, perla, carro, guerra, cerrajo, perro, carrera. S has always the hissing sound, like ss in English, as in assembly : sabio, famoso, paseo, pesadumbre, rosa. Observation. — S is only doubled in Spanish in compound words. Those words, derived from the Latin, which were formerly written with 9 18 * INTRODUCTION. double ss, as santissimOf missa^ are now written with one s : santisimOf misa, etc. Neither is the s ever foDowed by a consonant when commencing a word, as in the Latin words sdeiitia, Scipio ; and, in order to avoid this liquid s, the Spanish write ciencia (suppressing the s) or Escipion (having it preceded by an e). V is pronounced as in English : velo, valor, voluntad, bravo, ave. Eemakk. — Spaniards often give to this letter the sound of b, but the Academy disapproves of it. X sounds like CS or ks in English, as in wax : axioma, examinar, reflexion, exagerar, exuberancia. Observations. — 1. The x had formerly the sound of the Spanish j, or g before e and i, but according to the modern orthography the x is replaced by a g or a j whenever it has the guttural sound. Thus, the following words Which were formerly written xe/e, xergon, baxeza, baxar, baxo, etc., are written to-day gefe or jefe, jergon, bajeza, bajar, bajo, etc. Finally, in those words in which the x precedes a consonant and ends a syllable, as in extrangerOy cxtorsioiiy extremo, etc., the x is generally re- placed by an s, as estrangero, estorsion^ cstremo ; and, although the Acad- emy does not approve of this modification, many Spanish writers and grammarians have adopted it. In those words in which the x is followed by an h, the x is, however, preserved. Thus we write exhortar, exhalar (and not eshortar, eslialar). 2. The X at the end of such words as relox, carcax, ahnaradux, etc., which formerly changed the x into j for the plural, as relojes, carcajcs, etc., is now replaced by a j ; and these words are written now reloj, carcajy almaradiij, etc. 3. In such words as salsifrax\ in which the x is changed into c for the plural, as salsifraceSy some writers replace the x by a c and others by a z. Z is pronounced like the English th in the word thin, or like the Spanish c before e and i. This letter precedes the vowels a, 0, and U {za, zo, and zu) : zapato, tizon, zumo, zorra, corazon. DOUBLE LETTEES. . 19 § 4. Double Letters. Duplicacion de las letras. The Spanish Academy, conforming to the pronunciation, has suppressed double consonants when one alone is pronounced. In the Spanish books printed nowadays the double letters tt, ss, if, bb, etc., are no longer found, and CC, nn, and rr only when both consonants are sounded, as in the words acceso, emiohlecer, harro. Double 1 (II) is to be considered only as a letter of the alphabet, and not as a double consonant. Most words, ending in English in ction, change in Spanish the t into C, as accion, action ; produccion, production. This is also the case with the derivatives of these words. § 5. Syllables. Silabas. There are four rules in Spanish for the division of words into Syllables : 1. In compound words formed from prepositions and other parts of speech the preposition forms a separate syllable, as in : ab-ne-^a-cion, ab-ro-ga-cion, con-ca-vi-dad, sub-ver-sion. Observation. — Whenever the preposition is accompanied by an s, this letter must not be separated, however, from the preposition, cons-tru-ir, ins-pi-rar, pers-pi-ca-cia. 2. Vowels forming a diphthong or triphthong must not be separated : gra-cio-so, a-pre-cian, pre-ciais. 3. Whenever a consonant is found between two vowels, it is joined to the vowel which follows it : a-mor, -le-cho, • a-gua, flu-xion, co-fre. 4. The letters ch and 11, although simple in their pronuncia- tion, must not be divided : cha-le-co, chi-co, ca-lle, co-che, ca-ba-Uo. Observation. — When "double c, double n, and double r occur in r. word, one of these letters is placed in each syllable : ac-cion, en-no-ble-ce, per-ra. 20 INTRODUCTION. § 6. Accent. Acento. 1, Accent in its common acceptation is but, a sign placed over syllables to show that they must be uttered more forcibly than the others. The Spaniards have but one accent, the acute (^); in Spanish acento agudo. It is often used to mark the distinc- tion between words otherwise written alike, but never changes the sound of the vowel. Thus we accent el, he; mi, me ; si, yes, one's self ; de, se, and ve (from the verbs dar, to give ; saber, to know ; ser, to be ; ver, to see) to distinguish these monosyl- lables from el, the (article) ; mi, my (possessive adjective) ; si, if (conditional particle) ; de, of (preposition) ; se, himself (pro- noun) ; and ve, go thou. The vowels a, e, o, and U must also be accented when stand- ing alone or forming parts of speech, so that they may not be pronounced as if belonging to the preceding or the following word : Juan e Ignacio, a la ida 6 a la vuelta, John and Ignatius, on their trip veran a Madrid, u otro punto in- to and fro, will see Madrid or mediate, some other neighboring place. The student will consequently have to give a greater stress of voice on the accented syllables or vowels when reading Spanish : valido. azucar, rubi, linea. cutaneo, crisis, agil, alferez, musica. cafe. oilografia. continua. hablo, nispero. Maria. 2. Every word has, however, in Spanish its unwritten accent, because there is always a syllable on which the voice must chiefly dwell. This inflection of the voice, this rhythmic accent, is the most difficult to be acquired by foreigners, because harmony can- not be expressed by written words, and yet harmony is to a lan- guage what color is to a picture. By observing the following simple rules, however, the student will be enabled to obtain a correct pronunciation : ACCENTS. 21 1. Unaccented words of two or more syllables ending with a vowel are accented on the penultimate syllable : cabo, cola, curioso, Cristianisrno, constante, eiicargo, lluvia, tr^edia, conquista, guerrero. 2. Unaccented words ending with a consonant are accented on the last syllable, and the last consonant is sounded strongly if the word has but one syllable : general, pan, dar, senor, significar, pasion, papel, verdad, cruz, zumbon. Exceptions. — 1. Words in the plural retain the accent of the same words in the singular. hombre, man; hombres, men. aguila, eagle; aguilas, eagles. general, general ; generales, generals, mio, mhu (sing.); mios, mine (pi.) Note. — But the plural caracteres is accented differently from the singular : caracter, character. 2. In the conjugation of verbs, the penultimate syllable is accented unless a wi'itten accent is placed on one of the syllables. tomo, / take. tomamos, toe take. tomas, thou takest. tomais, you take. \ toma, he takes. toman, tJicy take. Note. — Thus tomd, he took^ is not sounded in the same way as tomOi I take. 3. In patronymic names ending in z the penultimate syllable is always long : Perez, Sanchez, Fernandez, Rodriguez, Jimenez. 3. Unaccented words ending in ia, ie, io follow Rule 1, except when they are monosyllables, or when they are found in the conjugation of verbs where the accent rests on the i : Monosyllables : dia, rio, mio, tio, rie. Verbs: tenia, coraeria, tomarian, dirias, serian. General Remark. — The foregoing rules on the accented and unac- cented words will, we think, be found sufficient to enable students to obtain a correct pronunciation. In accented words, of course, the rules given for unaccented words have to be set aside, and the written accent is to be the supreme guide of the reader. When writing under dictation it will be easy to distinguish by the intonation jof the speaker whether any 22 INTRODUCTION. accent is to be placed on the words or not. The Spanish Academy does not consider it a mistake to put an accent wherever it is superfluous, and even adopts it in interrogations or exclamations to give more stress to the sentence : >^ I Que me (juieres ? JFhat do you loish from me ? I Cuando te vas ? When are you going away ? ' i Como llueve ! Hoiv it rains ! \ Quien lo creyera ! Who would believe it ! § 7. Punctuation. Funtuacion. !• Punctuation is in Spanish the same as in English. How- ever, as it often happens, in the Spanish language, that punctua- tion alone indicates the interrogative sense of the sentence, and that, if the period be long, the reader is informed too late of the interrogation, the Spanish Academy sometimes makes use of a reversed sign of interrogation (^) at the beginning of the sen- tence, besides the regular sign (?) at the end of the same : i Seran perdidos tantos ejemplares Are all those examples and expc- y escarmientos como presencia- ' riences which we daily scCy and mos cada dia para persuadirte a which oiigJit to persuade you to mudar de vida y entrar en la cliange your life and enter the senda del honor y de la virtud ? path of honor and virtue^ to he lost on you ? 2« The same rule is observed in long periods with regard to the exclamation-point, and an inverted sign (i) is placed at the beginning of a long exclamative sentence : I Cuanta debio ser la confusion y What must have been the confusion el sentimiento de los que creyen- and regrets of those who thought do encontrar el oro a montones they would find gold in large no encontraron sino hambre, pe- quantities, and met only hunger, nalidades y peligros ! sufferings, and dangers I § 8. Exercises in Pronunciation. El Universo. I. Con el nombre de universo se designa, cuanto existe en el niundo entero, es decir, el sol, las estrellas, la tierra, cuanto nuestra vista EXERCISES IN PRONUNCIATION. 23 alcanza en las profundidades del aire, y cuanto hay todavia mas alia de lo que podemos ver; Por mas pequenos que seamos, y por mas debil que nuestra vista sea, podemos admirar una parte de este in- menso espcctaculo. El sol, en medio de esos numerosos globos que brillaii, en toda la boA^eda celeste, es entre todas las obras de Dios la que se presenta con mayor lucimiento y majestad, es una eterna lum- brera colocada en el centro del mundo para esparcir la luz por todas partes, y a una distancia que no nos es posible determinar. Es como el rey de los astros. II. El sol, que nos parece tan pequeno, a causa de la suma distancia suya, es, segun los astronomos, mil y cuatrocientas veces mayor que la tierra. Su figura es la de un globo ; y el calor y la luz que el esparce en el universo, nos dan a conocer que su materia es el fuego mismo 6 que esta inflamada de continuo. Le vemos parecer todas las maiianas en el oriente, elevarse en el cielo hasta medio dia, bajar despues y desa- parecer del horizonte por el occidente. El sol no muda de sitio, y permanece en el centro del mundo para dar luz a cuanto le rodea. Se ban notando ciertas manchas sobre este cuerpo tan reluciente, y se ha descubierto que vl giraba, sobre si mismo como giraria una bala atra- vesada con un asador. Estas manchas se descubren desde luego en una estremidad de este astro, se adelantan, se ven despues en la otra estremidad, y desaparecen finalmente por detras para volver a parecer de nuevo de alii a algun tiempo. Se ha observado que para volver al punto de que ellas partieron, le son necesarios veinte y siete dias, tiempo necesario al sol por consiguiente para dar una vuelta completa sobre el eje suyo. Se valua que el sol dista de nosotros treinta y cuatro millones trescientas cincuenta y siete mil cuatrocientas y ochenta leguas. III. Se distinguen estos tan numerosos astros en estrellas fijas, porque no las vemos mudar de lugar, y en plan etas 6 estrellas errantes, porque giran en mayor 6 menor tiempo alrededor del sol. Se presume que las estrellas fijas son unos globos luminosos semejantes al sol, y que dan* luz a varios mundos muy remotos para que nuestra vista pueda alcanzarlos a ver. Si las estrellas nos parecen mas pequeiias que el astro que nos dispensa el dia, nace de que ellas estdn infinitamente 24 INTRODUCTION. mas apartadas de nosotros. Juzgad de su niagnitud e inmensa dis- tancia por la que esta mas inmediata a la tierra, y que se llama Sirio : se cree que esta estrella fija dista de nosotros cuatrpcientas mil veces mas que el sol, y que su diametro 6 anchura es de treinta y tres millo- nes de leguas. Los planetas son en mimero de siete y se diferencian de las estrellas fijas, a causa de que giran alrededor del sol, y no tienen luz de si misnios: aquella con que brillan, les viene del sol. Se presume que estos iumensos globos son, al modo de la tierra, unos mundos habi- tados. I IV. La tierra es redonda como una bola. Sus montanas y valles, que nos i)arecen tan considerables, pueden compararse, cuando mas, con las desigualdades que se ven en la cascara de una naranja, y que no impiden que este fruto tenga una figura redonda. Ella gira sobre si misma como una bola que esta atravesada con un asador de hierro. Este movimiento, que se llama rotacion, le propor- ciona alternativamente el dia y la noche ; es decir, que la parte que esta vuelta hacia el sol goza de la luz, mientras que la parte opuesta esta en la obscuridad. Pero, como la tierra da esta vuelta sobre si misma en veinte y cuatro horas, resulta de esto, que ella tiene en este espacio de tiempo el dia y la noche. La tierra, adenias de este movimiento de todos las dias, tiene otro que se ejecuta en un aiio ; ella da una vuelta inmensa alrededor del sol. Este ultimo movimiento produce las diferentes estaciones del aiio. ARTICLES, DIFFERENT FORMS. 25 Leccion I. Lesson !• ARTICLES, DIFFERENT FORMS. XTn, Una, ^ ^' ^^' ^^^* Ejemplos. El liombre tiene el libro. La inujer tiene la mesa. I Quieu tiene la pluma ? El padre tiene un caballo. La madre tiene una casa. El general es prudente. La seiiora es amable. Examples. The man has the book. The woman has tlie table. Who has the pen ? The father has a horse. The mother has a house. The general is prudent. The lady is amiable. Vocabulario. El amigo, the friend. El caballo, the horse. El caballero,,^Ae gentleman. ^^-^El dinero, the money. El hermano, the brother. El hijo, the son. El jar din, the garden. El libro, the hook. Vocabulary. El nino, the child. El panadero, tlie baker. El tio, the unde. La casa, the house. La hermana, the sister. La hija, the daughter. ^^^^k^ Have, the key. Carlos, Charles. Es, is. Luisa, Louisa. Mi, my. Muy, very. Pobre, poor. Quien, who, who'm,, "Tiene, has. Y, and. Exercise 1. 1. EI nino tiene un libro. 2. Carlos es mi hermano. 3. LuLsa es mi hermana. 4. [ Quien tiene la Have ? 5. Mi amigo tiene la Have y la pluma. 6. El caballo es grand e. 7. Mi tio es pobre. 8. La casa es grande. 9. El panadero tiene un hi jo y una bija. 10. Mi amigo tiene una casa y un jardin. 11. El jardin es muy grande. 12. El caballero tiene el dinero. 26 LESSON 1. Exercise 2. 1. My house is very large. 2. My brother has a horse. 3. The gentleman has a house. 4. The baker is my friend. 5*. The general is very poor. 6. Charles has my pen. 7. My table is very large. 8. My uncle is very prudent. 9. The daughter has a house, and the son has a garden. 10. The woman is very amiable. 11. My brother is a child. 12. The book is very large. Gram^tica. Grammar. 1 , There are three genders in the Spanish language : the masculine, the feminine, and the neuter. The definite article has in the singular a distinct form for each gender : masculine, el ; feminine, la ; neuter, lo : El padre, thefatlier. La inadre, the mother, Lo bueno, the good. Remarks. — 1. The neuter gender is only applicable to adjectives (numeros adjetivos) taken in an unlimited or indefinite sense, as : lo bueno, tJie good or what is good ; lo peor, tlic loorst or what is worst ; etc. This NEUTER GENDER, which has no plural, is therefore never applied to persons or things, but only to adjectives taken substantively, and to sub- stantives taken adjectivehj : Todo era grande en San Luis, lo rey, lo santo, lo capitan, everything was great in St. Louis (Louis IX.), tlie king, the saint, the captain. 2. The neuter article is not placed indifferently before all adjectives taken substantively. Thus, in the following sentences : El malo sera castigado, tlw wicked shall he punished ; El azul de este pano es demasia- do oscuro, tlie blue of this cloth is too dark ; — we could not make use of the neuter article lo, because those adjectives are taken substantively and are sufficiently determinate. It is evident, in fact, that in the first sen- tence, the word hombre, man, is understood, before malo, wicked; and in tlie second sentence, the Avord color, color ; before azul, blue. 2. Although the article el belongs only to the masculine gen- der, it may be placed, for the sake of euphony, before feminine nouns beginning with a long a, that is to say, whenever the stress of voice rests on that initial letter : el agua, the water ; el alma, the soul ; el ala, the wing ; el aguila, the eagle ; el ave, the bird. It must be observed, however, that this change of article is only ARTICLES, DIFFERENT FORMS. 27 admitted in the singular, and that we must say in the plural, las aguas, las almas, las alas, etc. Adjectives accompanying, the singular of such nouns must be placed in the feminine : el agua es fria, the water is cold ; etc. The same rules are to be observed in reference to words begin- ning with an h, as : el hacha es pesada, the ax is heavy ; las hachas, the axes ; etc. Nouns like America, America; abeja, hee ; alegria, yoy; habitacion, Imhitation ; etc. take the feminine article la, because the first a is not accented : La America, la habitacion, etc. 3. The Indefinite Article a, an, or the numeral one, is ren- dered by un before a masculine noun (the of uno being dropped before a noun), and by una before a feminine noun : Un herraano, a brother, Una hermana, a sister, Un libro, a hook. Una mesa, a table. 4 1 Adjectives should always be repeated before the nouns they qualify : El padre y la mad re. The father and {the) mother. La casa y el jardin. The house and (tlic) garden. El bUen lapiz y la buena pluma. The good pencil and {the good) pen. Note. — Some writers do not always observe this rule. General Observations on the Genders. — ^The Gender of nouns is generally known by their terminations : 1. Nouns ending in are masculine : Except mano, hand ; and nao, vessel. 2. Nouns ending in a are generally feminine. Those expressing rank, titles, and professions, as papa, pope ; profeta, 2)rophet, etc., and those ending in ma derived from the Greek, as clima, climate; idioma, idiom; poema, poem; dilema, dilemma; diploma, diploma; dogma, dogma; etc., and some others, are, however, of the mascuUne gender. A few of these words may be used either as masculine or as feminine. 3. Xouns ending in cion or tion are of. the feminine gender, as cuestion, question ; meditacion, meditation ; etc. 28 LESSON 2. These words are the same in both languages, except that, in Spanish, the t of the termination Hon of the English word is changed into a o whenever it has the sound of sh. 4. Nouns ending in Spanish in tad or dad, ■■ — terminations which correspond to the Latin termination tas, and to the Eng- lish termination ty, — are of the feminine gender, as humanidad, humanity ; puridad, purity ; adveisldad, adversity ; etc. General Rule for Latin Scholars. — Nouns derived from the Latin preserve in Spanish the same gender they have in Latin, with this excep- tion that those which are neuter in Latin are masculine in Spanish. 5. Compound nouns take the gender of the second word if the same is in the singular. Thus, the words aguamiel, honey and water ; contrahaz, wrong side ; are feminine ; whilst archilaud, a hind of lute ; and portafasil, gun-belt ; are masculine. 6. Compound words of which the second word is in the plu- ral are always masculine, even if the second word is feminine, as : cortaplumas, pen-hnife ; mondadientes, tooth-pick ; saca- botas, hoot-jack; etc. Observation on other Terminations. — Nouns having other termi- nations are suhject to so many exceptions that it is impossible to establish satisfactory rules in regard to them. Thus, mar, sea, is of both genders, but words compounded with mar are always feminine, as bajamar, low -tide ; pleamar, high-tide. Mar, joined to a proper noun, should be in the masculine, as el mar Baltico, the Baltic sea, etc. Leccioii II. Lesson II. PLURAL. Los, plural of el, > ,, Las, plural of la, > Bjemplos. Examples. El caballo es grande. The hoi-se is large. Los caballos son grandes. The horses are large. Enrii^ue tiene un libro. Henry has a book. PLURAL. 29 Maria tiene dos libros. Mi tio tiene tres casas. El general tiene cuatro caballos. Las sehoras son amables. Los ninos tienen dos plumas. El general es rico. Los generales son ricos. El reloj es hermoso. Los reloj es son hermosos. El Ingles es bueno. Los Ingleses son buenos. El paraguas es grande. Los paraguas, son grandes. El juez es justo. Los jueces son justos. Vocabulario. El abanico, the fan. El Americano, the American. El centavo, the cent. El cuarto, the room. El Frances, the Frenchman. El Ingles, the Englishman. El lapiz, the pencil. El muchaclio, the hoy. El oro, the gold. El pajaro, the bird. El psrro, the dog. El sombrero, the hat. El teatro, the theatre. La ciudad, the city. La muchacha, the girl. Mary has two books. My uncle has three houses. The general has four horses. The ladies are amiable. The children have two pens. The general is rich. The generals are rich. The watch is fine. The watches are fine. The Englishman is good. The Englishmen are good. The umbrella is large. The umbrellas are large. The judge is just. The judges are just. Vocabulary. Cnatro, four. De, of Dos, two. Enrique, Henry. Hermoso, handsome, fine. Industrioso, industrious. Jdven, young. Juan, John. Negro, black. Fequeno, sinall, little. Son, are. Tienen, have. Tres, three. Vigilante, watchful. Ya, already. Exercise 3. 1. Carlos y Enrique son los amigos de mi hermano. 2. El general tiene tres hermosos caballos. . 3. Los sombreros son negros. 4. Los muchachos tienen dos centavos. 5. Las seiioras tienen un abanico. 6. Los Franceses y los Ingleses son amigos. 7. Los pajaros son her- mosos. 8. La sefiora tiene dos hijos y tres hijas. 9. Mi amigo tiene dos hermanas. 10. Los Americanos son industriosos. 11. Los dos amigos son pobres. 12. Las tres muchachas son amables. 13. Los perros son vigilantes. 14. Los lapices son de oro. 15. [ y uieu tiene 30 LESSON 2, los libros ? 16. Juan tiene los libros y las plumas. 17. Las hijas de mi amigo son jovenes. 18. Los cuartos de la casa^on pequenos. 19. Las hijas de mi tio son ya grandes. 20. Los teatros de la ciudad son hermosos. Exercise 4. 1. The two horses are black. 2. The brothers of my friend are young. 3. The two gentlemen are English. 4. Henry has two hand- some dogs. 5. The friends of my brother are very poor. 6. The city has three theatres. 7. Charles and John are friends. 8. The Ameri- can has two brothers and three sisters. 9. My vmcle has four houses. 10. The two Frenchmen are very amiable. 11. The fans of the ladies are very fine. 12. The English have handsome horses. 13. The houses of the city are very large. 14. The generals are very prudent. 15. The hats are black. 16. The boys have three pencils. 17. John and Henry are small. 18. The rooms of my house are large. 19. The bakers are poor. 20. Charles has two pencils. Gram&tica. Grammar. 1 , The plural of the article el is los, and that of the article la is las. 2. Nouns ending with an unaccented vowel form their plural by adding S : El hermano, (he brother ; La hermana, the sister. Los hermanos, the brothers ; Las hermanas, the sisters. 3« Nouns ending with a consonant, or with an accented vowel, form their plural by adding es : El general, the general ; Los generales, the geiurals. La mnjer, the woman ; Las mujeres, the wonun. El aleli, tlie gilliflower ; Los alelies, the gillifiowcrs. El albala, the certificate ; Los albaldes, the certificates. Observation. — The few Spanish words ending with an accented e, 6 and u, form, however, their plural by the addition of an s. Thus, pie, foot ; cafe, coffee ; t^, tea; fricandd, fricandeau ; tisii, tissue; etc., become in the plural pies, cafes, tes, fricandos, tisus. Fapd, 'pajm ; mama, mamma ; sofi, sofa, likewise take s for the plural. Maravedi, maravedi, forms its plural in three ways, and is written maravedies, maravedis, and maravedises. • PLURAL. 31 4# Nouns ending in s, of which the last syllable is short , remain unchanged. Those which have the last syllable long add es : El lunes, tlw Monday ; Los liines, tlie Mondays. La hipotesis, ilie- hypotliesis ; Las hipotesis, the hypotheses, (pi.) El Frances, the Frenchman ; Los Franceses, the Frenchmen. El Ingles, the Englishman ; Los Ingleses, tlie Englishmen. 5« Nouns ending in Z change this letter into C, and add es for the plural : E\ juezy tJie judge ; hos jneces, the judges. La luz, the light ; Las luces, the lights, Obseua^ation. — Some writers do not admit this 'change of the z into c, and simply add es to form the plural of these nouns ending in 2. 6« Proper nouns follow the same rules as common nouns : Los Cervantes y los Mendozas, The Cervantes and Mendozas. 7t Although in a few compound nouns, as casamata, case- mate ; ricohome or ricohombre, a Spanish nobleman in the Mid- dle Af/es ; each of the words takes the plural form, making casasmatas, ricos hombres ; in most other words the last word only is- put in the plural, as barbacana^ an outwork in a fort ; aguachirle, a sort of drink; which make barbacanas, agpia- chirles, etc., in the plural. 8. Adjectives, as will be seen hereafter, agree in gender and number with the nouns which they qualify. The Plural of Adjectives is formed like the plural of nouns : El muchacho es bueno. The boy is good. Los muchachos son buenos, The boys are good. 9, In Spanish, as well as in English, there are nouns which are only used in the singular, and others which have no singular, as : albricias, presents ; angarillas, cruet-stands ; viveres, pro- visions i trebedes, tripods ; etc. Note. — Tliere are a few words which have or have not any singular according to their meaning, as esposas, hand-cuffs; which is not the plural of esposa, wife ; grilles, irontis ; which is not the phiral of grillo, cricket ; and a few others. 32 LESSON 3. Leccion III. Lesson III. CONTRACTION OF PREPOSITION WITH ARTICLE. De. of, from. A, to, at. Del, masc. sing. ] De la, fern. sing, of the, Al, masc. sing. A la, fern. sing. to the, De los, masc. pi. from the. A los, masc. pi. at the. De las, fern. pi. . A las, fem. pi. . Declinacion. Masculine Singular. El hombre, the man. Del hombre, of oy froKn the mem. Al hombre, to or at the man. Declension. Masculine PluraL Los hombres, the men. De los hombres, of or from the men. A los hombres, to or at the men. Feminine Singular. Feminine Plural. La mujer, the woman. Las mujeres, the women. De la mujer, of or from the woman. De las mujeres, of or from the women. A la mujer, to or at the luoman. A las mujeres, to or at tJie women. Ejemplos. El sombrero del muchacho es nuevo. La hermana de mi amigo es pobre. El padre Z.) are. Ustedes salen, ** your Lordships go out, ** you (pi.) go out. Ustedes dan, *' your Lordships give, ** yow {pi.) givQ. Ustedes escriben, ** your Lordships u^te, ** you (^/.) write. Note. — We use, in fact, the same form of expressing ourselves in Eng- lish when we say, speaking to a Judge, an Archbishop, etc. : Your Honor hiows ... ; your Grace is ...; etc., instead of the plain and usual : You know ... ; you are ... ; etc. In conjugating verbs the student will use vosotros as given, but when addressing a person or persons will use usted and ustedes. 4» Verbs are conjugated interrogatively by placing the verb before its subject. This takes place in all cases of interrogation, as is the case with to have, to be, to will, etc.: i Tengo yo ? Have I? i Tiene el hombre ? Has the man ? I Sabe el padre ? Does the father Jcnow (lit. knows the father) ? i Van los muchachos ? Do the hoys go ? I Que dice la senorn ? What docs the lady say ? I Que decian los hombres ? Wliat did the men say ? i Sabe V. cuando viene mi Do you know when my father coraes (lit. padre ? v^hen comes my father) ? 5. In interrogative sentences it is considered an elegant way of expressing one's self, to place the object before the subject when the latter is not a pronoun : ^ i Tiene dinero el hombre ? Has tlie man any money ? i Es bueno el vino ? Is the wine good ? 6t Each person of the verb having generally in Spanish, as in Latin, a different termination, the accompanying pronouns may be and are generally left out in conversation, and even in the conjugation, when the sentence is otherwise sufficiently clear. 40 LESSON 5. But usted and ustedes should not be left out" however, as they accompany the verb in the third person singular and third per- son plural, as well as el, he ; ella, she ; and ellos (masc), ellas (fern.), they, and as their omission might create confusion : Teiigo, / have. Tenemos, we have. Tienes, thou hast. Tienen, they have. Sale, he or she goes out. Salen, they go out. Observation. — In interrogative sentences it is also better to preserve the pronouns. 7i As a sentence may be construed in different ways in Span- ish, as will be seen hereafter, the interrogative form may often be found in affirmative sentences : Tiene V. razon, You are right. Es V. muy bueno, You are very kind. Habla V. muy bien, You speak very well. 8» Some or any, before nouns, are either left out or rendered by algun, alguna, algunos, algunas. When standing alone, alguno, alguna, algunos, algunas are used : i Tiene V. vino or algun vino ? Have you (any) wine ? Tengo alguno, I have some. Leccion V. Lesson Y. Verbs ser and estar, to he. Present Tense of ser, to he. Affirmatively. Interrogatively. Yo soy, / am. Soy yo ? am I? Tii eves, thou art. Eres tii ? art thou ? El es, he is. Es el ? is lie ? p]lla es, she is. Es ella ? is she ? Nosotros somos, we are. Somos nosotros ? arc tve ? Vosotros sois, > Sois vosotros ? % Es usted {sing.) ? [ arc tjou ? Usted es {sing.), \yoit are. Ustedes son (jt??.), J Son ustedes (i?Z.)? J Ellos son, they (masc.) are. Son ellos ? are they (masc.) ? Ellas son, they (fem.) are. Son ellas ? are they (iem.) ? VERBS SER AND ESTAR. 41 Ejemplos. La vida es corta. Somos mortales. Mi padre es medico. Mis hermanos son pintores. Carlos es bueno. Juan y Enrique son malos. El profesor es muy docto. V. es muy alto. Los muchachos son pequeiios. Maria es mi hermana. La madre es vieja. El padre es ciego. La mucliacha es bonita. La leche es blanca.^ El plomo es pesado. El reloj es de oro. Los candeleros son de plata. . El dinero es mio. La casa es del medico. Este vino es de Espaiia. La flor es para mi hermana. La maquina es para copiar cartas. i Quien es V. ? El amor de Dios es el principio de la sabiduria. Examples. Life is short. We are mortal. My father is a physician. My brothers are painters. Charles is good. John and Henry are bad. The professor is very learned. You are very tall. The boys are small. Mary is my sister. The mother is old. The father is blind. The girl is pretty. Milk is white. Lead is heavy. The watch is of gold. The candlesticks are of silver. The money is mine. The house belongs to the physician. This wine is from Spain. The flower is for my sister. The machine is to copy letters. Who are you ? The love of God is the beginning of wisdom. Present Tense of estar, to he. Affirmatively. Yo estoy, / am. Tii estas, thou art. El esta, he is. Ella esta, sJie is. Nosotros estamos, we are. Vosotros estais, ^ Usted esta (sing.), y you are. XJstedes estan (pL), J EUos estan, they (masc.) are. Ellas estan, they (fem.) are. Interrogatively. Estoy yo ? arn I ? Estas tii ? art thou ? Esta el ? is he ? Esta ella ? is she ? Estamos nosotros ? are we ? Estais vosotros ? ^ Esta usted {sing. ) ? V are you ? Estan ustedes(^^.)? J Estan ellos ? are tliey (masc.) ? Estan ellas ? are they (fem.)? 1 See L. 8. 42 LESSON 5. Ejemplos. Mi hermana esta triste. Yo estoy muy coutento. El cafe esta Mo. La carne esta asada. Los muchachos estan en la calle. Mi aniigo esta en Paris. Carlos esta enfermo. I Donde esta mi sombrero ? El sombrero esta de moda. Examples. My sister is sad. I am very pleased. The coffee is cold. The meat is roasted. The boys are in the street. My friend is in Paris. Charles is sick. Where is my hat ? The hat is in the fashion. Ser and estar compared. Ser bueno, to he good. Estar bueno, to he well (in health). Ser malo, to be bad (wicked). Estar malo, to be ill (sick). Ser vivo, to be lively. Estar vivo, to be alive. Ser cansado, to be tiresome. Estar cansado, to be tired. Vocabulario. Vocabulary. El abogado, the lawyer. El campo, the country. La calle, the street. La puerta, tlie door. Agrio, sour. Ahora, now. Bueno, good, well. Cerrado, closed, shut. Contento, pleased, satisfied. Donde, where. Gracias, thank you. Jdven, young. Lejos,/ar. Ldndres, London. Malo, had, ill. Nadie, nobody, no one. Triste, sad. Sabe V. 1 do you know I Exercise 9. 1. Los dos hermanos de Carlos estan ahora en Paris. 2. i Quien es V. ? 3. Soy el hijo del medico. 4. [ Donde estan los libros ? 5. Estan sobre la mesa en mi cuarto. 6. i Es V. medico ? 7. No, seiior, soy abogado. 8. i Es bueno el vino ? 9. Esta agrio. 10. Las mnchachas estan en el jardin, y los muchachos estan en la calle. 11. La hija del panadero es muy joven. 12. Juan y Maria estan en la casa del general. 13. Mi casa esta muy lejos de aqui. 14. Los dos medicos son Franceses. 15. ^ Es V. Americano ? 16. No, senor, soy IngU's. 17. I Es V. de Londres ? 18. Si, senor, soy de Londres, y mi padre es de Livei^ool. 19. Los dos hijos del carpintero estan muy malos. 20. i Donde esta Juan 1 21. Esta con mi hermano. 22. El cafe es bueno, pero esta frio. 23. i Estan V. V. contentos ? 24. Esta- mos muy contentos ahora. 25. i Quien esta en mi cuarto ? 26. Nadie, VERBS SER AND ESTAR, 43 el cuai-to esta cerrado. 27. La hija del general es muy amable. 28. I Con quien evSta mi madre ? 29. Ella esta con mis (my) dos her- manas. 30. Los cazadores estan en el bosque. Exercise 10. 1. Do you know where the book is (where is the book)? 2. The book is on the table. 3. Where is the father now 1 4. He is in London. 5. Is he well ? 6. He is very well, thank you. 7. Are the Americans and the English friends? 8. They are friends now. 9. Who are you ? 10. I am Charles's friend. 11. Where is he ? 12. He is in the country. 13. The two sons of the physician are small, but they are very bad. 14. Here is my book. 15. Is the cheese good ? 16. The cheese and the bread are veiy good. 17. Is the baker an Ameiican ? 18. No, sir, he is a Frenchman. 19. The two hunt- ers are brothers. 20. Are you pleased here ? 21. Yes, we have money, and we ar» pleased. 22. My brother's friend is a lawyer. 23. Who is at the door? 24. A boy with apples. 25. John and Henry are in the city. 26. Where are the chickens ? 27. The chickens are now in the garden. 28. The wine is sour and bad. 29. Who is sa4? 30. Nobody is sad here. Gram^tica. Grammar. 1, Although the two Spanish verbs ser and estar are both rendered in English by the verb to be, they cannot be used indifferently one for the other, and there is perhaps no greater difficulty for the English student than the one attending the proper use of these verbs. Ser is used when the attribute is inherent or essential to the subject, while estar is to be used when the attribute is only acci- dental or temporary. This, however, will be more clearly shown by the following rules : Ser is used : 1. To express the condition, trade, profession, employment, rank, dignity of persons, etc. : Ser pintor, to he a painter. Ser general, to he a general. Ser juez, to he a judge. Ser rey, to he a king. Ser librero, to he a hookseller. Ser soldado, to be a soldier. 44 LESSON 5. 2. To express the qualities pertaining to the mind, the soul, the heart, and disjjosition : Ser virtuoso, to be virtuous. Ser tierno, to he tender, Ser habil, to he skillfal. Ser alegre, to he merry. 3. To express the qualities and. defects of persons and things when deemed permanent : Ella es bonita, she is pretty. El hombre es sordo, the man is deaf. El es feo, he is ugly. Pedro es ciego, Peter is hlind. 4. To express general truths : La vida es corta, life is short.^ La muerte es terrible, death is terrihle. 5. To indicate the size, volume, etc., of persons or things : Ser chico, to he small. Ser grueso, to he stout, thick, etc. Ser grande, to he tall. 6. To express the number of persons or things : Los enemigos eran diez mil, y noso- The enemies were ten thousand, and tros eramos solo cinco mil, we were only five thousand. 7. To express the natural qualities of substances : La miel es dulce, honey is sweet. El plomo es pesado, lead is heavy, 8. In connection with the materials of which objects are made : El reloj es de oro. The watch is of gold. Los candeleros son de hierro, The candlesticks are of iron. ' 9. To indicate possession, origin, destination, aptness, etc. : El libro es mio, Tlie hook is mine. Este vino es de Francia, This wine is from France. Este muchacho es de Madrid, This hoy is from Madrid. El libro es para V., The hook is for you. El no es para trabajar, He is not fit to work. 10. When to be means to happen : I Cuando sera eso ? Wlien will that he (happen) ? 11. When speaking of day, night, time, etc. : Es de dia, it is day. Es tarde, it is late. Es de noche, it is nigJit. Es temprano, it is early. ~ 1 See L. 29, p. 169. VERBS SER AND ESTAR. 45 12. When used impersonally and governing the following infinitive with the preposition de : Es de desear que llegue hoy, It is desirable that lie sJwuld arrive to-day. 2, Estar is used : 1. To express the state of health : Estar hue no, to he welL . Estar malo, to he ill, 2. To express existence in a locality : Estar en el campo. To he in the country. El estaba a la puerta, He luas at the door. 3. When joined to certain adjectives to express a state^ a way of being J or feelings and emotions : Estar alegre, To he merry. Estar contento. To he pleased. El agna esta caliente, The water is warm. 4. As auxiliary to conjugate a verb in the gerund : Estoy comiendo, / am eating. El esta leyendo, he is reading, etc. 5. Before adverbs or adverbial expressions denoting condition : Mi sombrero esta de nioda. My hat is in the fashion. Estamos de priesa, TFe are in a hurry. La casa esta bien fabricada, TJie house is well huilt. 6. To express intention, luillingness, readiness, and to express that a thing is not completed : Yo estoy para salir, / intend to go out. Yo estaba por echarle de casa, I wished to pat hiin out of the house. La casa esta por acabar, The hoicse is not yet finished. 7. To express occupation or disposition of the body or mind : Hoy estoy de guardia, To-d/iy I am on duty. El estaba de rina. He felt like quarreling. 8. When speaking of dignities and offices temporarily held, estar may be used with the preposition de : El general H. esta de gobernador de General H. is (acting) governor of la isla de Cuba, the island of Cuba, 46 LESSON 6. It would, however, be perfectly correct to say : El general H. es gobernador de la isla de Cuba, the first sentence being only a more elegant way of expressing one's self. 3. Ser and estar compared : Ser alegre means to be of a merry disposition, whilst estar alegre means to he merry at a certain moment^ etc. These ex- amples, which might be multiplied indefinitely, will be found sufficient to explain the difference which exists in Spanish between ser and estar » when the attribute is inherent in the subject, or when it is only accidental. (See Examples.) 4# The Indefinite Article is omitted before words indicating professions or nationality, unless they are preceded by adjectives : Este hombre es soldado, This man is a soldier. Es un buen soldado. He is a good soldier. El es Frances, He is a Frenchman. Observation. — The Indefinite Article may be omitted, however, when the noun is accompanied by an adjective, especially when adjective and noun express but one inseparable idea : El es buen miisico, he is a good mimcian. Leccion VI. Lesson VI. USE OF THE PREPOSITIONS DE AND PARA. Ejemplos. Examples, T> 1 1 , • 1-1 ) Paul has a eold watch (a watch of Pablo tiene un reloi de oro. > ° ^ ) gold). Tenemos dos mesas de marmol. We have two marble tables. i Tienen V. Y. plumas de acevo ? Have you any steel pens ? Tenemos plumas de oro y de acero. We have gold and steel pens. Adolfo tieue un chaleco de seda. Adolphus has a silk waistcoat. •El medico tiene una casa de madera. The physician has a wooden house. Los muchachos tienen un tintero j de plomo. : The boys have a leaden inkstand. DE AND PARA. 47 Tenemos una maquina de lavar. Compaiiia de Relojes de Nueva York. Carruages de prim era clase. Una bomba de vapor. Agiia de Florida. Un maestro de escuela. Una maquina de coser. Mesas para comedor. | Tinte para el pelo. Polvos para insectos. Efectos para marineros. / Vocabulario. El algodon, the cottonTl El almacen, the store. J . El arce, the maple. ^ El azucar, the sugar. El billar, the billiard. El cuchillo, the knife. El extinguidor, the extinguisher. El fabricante, the inanvfaciurer. El fuego, the fire. El hierro, the iron. El instrumento, the instrument. El joyero, the jeweler. El pedazo, the piece. El plomo, the lead. El tiempo, the time. El tintero, the inkstand. El vapor, the steam. El vidrio,^ the glass. We have a washing-macliine. New York Watch Company. First-class carriages. A fire-engine. Fjiirida water. A schoolmaster. A sewing-machine. Dining-room tables (tables for din- ing-rooms). Hair-dye (dye for the hair). Insect powders (powder for insects). Sailors' goods (goods for sailors). Vocabulary. La caja, the safe, the box. La cana,2 the cane. La caoba, the tnahogany. La cerveza, the beer. La hacienda, the estate. La seda, the silk. AUi, there. Champana, Champagne, Celebre, celebrated. Desde, si^ice. Escribe, T write. Para, for. Quiere V. 1 Will you have ? Do you icish 1 Quiero, / wish, I will have. Senor, sir. Seuora, madam, Mrs. Vende, sells. Exercise 11. 1. [ Que vino tiene V. en la casa ? 2. Tengo vino de Champana. 3. Las plumas de acero de Spencer son muy celebres. 4. Tenemos 1 Vidrio, glass, refers only to the substance called glass, while vaso is used for a glass to drink in. 2 Cana, cans, does not refer to a walking-stick, which is un baston. 48 LESSON 6. • una caja cle hierro en el almacen. 6. Tenemos tambien nn extingui- dor de fuego. 6. i Tienen V. V. una mesa de billar ? 7. Tenemos dos. 8. Mi hermano vende instrumeutos para joyeros. 9. ^ Y que vende v.? 10. Soy fabricante de mesas para comedor. 11. Mi hermano es dependiente en la Compania de Manhattan. 12. i Tienen Y. Y. una maquina de vapor en la hacienda? 13. Si, seiior, tenemos una desde mucho tiempo (a long time). 14. i Quiere Y. un paraguas de seda 6 de algodon ? 15. Quiero uno de seda. 16. El padre de Enrique tiene una casa de campo. 17. Mi hermana tiene un traje de seda. 18. Tenemos una mesa de caoba. 19. ^ Quiere Y. aziicar de caiia ? 20. Quiero aziicar de arce. Exercise 12, 1. What will you have ? 2. I wish a piece of bread. 3. Do you write with a gold pen ? 4. No, sir, I wTite with a steel pen. 5. In what company are you (a) clerk ? 6. In the New York Watch Com- pany. 7. What does your (sn) brother sell ? 8. He sells silk hats. 9. Have you a glass inkstand ? 10. No, sir, I have a leaden ink- stand. 11. What knife will you have 1 12. I wish a butcher's knife. 13. What hat has Henry? 14. He has a hunter's hat. 15. Does the merchant sell wine ? 16. He sells wine and beer. 17. With whom are the hunters in the wood ? 18. They are there with the young soldier. 19. Have the ladies a fan ? 20. They have two fans. Gramatiea. Grammar. It The material of ivhich a thing is made is indicated by the preposition de, of, from, between the name of the thing and that of the material : Un sombrero de seda, A silk hat (lit. a hat of silk). Un reloj de oro, J gold watch {a watch of gold). 2, The word representing the nature, species, locality/ or qtial- ity^of a thing, which in English is placed first, comes second in Spanish, and is joined to the first noun by de, of, from : Un traje de verano, A slimmer dress. Agua de Ihivia, Rain-water. Vino de Burdeos, Bordeaux wine, claret, Azucar de cana, Sugar-cane. THE NEGATIVE. 49 3« The word representing a particular use, appendage, pur- pose^ physical or moral property, place ivhere things are kept, etc., comes second in Spanish, and is generally joined to the first noun by the prepositions para, /or; or de, of, from: Maquina para gas, Gas-machine. Jaulas para pajaros, Bird-cages. Estante para sombreros, Hat-stand. Maquinas de coser, Sewing-machines, Leccion Til. Lesson VII. THE NEGATIVE. No tener, not to Negatively : Yo no tengo (no teugo), I have not. Tu no tienes, El no tiene, Ella no tiene, Nosotros no tenemos, Vosotros no teneis, listed (sing.) no tiene, Ustedes {pi.) no tienen, Ellos no tieneu, Ellas no tienen. thou hast not. he has not. she has not. we have not. you have not. they (masc.) have not. they (fern.) have not. Negatively and Interrogatively: No tengo yo ? No tienes tu ? No tiene el ? No tiene ella ? No tenemos nosotros ? No teneis vosotros ? No tiene usted (sing.) ? No tienen ustedes (pi.) ? No tienen ellos ? No tienen ellas ? 4 have I not ? hast thou not ? has hs not ? has she not ? have we not ? have you not ? have they (masc.) not ? have tJicy (fern.) notl 50 LESSON 7. Ser and estar, to he. Negatively : Yo no soy, Yo no estoy, etc. / am not. etc. Negatively and Interrogatively : No soy yo ? No estoy yo ? j etc. am I not ? etc. Jamas, never, ever. Nada, nothing^ not anything. Nadie, nobody , not anybody. Ni, neither, nor. Negative with Ninguno, (sing.) \ no one, none, no, Ningunos, (pi.) \ not any. Nunca, never. Yo no tengo nada, or nada tengo. \ Yo no qniero ninguno, or ninguno ) quiero. J El no esta jamas en casa, or jamas esta el en casa. ^ i\ no tiene nunca dinero, or nun- ca tiene el dinero. No sale nadie, or nadie sale. No tengo ni pan ni queso, or ni pan ni queso tengo. I have nothing ; I don't have any- thing. I don't wish any. He is never at home. He never has any money. Nobody goes out. I have neither bread nor cheese. Ejemplos. i Es pobre el hombre ? No es pobre, es rico. i No tiene V. dinero ? Ni dinero ni credito tengo. i No quiere V. pan ? Nada quiero hoy. I No sale mi padre hoy ? El no sale. Luisa no es am able. i Vende sombreros el comerciante ? El no vende ningunos. i Que tiene V. en la caja ? Nada tengo. Nadie sabe la leccion. Isabel no es dichosa. Ni libros ni plumas tengo. I Examples. Is the man poor ? He is not poor, he is rich. Have you no money ? I have neither money nor credit. Don't you wish any bread ? I don't wish anything to-day. Does not my father go out to-day ? He does not go out. Louisa is not amiable. Does the merchant sell hats ? He does not sell any. What have you in the box ? I have nothing. Nobody knows the lesson. Isabel is not happy. I have neither books nor pens. THE NEGATIVE. 51 Vocabulario. El aceite, the oil. La lampara, the lamp. La leccion, the lesson. La luz, the light. Abajo, down stairs. Alguno, some, any, some one, any one, somebody, anybody. Aquello, that, that thing. Vocabulary. Compra V. 1 do you buy ? Compro, / buy. Esto, this, this thing. Jamas, never, ever. Lis to, ready. Nada, nothing, not anything. Nadie, nobody, not anybody. Ni, neither, nor. Ninguno, not any, none, no. Nunca, never. Porque I why t Porque, because. Sabe V. T do you know ? Yo se, / know. Sin, without. Todavia, yet. Vendo, / sell. Exercise 13. 1. I Tiene V. dinero hoy ? 2. Tengo dinero, pero no tengo pan en la casa. 3. j Esta malo el muchacho ? 4. No esta nialo hoy, esta muy bueno. 5. [ Esta aqiii el panadero ? 6. El panadero no esta aqui, pero el carnicero esta aqiii. 7. i Es V. el amigo de Carlos ? 8. No, senor, soy el amigo de Enrique. 9. i Quiere V. un pedazo de pan con queso ? 10. Quiero pan, pero sin queso. H. [ Quiere V. el dinero? 12. Todavia no. 13. [Donde esta Juan? 14. Noestaaqui, esta abajo. 15. [. No esta la casa del general en la calle de Madrid ? 16. El general no tiene casa aqui. 17. i Quiere V. esto 6 aquello ? 18. Quiero esto, pero no aquello. 19. [ Tienen pan los muchachos ? 20. Tienen pan, pero no tienen carne. 21. [No tiene V. oro ? 22. No tengo oro, pero tengo plata. 23. i Porque no esta V. en el jardin con los muchachos ? 24. Porque no quiero. 25. i Es rico el medico'f 26. No es rico, pero tiene una casa en Nueva York. 27. I Porque no tiene V. luz en el cuarto ? 28. Porque no tengo aceite para mi lampara. 29. i Compra V. vino 6 cerveza ? 30. No compro ni vino- ni cerveza ; no quiero nada. 31. Nunca sabe V. la leccion. 32. i Tiene alguno mi libro ? 33. Nadie tiene el libro. Exercise 14. 1. Have you a silk umbrella ? 2. I have two umbrellas, but not of silk. 3. Are you a physician ? 4. No, sir, I am a merchant. 5. Have you not a store in Broadway ? 6. No, sir, my store is not in Broadway. 7. Are you not ready? 8. No, sir, not yet. 9. The Frenchman and the Englishman are not friends. 10. Have the sol- diers any guns ? 11. They have no guns, but they have sabers. 12. The wine is not good ; do you know why? 13. I don't know 52 LESSON 7. why. 14. Have you a theater in the city ? 15. We have no theater yet. 16. Who is in the garden? 17. Nobody is in the garden. 18. Have you anything for my brother '? 19. I have nothing to-day. 20. Has John any friends ? 21. He has neither friends nor money. 22. Do you know the lesson to-day ? 23. Nobody knows the lesson. 24. Why not ? 25. Because we are sick. 26. Are the boys in the room I 27. The boys are not in the room, but the girls are there. 28. What do you sell to Henry ? 29. I don't sell anything to any- body. 30. The trees of the garden are not green. 31. Is Charles with any one in the room? 32. No, sir, with no one. Gramatica. Grammar. 1 , In negative sentences, no is placed before the verb : Yo no tengo, / Jiave not. i No quiere el ? ^Does he not wish ? i No es V. ? Are you not ] El no quiere, He does not wish. 2# The Spaniards use a double negative to render the nega- tion stronger : No quiero nada, I wish for nothing ; I donH'icish anything. No tengo ninguno, / have none. No le hablo nunca, / never speak to him. Observation. — The adverb no is, however, omitted when we j)lace the other negative at the beginning of the sentence : Nada quiero. Ninguno tengo. Nunca le hablo. 3. Jamas and nunca have the same meaning in the nega- tive, and are generally placed at the beginning of the sentence, without the adverb no : Jamas vi tal cosa, or nunca vi tal cosa, / never saiu such a thing. Observation. — Jamas seems, however, preferable in the Present Tense, and nunca in the Past Tense. It would, therefore, be more correct to say: • Nunca tuvo amigos^ he never had any friends ; but jamas tiene dinero, he never has any money. 4i Jamas and nunca, or nunca and jamas, are often con nected to give more expression to the sentence: Nunca jamas lo dire, I shall luver tell it. No le olvidare por nunca jamas, I slmll never forget him. THE NEGATIVE. 53 5. Jamas is often connected with por siempre, or para siempre, for ever ; and means quite the opposite of nunca : Por or Para siempre jamas me acordare de el, / shall remember him forever. I^OTE. — Jamas, "when not accompanied by no, and not at the beginning of the sentence, means ever : I Ha vis to V. jamas tal cosa ? Have you ever seen such a thing ? 6i The negative ni may precede the adverbs jamas, nunca, and even the other negatives, as nada, nadie, etc. : No conozco su casa, ni nunca I don't know his houses nor shall I ever ire, go. Ni nunca le vi, ni le vere, / tiever saw him, nor will I see him. Eso no es verdad, ni nadie lo It is not true, nor will any one say dira, so. Ni yo, ni ninguno de mis ami- Neither I nor any of my friends will gos iremos alia, go there. 7. Two negatives may come after the verb : No quiero tampoco nada, / don't wish anything either. El no quiere jamas nada. He never wishes for anything. 8. Although no is used to form the negative, it is used some- times to give more strength to the affirmative : Mejor es el trabajo que no la ociosidad, Labor is preferable to idleness. Observation. — In sentences like the above, no might be omitted with- out altering the sense, and should in fact be omitted, if its addition should give rise to any doubtful meaning. 9. Ninguno (of which the feminine is ninguna, and the plural ningunos, 7nasc., ningunas, fem.) drops the last letter before a masculine noun in the singular : No tengo ningun libro, I have no book. The same word is used for the English no (meaning not any) before a noun : Ningun hombre, no man. Ninguna mujer, no ivoman. Ningunos hombres, no men. Ningunas mujeres, no wonnen. When standing alone it means none, no one, etc. Observation. — Have you no book ? may be rendered in Spanish by : jNo tiene V. nn libro 1 or by: iNo tiene V. ningun libro I The same 54 LESSON 8. rule holds good for the plural : Have you no hooks ? [ No tiene V. libros 1 i No tiene V. ningunos libros ? 10. No, connected with a pronoun, an adverb, and even with other parts of speech, is generally placed last : Yo no, not I. Asi no, not so. Eso no, not so. Todavia no, not yet. Hoy no, not to-day. 1 1 , Alguno (of which the feminine is alguna, and the plural algunos, masc, algimas, fem.), meaning some^ <^ny, some one^ any one, somebody, anybody, drops the last letter (like ninguno) before a masculine noun in the singular, and may either come in the sentence or be omitted : Tiene V. algun dinero ? or ) j Tiene V.dinero? \ Have ym any money ? Observation. — The student should be careful never to translate not anything by no algo, nor not anybody by no algimo, — a mistake which is very common among beginners. Nada, nadie, or ninguno must be used- in these cases. leccion YIII. Lesson YIII. ADJECTIVES. FORMATION OF THE FEMININE. Ejemplos. Examples. El muchacho es bueno. The boy is good. La muchacha es buena. The girl is good. El caballo es hermoso. The horse is fine. La casa es hermosa. The house is fine. El hijo es feo. The son is ugly. La hija es bonita. The daughter is pretty. El caballero es Frances. The gentleman is French. La senora es Inglesa. The lady is English. Antonio es holgazan. Anthony is lazy. Cristina es holgazana. Chnstina is lazy. Jose es trabajador. Joseph is industrious. Juana es trabajadora. Jane is industrious. ADJECTIVES. FORMATION OF THE FEMININE. 55 El padre es grave. La madre es alegre. El aziicar es dulce. La yerba es verde. El trabajo es facil. La flor es azul. Fernando es joven. Julia es cortes. The father is grave. The mother is lively. The sugar is sweet. The grass is green. The work is easy. The flower is blue. Ferdinand is young. Julia is polite. Agreement of Adjectives. I Es GuilleiTno bueno 6 malo ? iEs Isabel buena 6 mala ? El tio y el padre son viejos. La tia y la madre son viejas. El tio y la tia son ricos. Is William good or bad ? Is Isabel good or bad ?. The uncle and the father are old. The aunt and the mother are old. The' uncle and aunt are rich. El pobre. El jDobre viejo. La pobre vieja. Un ciego. — Una ciega. El sabio es prudente. El grande. — La grande. Adjectives used Substantively. The poor man. The poor old man. The poor old woman. A blind man. — A blind woman. The wise man is prudent. The large one(masc.). — The large one(fem.). Vocabulario. El cafe, the coffee. El conde', the count. El criado, the servant, m. El primo, the cousin, ni. El rey, the king. El te, the tea. El trabajo, the tvork. El traje, the dress La condesa, the countess. La criada, the servant-girl. La'isla, the island. La legumbre, tJie vegetable. Vocabulary. La mujer, the woman, wife. La prima, the cousin, f. La reina, the queen. La tone, the tower. Agradable, agreeable. Alegre, lively. Aleman, German. Alto, high. Benito, pretty. Ciego, blind. Dificil, difficitlt. Enfermo, sick, ill. Facil, easy. Feliz, happy. Fee, ugly, homely. Fiel, faithful. Infeliz, unhappy. OrguUoso, proud. Sabio, wise. Sordo, deaf. Timido, timid. Valiente, brave. Viejo, old. Tonto, stupid. Exercise 15. 1. El hijo de Juan es muy tonto. 2. Las dos hijas del panadero son muy bonitas. 3. El padre del comerciante es todavia muy joven. 56 LESSON 8. 4. Los solclados del principe son muy valientes. 5. Mi leccion es muy dificil. 6. El primo y la prima son feos. 7. La mujer {tcife) de Pedro es sorda. 8. El pobre viejo esta malo. 9. i Que pedazo quiere V. ? — Quiero el grande. 10. Las dos senoras son alemanas. 11. Los caballos de mi tio son negros. 12. La torre es muy alta. 13. El conde es orgulloso,, pero la condesa es muy amable. 14. El her- mano de Luisa es muy feliz. 15. Las dos muchachas son liermanas. 16. [ Cuantos criados tiene V. '? 17. Tengo dos criados y ties criadas. 18. Mi hermana tiene un hermoso traje de seda. 19. El rey de la isla es viejo, pero la reina es joven. 20. El general tiene una her- mosa casa en el campo. 2L ^ Es bueno el cafe 1 22. El cafe es bueno, pero el te es malo. 23, i Que vende la mujer 1 24. Vende buenas manzanas. 25. i Porque esta V. triste 1 26. Porque mi padre esta enfermo. 27. La ciudad es pequeiia, pero muy agradable. 28. El perro es fiel. 29. i Estan V. Y. contentas, senoras ? 30. Estamos muy contentas ahora. 31. Las cerezas no son dulces. Exercise 16. 1. Are the horses good? 2. They are good, but small. 3. Have you (any) flowers in the two gardens ? 4. We have flowers in the little one, and vegetables in the large one. 5. Why are you so sad, madam ? 6. Because the children are sick. 7. The French women are lively and amiable. 8. The houses of New York are high. 9. The English women are handsome. 10. The general's sister is happy, but his (su) brother is unhappy. 11. The father, mother, and children are sick. 12. The houses of the city are large. 13. Are the two ladies American ? 14. No, sir, they are German. 15. Is the woman blind ? 16. She is deaf. 17. Is the baker's daughter pretty? 18. She is very homely, but very amiable. 19. My work is easy, but my brother's work is very difficult. 20. Louisa and Mary are cousins. 21. Mary is very lively, but Louisa is very timid. 22. Charles's father is wise and prudent. 23. Henry's brother is very rich, but he is not proud. 24. Julia and Mary are the good friends of my sister. 25. Have you (any) wine in the house ? 26. We have no wine, but we have very good beer. ADJECTIVES. FoWa^x'ON^^I^^IIE FEMININE. 57 Gramatica. Grammar. 1. Adjectives agree in Spanish, as in almost all other lan- guages, in gender and number with the noun which they qualify. Adjectives ending in form their feminine by changing into a, as : Bueno (m.), buena (/.), good ; Malo (m.), mala (/.), had ; Alto (m.), alta (/.), high ; etc. The same rule applies to nouns having a feminine : Un piinadero, a baker ; una panadera, a {female) haker, or a baker's wife. Un criado, a (inale) servant ; una criada, a {female) servant. Un tio, an uncle ; una tia, an aunt. Wi priino, my {male) cousin ; mi prima, my (fcDiale) cousin. ^li hermano, my brotlier ; mi hermana, my sister. Un viudo, a widovxr ; luia viuda, a widow. Un cocinero, a {male) cook ; una cocinera, a {female) cook. Observations. — Augmentatives and Diminutives ending in ete or ote also change the last letter into a for the feminine : Eegordete {m.), regordeta (/.), small and stout ; Altote (m.), altota (/.), very tall ; etc. 2. Adjectives ending in n add an a for the feminine : Holgazan, m., idle; holgazana, /. Haron, in., lazy ; harona, /. Exceptions. — Ruin, contemptible ; comun, common ; and all Adjectives ending in en, as j oven, young ; remain unchanged. 3. Adjectives referring to the nationality and ending with a consonant add a for the feminine : Frances, m., French; francesa, /. Ingles, m., English; inglesa, /. Aleman, m., German; alemana, /. Irlandes, m., Irish; irlandesa, /. Espanol, ni., A^jmnish ; espanola, /. Note. — Among the Adjectives of this last class, some are found that terminate in a, and do not undergo any change in the feminine, as peraa, Persian; moscovita, Moscovite ; etc. 58 LESSON 8. 4* Adjectives ending in or also add a for the feminine : Trabajador, m., indicstriouSy diligent; trabajadora, /. Traidor, 111., treacherous; traidora, /. Mayor, greater; menor, smaller ; and a few others, like anterior, ante- rior; etc., form an exception to this rule. Note. — Most of the Adjectives ending in or are often used substan- tively : Un trabajador (m.), una trabajadora (/.), a worker ; Un traidor, a traitor; una traidora, a traitress. 5« Those Adjectives which end in the masculine with any other letter do not change in the feminine : Un hombre cortes, a polite man ; una mujer cortes, a polite woman. Un hombre grave, a grave man ; una materia grave, a grave matter. El trabajo es facil, the work is easy ; la cosa es facil, the thing is easy. 6* When an Adjective relates to two or more nouns in the singular, it must be put in the plural : El padre y el hijo son buenos. The father and son are good. An Adjective qualifying two or more nouns of different gen- ders is put in the masculine plural : El padre y la madre son ricos, The father and mother are rich. Observation. — When, however, the Adjective stands near a feminine noun in the plural it must agree with the feminine noun, but such con- structions must be avoided as much as possible, and it is preferable to qualify each noun by an Adjective having a corresponding meaning, or select an Adjective having but one termination for both genders : Los caudales y la hacienda eran The capital and the property were grandes, large. El general tiene un valor mara- The general has a wonderful hrav- villoso y una constancia por- ery and persistence (is wonder- tentosa, fully brave and persistent). !• Adjectives are often used substantively either in the sin- gular or plural : El bueno y el malo, The good and the bad one. Los ricos y los pobres, T?ie rich and the poor. PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 59 Leccion IX. Lesson IX. PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. Ejemplos. Examples. Adjectives preceding the Noun. Mateo es un buen muchacho. Carolina es una hermosa muchacha. i Que escelente vino ! I Donde esta la joven Agata ? Tengo un bonito libro. El pulpero tiene dulce miel. Mi amigo tiene un gran caballo. Domingo es mi grande amigo. Matthew is a good boy. Caroline is a handsome girl. What an excellent wine ! Where is young Agatha ? I have a pretty book. The grocer has sweet honey. My friend has a famous horse, m. Dominic is my great (good) friend. Adjectives following the Noun. Tenemos un caballo bianco. Tengo un libro frances. Aprendo la lengua espanola. Tengo una mesa redonda. El juez es un hombre justo. Vivo en la calle nueva. Pedro es un hombre viejo. Octavio es un muchacho feo. El comerciante es un hombre muy rico. We have a white horse. I have a French book. I learn the Spanish language. I have a round table. The-judge is a just man. I live in the new street. Peter is an old man. Octavius is a homely boy. The merchant is a very rich man. Vocabulario. El animal, the animal. El buque, the ship, the vessel. El capitan, the captain. El disciptilo, the pupil. Eli)ficial, the officer. El pano, the cloth. El puerto, the port. El rio, the river. El sastre, the tailor. El tomo, the volume. La escuela, the school. La historia, the history. La rosa, the rose. La vaca, the cow. Azul, hlv^. Vocabulary. Blanco, white. Buenos dias, good morning, good day. Colorado, red. Dichoso, happy. Era, loas. Escelente, excellent. Espanol, Spanish, Spaniard. Ingla terra, England. Inteligente, intelligent, Mismo, same. Obediente, obedient. Primero, first. Huso, Russian. Si, if. tltil, useful. 60 LESSON 9. Exercise 17. 1. [ Tien en listed es una vaca? 2. Si, tenemos una vaca negra y blanca. 3. El peiro es un animal fiel y util. 4. Don Juan es un hombre muy amable. 5. Los dos ninos estan enfernios, la pobre madre esta muy triste. 6. La seiiora con el traje negro es la hermana del oficial ingles. 7. i Quiere V. pan bianco 6 pan negro ? 8. No qui- ero pan. 9. El hijo del general es un joven inteligente. 10. [ Sabe V. si el comerciante tiene paiio azul? 11. El no tiene paiio azul, pero tiene escelente pano negro. 12. [ Tiene V. el primer tonio de la Historia de Inglaterra ? 13. Tengo los dos primeros tomos. 14. El hermano de Maria es nmy rico, tiene dos casas grandes y bermosas en la calle nueva. 15. i Donde esta el buque ruso ? 16. Esta en el puerto nuevo. 17. [Buenos dias, seiiora, donde esta la criada? 18. Esta en el cuarto grande. 19. [ Quien es el primer discipulo de la escuela? 20. Yo no se quien es el primero. 21. El sastre tiene un hijo ciego. 22. El capitan es un buen soldado. 23. El padre de Enrique es dichoso, porque tiene un bijo obediente. 24. Napoleon era un gran general. 25. i Donde esta el Rio Colorado ? 26. Yo no se. Exercise 18. 1. The English drink (hehen) beer, good wine, and excellent tea. 2. We have good friends in the city. 3. Mary's mother is already an old woman. 4. The general is a prudent soldier. 5. The two Eng- lish captains have large ships. 6. We have white roses in the gar- den. 7. The children are sick because they eat (comen) green apples. 8. Louisa's mother is an unhappy woman. 9. The butcher has good meat to-day. 10. Have you French or English money? 11. We have neither French nor English money, we have American gold. 12. The lesson of to-day is a difficult lesson. 13. Paris is a large city. 14. The count is a proud man, but the countess is an amiable lady. 15. The island of Cuba is a line island. 16. Do you sell French wines? 17. I sell French and Spanish wines. 18. My uncle has a fine estate in Cuba. 19. The sons and daughters of the merchant are small. 20. Who is the tall gentleman in the garden ? 21. The gen- tleman with the white hat is my uncle. 22. Are you the brother of the Russian captain ? 23. No, sir, I am the cousin of the German captain. 24. Has the captain a new ship ? 25. No, sir, he has the same old ship.- PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 61 Gram^tica. Grammar. 1, Adject'ives in Spanish, as in French, are either placed before the noun which they qualify, or after it ; but not in such a way as to leave their position to the discretion of the speaker or writer. There are many cases, in fact, where the adjective could not be placed before the noun. It is not always possible to give a satisfactory reason why certain adjectives should some- times precede, and at other times follow the noun ; but, gener- ally, they appear to be more emphatic when placed before the noun. The Spaniards consult taste, elegance, and harmony in their collocation, whilst perfection in this regard can only be acquired by the reading of good authors. The following rules may, however, be followed in most cases. 2t Adjectives generally placed before the noun are : 1. The numeral Adjectives when accompanied by the article : El primer tomo, the first volume. La tercera casa, the third house. 2. Adjectives expressing a quality pertaining to the very nature of the noun which they qualify : Un poderoso emperador, A 2micerful emperor. Un rico banquero, A rich hanker. 3. Adjectives when taken figuratively : Un delicioso viaje, A delightful journey, 4. Adjectives used in exclamatory sentences : j Admirable accion ! Admirable action ! 5. Adjectives used emphatically : Gran valor ha sido el de Pedro, Peter's valor has been great. 6. Adjectives expressing a special and essential property : Dulce miel, sweet honey. Amarga adelfa, hitter oleander. Note. — Should we say miel dulce, adelfa amarga, it might imply that there exist honey and oleander of a different taste. 62 LESSON 9. Observation. — Those Adjectives which are placed hefore, the noun may generally be placed after it without any incorrectness, as : Un buen hombre, or un hombre bueno, a good man. Una casa hemiosa, or una hermosa casa, a fine house ; etc. There are cases, however, when the Adjectives have different meanings according to their place hefore or after the noun : Una cierta cosa, A certain thing. Una cosa cierta, A sure thing. Un pobre hombre, A poor man (poor in wits). Un hombre pobre, A poor man (poor in money). 3« In most other cases Adjectives are placed after the noun. They are more specially so : 1. When the. Adjective denotes color , nationality, shape, and taste: Un caballo bianco, a white horse. Un libro ingles, an English hook. Una mesa redonda, a round tahle. Vino agrio, sour ivine. 2. When the Adjective has the form of the Past Participle of a verb : Una ventana cerrada, A closed window, Una puerta abierta, An open door. 3. Wlien the Adjective may be used substantively : Un hombre justo, | ^ .^^^ ^^^ Un hombre malvado, ) ^ ^ .^^^^ ^^^ Un justo, ) Un malvado, ) 4. When the Adjective does not express a special or essential property pertaining to the noun : Una calle ancha, A hroad street. Un hombre feo. An ugly man. Una casa vieja, An old house. 4« When two or more Adjectives qualify the same noun, it is preferable to place them after the noun : Es un hombre sabio, justo y pode- He is a wise, just, and powerful roso, man. 5« The Spaniards use the same word to designate Englishman and English, Frenchman and French, Spaniard and Spanish, etc.; PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 63 but they write the word with a capital letter when used substan- tively, and with a small letter in other cases : Un Espanol, a Spaniard ; un libro espauol, a SiJanish hook. Un Ingles, an Englishman ; un buque ingles, an EnglisJi ship. 0* The Spaniards use instead of Mr. and Mrs., Don, m., and Dona,/., before Christian names, and el Senor, m., la Senora,/., before family names : Don Juan, Mr. John. El Senor Hernandez, Mr. Hernandez. Doha Maria, Mrs. Mary. La Senora Smith, Mrs. Smith. El S°'- D°* Carlos Marty, Mr. Charles Marty. Remarks on certain Adjectives. — 1. Alguno, any one, anybody, some one, somebody ; bueno, good ; malo, bad, ill ; uinguno, none, no one, nobody; postrero, last; primero, fii^st ; tercerd,i third; uno, a, an, one; drop the o before a masculine noun in the singular : Buen amo, good master. El primer hombre, the first man. Ningun libro, no book. Un habil medico, a skillful phijsician ; etc. But if they come after the noun, they preserve the o : Un hombre malo, a bad man. Libro tercero, third book ; etc. The is also preserved whenever the noun referring to the Adjective is not expressed : Es bueno, ffe is good. ' El primero de todos. The first of all. Uno de estos sehores, One of these gentlemen; etc. 2. Santo, saint, drops the last syllable before proper names of saints : San Pedro, St. Peter ; San Juan, St. John ; etc. Observation. —The names Domingo, Dominic ; Tomas, Thomas ; Tome, Torribio, are excepted from this rule ; we say, therefore, Santo Domingo, >S'^. Dominic ; Santo Tomas, St. Thomas. However, when speaking of the island of St. Thomas, we say, la isla de san Tomas, without any special reason for this deviation. 3. Grande drops the last syllable before a masculine noun beginning 1 Tercero, third, may preserve the o in all cases, and we may say : el tercer dia, or el tercero dia, the third day. 64 LESSON 10. with a consonant, whenever it means great in merit or qualities, celebrated or famous : Una gran mujer, A distinguished woman, Un gran poeta, A great 2>oet. Un gran caballo, An excellent or f<^mous horse. Note. — If the noun begins with a vowel -or an h, grande or gran may- be used indisciiminately. Grande preserves the last syllable if it only expresses extent or dimension, and is then placed preferably after the noun : Una casa grande, a large house. Un campo grande, a large field. El teatro grande de Burdeos es Tlie large theatre in Bordeaux is a un gran teatro, splendid theatre. Leccion X. Lesson X. DIMINUTIVE AND AUGMENTATIVE NOUNS. Ejemplos. Juanito tiene un perrito. i Que bonita casita ! I Donde esta mi hermanita ? Esta con la mujercita. El caballito.de mi hermanito es un bonito animalito. Dos lamparitas ardian en el cuar- tito. Hay pececitos en el rio. El pobrecito esta malo. El liombrecillo quiere dinero. Yo no quiero ese perrillo. Mi mesa es muy chiquita. Tenemos un jardincito en el cam- El sehorito y la senorita estan aqui. Eniique es un muchachon y su padre un hombronazo. La hermana de Pedro es una mu- jerona. Examples. Johnny has a little dog. What a pretty little house ! Where is my little sister ? She is with the little woman. My little brother's little horse is a pretty little animal. Two small lamps were burning in the little room. There are little fishes in the river. The poor little fellow is sick. The miserable little man wantsmoney. I don't wish that ugly little dog. My table is very small. We have a little garden in the coun- try. The young gentleman and the young lady are here. Henry is a big itit boy and his father a big strong man. Peter's sister is a big stout woman. DIMINUTIVE AND AUGMENTATIVE NOUNS. Vocabulario. El autor, the author. El bastonazo, the blow (with a stick). El gusto, the pleasure. El ladron, the thief. El pajaro, the bird. El patio, the yard. El picaro, the rogue. El puei)lo, the town, milage. El ricachon, the very rich man. El talento, the talent. Los contomos, the suburbs. La boca, the mouth. La callejuela, the lane. La cara, the face. La cruz, the cross. Vocabulary. La especulacion, the speculation. La flor, the jiower. La legua, the league. La mano, the hand. La pelea, the fight. La pieza, the piece. La punalada, the stab (with a poniard), Aqui, here. Arriba, up stairs. Chiquito, little. Ignorante, ignorant. Solo, alone. Su, his, her. Todo, all. Vive, lives. Exercise 19. 1. La hermanita de Carlos esta mala. 2. i Que tiene el muchachito ? 3. El no tiene nada. 4. El conierciante tiene una casita de campo en los contornos de la ciudad. 5. i Donde esta Juanito ? 6. Esta en el jardin con su amiguito. 7. i Donde estan las dos senoritas ? 8. Estan en el cuartito arriba. 9. i Estaba V. {were you) solo en el cuarto ? 10. Si, senor, yo estaba (i/;as) solito. 11. [ Quien es el hombrecito ? 12. Es el hermano de Luisita. 13. Maria tiene una crucecita de oro. 14. Los Urboles del jardin son todavia chiquititos. 15. El amigo de Enrique es un picaron. 16. Y Enrique es un ladronzuelo. 17. El perro recibio {received) dos bastonazos. 18. Mi aniigo recibio dos puiialadas en la pelea. 19. El general es un hombrachon. 20. Los dos jovencitos son primos. 21. Tenemos tres pajaritos en el jardin. 22. I Quiere V. un pedazito de carne ? 23. Si, senor, con mucho gusto. 24. Pedro vive en una callejuela de la ciudad. 25. ; Pon^ue no tiene el ricachon una casa grande ? 26. Porque tiene todo su di- nero en grandes especulaciones. 27. La hermana del panadero es una niujercilla muy fea. 28. Los pollitos estan en el patio. Exercise 20. 1. The little boy and the little girl are sick. 2. The little tailor is very ignorant. 3. The brothers Ramirez have two small houses in the city. 4. Who is in the little garden? 5. Louisa and my little 5 66 LESSON 10. friend. 6. The merchant's sons have two small horses. 7. The little child has a pretty little face. 8. There are (hay) many birds on (en) the small island. 9. With whom were you in Paris ? 10. With my- little brother. 11. Charles has an ugly little dog. 12. The general's brother is a very rich man. 13. Little John and little Louisa are in the country now (desde) two days. 14. Here is a pretty little book for you. 15. What a pretty little flower ! 16. Is Henry an author? 17. Yes, but a miserable author without talent. 18. Mary has a pretty little mouth and pretty little hands. 19. Julia is a pretty young lady. 20. The baker is a big stout man, but his sister is a very small woman. 21. My aunt has a very, very small dog. 22. The banker's children are yet very small. 23. Where do you live now ? 24. In a yery pretty little town not far from here. 25. Charles re- ceived (recibio) a short letter from his friend. 26. The captain of the small vessel is an ugly little man. 27. Have you a table in your room? 28. Yes, sir, I have a very small table. Gramatica. Grammar. 1, The Spanish language abounds in Diminutives and Au^- mentatives. 2. The Diminutives serve to decrease or soften the significa- tion of the word from which they are derived. Those most in use end in ico, illo, cillo, ito, cito, uelo, ejo, and zuelo, for the masculine, as : hombrecico, hombrecillo, hom- brecito, hombrezuelo, little man; and in ica, ilia, cilia, ita, cita, zuela, eta, eja, for the feminine, as : mujercilla, mujer- cita, mujercica, mujerzuela, little woman ; etc. 1. Diminutives ending in ZUelo always denote contempt or irony. 2. Diminutives ending in cillo and illo often express contempt, pity, or ugliness ; while those in ito generally express affection, gentleness, or beauty : Mujercilla, Contemptible little woman. Pobrecillo, Poor little fellow. Hijito mio, My dear little son. Pobrecito, Poor good little fellow. DIMINUTIVE AND AUGMENTATIVE NOUNS. 67 Note. — Some Spanish words have the termination of the diminutive, without being diminutive, as : Acerico, needle-cushion. Anzuelo, fish-hook, etc. 3. The Diminutives ito, ita, may be used with different parts of speech to give a special expression to the words : Vengo soHto, / come quite alone. 4. Diminutives in ete, ejo, etc., are comparatively little used. 3. The Augmentatives serve to increase the signification of the words from which they are derived. They end in on, achon, azo, onazo, or ote for the masculine ; and in ona, aza, onaza, or ota for the feminine, as : Homhron, hombrachon, hombronazo (from homhrCy man), bigj strong 'man. Grandon, grand ote, grandazo, grandonazo (from grande, large), very large, Mujerona, mujeraza, mujeronaza (from mujer, woman), large, strong woman, 1. There are many words, however, ending in azo, which ex- press an action, motion, or result, and are, therefore, not Aug- mentatives : Fusil, rifle, gun ; fusilazo, a shot from a rifle. Pistola, 'pistol ; pistoletazo, a shot from a pistol. Canon, gun ; canonazo, a shot from a gun. 2, Words which express a blow struck with a blunt instrument or object also end in azo, as bastonazo or garrotazo, bloiv with a stick ; while those expressing a wound made by a sharp instru- ment or weapon end in ada, as : Punalada, stab with a dagger ; lanzada, a wound frmn a lance ; etc. Exceptions. — Hacha, ax; machete, cutlass; and sable, saber ; form, however, hachazo, machetazo, and sablazo. Lanzazo, from lanza, lance, is also used, etc. 4. Formation of Diminutives and Augmentatives. — 1. Words ending in or a drop the last letter and add ito, ita ; ico, ica ; illo, ilia ; according to their gender : Herman-ito, herman-ico, herman-illo, little brother ; from hermano, brother. Cas-ita, cas-ica, cas-illa, little house ; from casa, hmcse. 68 LESSON 10. Note. — Words ending in go, besides dropping the o, insert a u after the g to preserve the hard sound of this letter : Un amigo, a friend; un amiguito, a little frieind. Those ending in co change the c into qu, also to preserve the hard sound of the c : Un bareo, a ship ; un barquito, a little ship. A few words ending in o and a, after dropping the last letter, add, how- ever, the termination ecico, ecillo, etc. : Un huevo, an egg; un huevecillo, o. small egg. Una mano, a hand; una manecita, a sinall Imnd. 2. Monosyllables ending with a consonant form their Dimin- utive by adding ecito, ecico, ecillo, or ezuelo : Una flor, a floiver ; una fiorecita, a little flower. Una cruz, a cross ; una crucecita, a little cross. Un pez, a fish ; un pececito, a little fish. Un rey, a king ; un reyezuelo, a king (with a small kingdom). Note. — Observe that cruz and pez change the z into c. 3. Words of two or more syllables ending with a consonant form their Diminutive by adding ito, ico, illo, ejo : Un papel, a paper ; un papelito, a small paper. Un reloj, a watch ; un relojito, a small watch. 4. Words of two syllables ending Avith an e, and those of several syllables ending with an n or a Z, add cito, cico, ciUo, or zuelo : Un sastre, a tailor ; un sastrecillo, a little tailor. Una nube, a cloud ; una nubecilla, a little cloud. Un capitan, a captain; un capitancillo, a little captain. Un autor, an author ; un autorzuelo, an insignificant author, Una mujer, a woman; una mujercita, a little woman. Exceptions. — Juanito, from Juan, John; volcanejo, from volcan, vol- cano; and all words ending in in, form an exception to this rule, the latter adding ito, etc. Thus : Jardin, gardeyi ; ruin, worthless. Rocin, jade ; serafin, seraph. form in the Diminutive jardinito, rocinito, ruinito, and serafinito. Jar- dincito is, however, often used. DIMINUTIVES AND AUGMENTATIVES. 69 5. Diminutives may be yet decreased in the following way : From cliico, small : clu(|iiillo or chiquito, chiquitillo, cliiquitito, chiqui- tuelo, chiquitilluelo, ehiquitillito, chiquirritin, chiquimtito, cMquirritillo, chiquirrituelo, etc. The EngHsh would say in such cases, very^ very small. Even Augmentatives may be decreased in the same way ; Picaron, big rogue ; picaronzillo or picaronzuelo, little rogue; etc. 6. Many Diminutives as well as Augmentatives drop or pre- serve the letter i in the diphthong ie : Un ciego, a blind mwrni ; un cieguecillo or ceguecillo, a little blind man. Un diente, a tooth ; un dientecillo or dentecillo, a small tooth. Una piedra, a stone ; una piedrezuela or pedrezuela, a small stone. 7. Other words change the diphthong ue into o or remain unchanged : Un huey, an ox; un bueyecillo or buyecillo, a small ox. Un hueso, a bone ; un huesecillo or osecillo, a small bone. 8. There are words in Spanish with Diminutive and Augmen- tative terminations, which may have been used formerly as such, but which at present have a determined signification : Maton, bravo, cut-throat. IsHlla, side. Cegato, short-sighted. Peluquin, wig. Espadin, sword of the state ; etc., etc. 9. Augmentatives are formed by adding the terminations given in Eule 2 to the word, when the same ends with a consonant : Leon, lion; leonazo, big lion ; etc. When the words end, however, with a vowel, the latter is dropped before adding the given termination : Gigante, giant ; gigantazo, large giant. Libro, book ; librote, large book. General Observations. — The words pequeno, small, and grande, large, may be used at all times with the noun, but in many cases they would not answer to the genius of the Spanish language, which would require the Diminutive or Augmentative. This is specially the case with the Diminutives. 70 LESSON 11. The pronunciation of Diminutives or Augmentatives is gen- erally different from that of the word from which they are de- rived, and the written accent of the primitive word is left out in the derived word, as : Arbol, tree ; arbolito, small tree. Pajaro, bird ; pajarito, small bird ; etc. 5, Verb tener, to have. The verb tener is often rendered in English by to be some- thing the matter : I Que tiene V. ? What is tJie matter with you ? Yo no tengo nada, Nothing is the matter with me. Leccion XI. Lesson XI. ADJECTIVES. COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE RELATIVE. Adjectives compared regularly: Positive. Comparative. . Superlative. lleTmoso y m. )^hand- msiS hermosOj ^i hand- el mas hermoso, Uhehand- Ilermosa, f. ) some ; mas hermosa, ) somer ; la mas hermosa, ) somest. Prudente, m. -i mas prudente, |^ more el mas prudente, \the most Prudente, f. i^ ^ mas prudente, );?rMcfc7i^; la mas prudente, ip-2/(Zc7i^. Hico, m. ) ^ mas rico, ) , el mas rico, \ the Pica, f. ) ' mas rica, 3 -' la mas rica, ) richest. Utiles, pi. useful ; mas utiles, more useful ; losmas utiles, m. ythe most las mas utiles, f. ) useful. mas facil, easier ; lo mas facil, the easiest thing. Fiicil, n. easy ; Adjectives compared irregularly: Bueno, good; Malo, had; Grande, great, large; Pequeno, small ; Bnjo, low ; Alto, high ; mejor, better ; peor, wm-se ; mayor, greater, larger ; menor, less, smaller ; inferior, lower ; superior, higher ; optimo, best. pesimo, vjorst. maxim 0, greatest, largest. minim o, smallest. infimo, lowest. supremo, highest. ADJECTIVES. COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE RELATIVE. 71 Bien, well ; Mai, hady badly; Poco, little; Mucho, much; Adverbs : mejor, better; peor, worse; menos, less; mas, more; lo mejor, the best. lo peor, the worst, lo menos, the least, lo mas, the most. Duro, m. Dura, Comparative of Inferiority menos duro, ) ^ ^ , el menos duro. ►, m. ) menos auro, \ el n (hard; _, •, \ less hard; ■, -, 1. ) ' menos dura, ) ' la menos dura, J'''^'-''^''''^''^- Fuertes, pL strong ; menos fuertes, less strong; los menos fuertes,m. \tlie least las menos fuertes, f. ) strong. Bien, well ; menos bien, less well ; lo menos bien, the least well. menos ... que ..., less ov fewer ... than ... No tanto, m — como. ..\not so much no tantos, m. ...como... ^ not so many No tanta, /.. . . .como. . . ) ...as... no tantas, /. . . . .como. . . ) . ..as. . . no tan. ..como..., not so. ..as... Comparative of Equality: Tanto, m....como...) tantos, m. ...como...) Tanta, /. . ...como... I'*^ mu^h...as... ^^^^^^^ ^ . ...como... T* "'"^Z/-"*- tan... como. as... as... Cuanto mas tanto mas... Cuantos mas tantos mas... Cuanta mas tanta mas... Cuantas mas tantas mas... 'Cuanto menos tanto menos... Cuanto mas tanto menos. . . Cuanto menos tanto mas . . . ' the more . . . the more . . . the less... the less... the more... the less... the less... the more... Ejemplos. Carlos es rico, Juan es mas rico ; pero Enrique es el mas rico de los tres bermanos. Luisa es mas joven que Maria. Paris es mas grande que Nueva York. Juan liabla bien, pero su bermano habla mejor. Soy mas vie jo que V. Julia es la menos bonita de las her- manas. Examples. Cbarles is rich, John is richer ; but Henry is the richest of the three brothers. Louisa is younger than Mary. Paris is larger than New York. John speaks well, but his brother speaks better. I am older than you. Julia is the less pretty of the sisters. 72 LESSON 11. Tenemos menos dinero que el. No tengo tanto tiempo como V. Ellas no tieuen tantas amigas como nosotras. Yo no hablo tan bien como V. El medico no es tan viejo como el abogado. Soy tan grande como V. Tengo tantas plumas como lapices. Cuanto mas virtuosos son los hombres, tanto mas felices son. Cuanto mas sale, tanto menos estu- dia. Cuantos mas amigos tenga Y. tanto mas poderoso sera. We have less money than he. I have not as much time as you. They have not so many friends as we. I do not speak as well as you. The physician is not so old as the lawyer. I am as tall as you. I have as many pens as pencils. The more virtuous men are, the happier they are. The more he goes out the less he learns. The more friends you have the more powerful you will be. Vocabulario. El amo, the master. El banquero, the hanker. El merito, the merit. El regimiento, the regiment. La clase, the class. La suerte, the hick. La escuela, the school. La fruta, the fruit. La parte, the part. Vocabulary. Atento, attentive . Deme V., give me. Dulce, sioeet. Eduardo, Edward. Estudioso, studious. Felipe, Philip. Fresco, cool. Frio, cold. Fuerte, strong. Gana, earns. Gasta, spends. Habla, speaks. Otro, other. Pasado, past, last. Soberbio, haughty. Temprano, early. T onto, foolish. Todo, all. Exercise 21. 1. Carlos es mas rico y Felipe mas pobre que Juan. 2. El hijo es mas joven que la hija. 3. El amo no tiene tantos amigos como el criado. 4. El hermano es tan habil como la hermana, y la madre no menos que el padre. 5. El tiene mas suerte que merito. 6. El prin- cipe no es tan soberbio como el conde. 7. El comerciante no tiene tanto dinero como el banquero, pero tiene mas amigos que aquel (the latter). 8. Mi hermano es mas estudioso y mas atento que yo. 9. ^ Tiene y. un buen cuarto ? 10. Tengo el cuarto mas frio en la casa. 11. Tenemos la casa mas grande de la ciudad. 12. Maria es mas amable que Luisa. 13. Julia es menos atenta que mi hermana. 14. Mi amigo tiene la casa mas hermosa de la calle. 15. Deme V. algo mejor. 16. No tengo nada mejor. 17. Eduardo es mas peque- ADJECTIVES. COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE RELATIVE. 73 no que su hermano, pero es mas fuerte que el. 18. Maria es la mejor amiga de mi hermana. 19. Carlos y Enrique son los mas grandes, pero los menos atentos de la clase. 20. Cuanto menos dinero gana, tan to mas gasta. 21. ^ Es la hija tan grande como el padre ? 22. Es menos grande que el padre, pero es mas grande que la madre. 23. La liija no es tan amable como la madre. 24. Las manzanas no son menos dulces que las peras. 25. El hermano de Felipe es el hombre mas rico de la ciudad. 26. [ Habla V. espanol tan bien como su her- mano ] 27. El habla mejor que yo. Exercise 22. 1. The more money he earns the less he spends. 2. Charles is a bad boy, but Henry is the worst boy in the school. 3. The son is as rich as the father ; he has four houses in the best part of the city. 4. Is Edward attentive? 5. He is more attentive than the other boys. 6. Are you well now 1 7. I am better in the country than in the city. 8. My mother is not so old as my aunt. 9. Philip is the youngest officer of the regiment. 10. He is not less brave than the old officers. 11. I have as many books as my brother. 12. The small room is cooler than the large one. 13. The green apples are not so sweet as the others. 14. We have not so much fruit this (este) year as last year. 15. Henry, Peter, and John are three good boys, but John is the best of alL 16. The dog is the most faithful of all animals. 17. Is your daughter young ? 18. She is younger than my son. 19. Have you any flowers in the garden 1 20. We have the most beautiful flowers in the city. 21. The new theater is much larger than the old theater. 22. The French baker has the best bread here. 23. Will you have a piece of bread ? 24. Give me the small- est piece. 25. We are less rich than the English, but we are as happy as they. 26. Do you go out earlier than 1 1 27. Yes, much earlier. 28. Here is the largest house in the city. Gram^tica. Grammar. 1, The Comparative is usually formed in Spanish by means of adverbs, and not, as in many cases in English, by a change of termination : V. es mas rico que yo, You ore richer than L 74 LESSON 11. 2. The Comparative of Superiority is formed by placing mas, more, before the Positive, and que, than, after it : Es mas habil que su hermano, He is more skillful than his brother. El tiene mas libros que yo, He has more hooks than I. 3. The Comparative of Inferiority is formed by placing me- nos, less, fewer, before the Positive, and que, than, after it : Es menos prudente que V., He is less prudent than you. Tengo menos libros que V. , / have feiccr hooks than you. 1. If the comparison refers, however, to a verb, de lo que may take the place of que alone : El tiene menos dinero de lo que V. cree, He has less money than you think. 2. If the Comparative of Inferiority is expressed by no. . .tanto (or tanta, tantos, tantas), or by no... tan, then the second part of the comparative is rendered by como : El no tiene tanto dinero como V. , He has not so much money as you. EUos no tienen tanta plata como nosotros, 7'hey have not as much silver as ive. El no es tan joven como yo, He is not so young as I am. 4. The Comparative of Equality is expressed by tanto (or tanta, tantos, tantas, according to the gender and number of the noun) and como, as; or by tan...conio with an Adjective or an adverb : El hijo es tan docto como el padre, The son is as learned as the fatlier. El obra con tanta prudencia como He acts with as much jrrudence as valor, courage. 1. Not less than is always translated by no... menos que... : Yo no trabajo menos que V., I do not icork less than you. 2. In regard to verbs, as much as is rendered either by tanto como or by tanto cuanto : Pago tanto como or tanto cuanto vale, I pay as much as it is worth. Observation. — From the above examples it will be seen that menos is always invariable, whilst tanto and cuanto agree in gender and number w-ith the noun to which they refer. Cuanto, the same as tanto, drops the last syllable before an adjective or adverb and becomes cuan. ADJECTIVES. COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE RELATIVE. 75 5t When several nouns or adjectives follow each other, it is sufficient to use the words mas, menos, tan, or tantO before the first Adjective only : Enrique es mas joven, timido y ere- Henry is younger, more timid, aiid dulo que su hermano, inore credulous than his brother. Note. — It would not be a mistake, however, to repeat the adverb be- fore every Adjective in order to give more expression to the sentence. 6. The Superlative Eelative which generally ends in English in est is rendered in Spanish by the adverbs mas or menos joined to the positive and accompanied by the definite article, a posses- sive adjective, or a personal pronoun : El mas hennoso hbro or ) ^, , , , , -r,, ,., , \ The handsomest ooofc. El hbro mas hermoso, ) El muchacho menos obediente, TJie least obedient boy. Su mas interesante obra, His niost interesting work. Observation. — The Superlative Eelative of those adjectives which are placed before the noun may come in the Superlative before or after the 3 or ) ' I The prettiest hoy. El mas bonito muchacho or \ El muchacho mas bonito, But in the case of those adjectives which are placed after the noun, the Superlative must also come last : El clima mas frio. The coldest climate. 7» When the Superlative Eelative is an adverb modifying the verb, it is expressed by the adverbs mas or menos without the definite article : ^ Que estrella luce mas ? Which star shines tlie most ? Yo creo que Venus luce mas, / think Venus shines the most. Observation. — These Superlative Relatives do not properly belong to the Spanish language, although they are always considered as Comparatives, and they require a cultivated ear to be used correctly. 8t The Comparativa of the adjectives bueno, good ; malo, bad; grande, large; pequeno, little, small ; bajo, loio ; alto, high ; which is irregular, may also be formed regularly by means of the adverb mas, more : Bueno, good ; mas bueno, better. Grande, large ; mas grande, larger. 76 LESSON 12. Observation. — When speaking, however, of the differences of ages of two persons, mayor and menor must be used : La hija mayor, tlw eldest daughter ; el hijo menor, the youngest son. Inferior and menor are never used when speaking of physical size, that is, of the volume or size of the objects. 9, Cuanto mas . . .tanto . . . , the more. ..t/ie...; cuanto menos . . . tanto..., the less... the,.., used adjectively, must agree in geudei and number with the noun to which they refer : Cuantas mas refiexiones hace, tan- The more he reflects (he makes reflec- tas mas faltas comete, tions) the more mistakes he makes. Note. — Instead of cuanto mas..., mientras mas may be used. Leccion XII. Lesson XII. SUPERLATIVE ABSOLUTE. ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. Formation of the Superlative AbiBoIute* Pequeno, small ; pequeriisim-o»m., a,/, or ) muy pequen-o, m., a,/., j ^^-Z *"^'^"' *™«"^«- Prudente, ^rw(£e7i^ ; prudentisimo, very pricdent. Feliz, ha'pijy ; feHcisimo, xery haijpy. CorteSy polite ; cortesisimOy very polite. Adjectives ending in co and go: Eico, rich; riquisimo, very rich. Vago, vague ; vaguisimo, very vague. Adjectives ending in ble: Amable, amiable; amabilisimo, or muy amable, very amiable. Afable, affable ; afabilisimo, or muy afable, very affable. Adjectives ending in iente: Ardiente, ardent : ardentisimo, very ardent. Yervientey fervent ; ferventisimo, very fervent. Luciente, shining;, lucenti'simo, very shilling, Valiente, brave; A'alentisimo, very brave. Adjectives ending in io: Limpio, clean; limpisimo, very clean. Sucio, dirty ; sucisimo, very dirty. ADJECTIVES. SUPERLATIVE ABSOLUTE. Irregular Superlatives. Acre, hitter ; Amigo, friendly ; Aspero, raw ; Bueno, good; Fiel, faithful ; Fuerte, strong ; Antigno, ancient; Benefico, benevolent ; Venefico, poisonous ; Celebre, celebrated; Integro, upright; Libre, free ; Magnifico, magnificent ; Misero, miserable ; Nuevo, new; Pobre, poor ; Sagrado, sacred; Salubre, healthy; Sabio, wise; Diilcemente, sweetly ; Sabiamente, wisely ; Amablemente, amiably ; acerrimo, very bitter. amicisirno, very friendly. asperisimo or asperrimo, very raw, bonisimo, very good. fidelisimo, very faithful. fortisimo, very strong. antiquisimo, very atwient. beneficentisimo, very benevolent. veneficeiitisimo, very poisonoics. celeberrimo, ve7^y celebrated. integerrimo, very upright. libenimo, very free. magnificentisimo, very magnificent. miserrimo, very miserable. novisimo, very new. pauperrimo, very poor. sacratisimo, very sacred. saluben-imo, very healthy. sapientisimo, very wise. Adverbs* dulcisimamente, very or most, sweetly. muy sabiamente, very tvisely. amabilisimamente, 7nost amiably. ' Ejemplos. Pedro es rico, pero Juan es riquisinio. Paris es una ciudad muy hermosa. El comerciante es honradi'simo. La madre de Maria es viejisima. La tovre es altisima. El maestro es sapientisimo. El caballero es cortesisimo, El general es prudentisimo. La senora es hermosisima. Es segurisimo. El camino es larguisimo. El clima es friisimo. Luisa es amabilisima. Mi hermana dibuja hennosisimamente. El obra prudentisimamente. Examples. Peter is rich, but John is ver}^ rich. Paris is a very handsome city. The merchant is very honest. Mary's mother is very old. The tower is very high. The teacher is very wise. The gentleman is very polite. The general is very prudent. The lady is very handsome. It is very sure. The road is very long. The climate is very cold. Louisa is very amiable. My sister draws most beautifully. He acts very prudently. 78, LESSON 12. Vocabulario. El amor, the love. El camino, th^ road. El clima, the climate. El comportamiento, the behavior. El leon, the lion. El maestro, the teacher. El pozo, tlie well. La accion, the action. La aldea, the village. La comedia, the comedy. La hormiga, the ant. La iglesia, the church. La Uuvia, the rain. Afable, affable. Agrio, sour. Benefico, benevolent. Comun, ordinary, low. Vocabulary. Contento, satisfied. Femenil, effeminate. Filial, filial. Gloriosamente, gloriously. Honrado, honest. Inteligente, intelligent. Interesante, interesting. Largo, long. Lejos,/ar. Paternal, paternal. Pio, pious. Prof undo, deep. Sabiamente, wisely. Salubre, healthy. Sucio, dirty. Valiente, brave. Exercise 23. 1. Los dos hermanos del general son riquisimos, pero el general es muy pobre. 2. La torre de la iglesia es altisima. 3. Liiisa y Maria son amabilisimas. 4. Los caminos estan malisimos desde la lluvia. 5. El oficial es un valentisimo soldado. 6. El clima de la isla es saluberrimo. 7. El hombrecito tiene nna casa grandisima. 8. La hermana de Juan es hermosisima. 9. Las comedias de Moratin son muy hermosas. 10. Socrates era sapientisimo. 11. Las primas de Enrique son muy pias. 12. Las calles de la ciudad son larguisimas. 13. El panadero tiene una hija muy bonita. 14. Las hormigas son pequenisimas. 15. Juan es muy femenil. 16. El maestro habla muy sabiamente. 17. Su (su) amor es muy filial. 18. El principe es muy benefico. 19. El vino del comerciante no es bueno ; esta muy agrio. 20. Los habitantes de la aldea son muy industriosos y muy afables. 21. El padre y la madre de Pedro son viejisimos. 22. Las dos seiioras son muy jovenes. 23. El soldado murio (died) muy gloriosamente. 24. Su comportamiento es muy comun. 25. El monumento es anti- quisimo {very ancient). Exercise 24, 1. The merchant is a very honest man. 2. My father is very benevolent. 3. My brother's friends are very poor. 4. His action is ADJECTIVES. SUPEELATIVE ABSOLUTE. 79 very paternal. 5. His love is very filial. 6. The banker's house is very large. 7. New York is a very rich city. 8. The physician has very good sons. 9. The climate of the island is very cold. 10. The lion is very strong. 11. Henry's sister is very amiable, but his cousin {fern.) is more affable. 12. The apples are very sweet. 13. The rooms in {de) the house are very small. 14. The river is very deep. 15. The trees in the {del) garden are very green. 16. The two boys are very sick. 17. We have now a very good servant. 18. The water ill the well is very cold. 19. Mary's brothers are very intelligent. 20. I am very happy to-day. 21. The two Frenchmen are very far from here. 22. The soldiers of the general are very brave. 23. The streets are now very dirty. 24. My book is very interesting. Gram^tica. Grammar. 1. The Superlative Absolute is either formed by placing the adverb muy, very, before the Positive, or by adding to the same the termination isimo (isima, isimos, isimas, according to the gender and number of the noun to which the adjective refers) if it ends with a consonant. If the Positive ends with a vowel, however, this last letter is dropped and the same terminations added : Grande, large ; muy grande, or grandisimo, very large. Cortes, polite ; muy cortes, or cortesisimo, very polite. 2, Adjectives ending in CO and go form their Superlative in quisimo and gnisimo to preserve the hard sound of c and g, which they have in the Positive : Rico, rich; riquisimo, very rich. Vago, vague ; vaguisimo, very vag'^ne. 3, Adjectives ending in ble change this last syllable into bilisimo : Amahle, amiable ; amabilisimo, very amiable. Afable, affable ; afabilisimo, very affable. 4. Adjectives ending in iente drop the i in the Superlative, and change the termination iente into entisimo : Ardiente, ardent ; ardentisimo, very ardetU. Valiente, brave ; valentisimo, very brave. 80 LESSON 12. 5. Adjectives ending in io drop these two letters to avoid the repetition of the i, and add isimo : Limpio, clean ; hmpisimo, very clean. Exceptions. — The Adjectives frio, cold, and pio, pious, make, how- ever, friisimo and piisimo in the Superlative. 6t The Superlative Absolute of Adverbs ending in mente is also formed by placing the adverb inuy, ver^, before them, or by changing the termination emente or amente into isimamente : Dulcemente, sweetly ; dulcisimamente, very or most sweetly. Amahlementey amiably ; SLmahilisimamentej very or 7nost am,iably. 7« It must be observed that the Superlative formed with the termination isimo is stronger than that formed with the adverb muy, ver?/. Eiquisimo expresses, therefore, a higher degree than muy rico, ver^ rich. Elegance requires also the termina- tion isimo instead of the adverb muy when the Superlative is preceded by the indefinite article un, uno, una. Therefore, es un valentisimo soldado, he is a very brave soldier, is preferable to es un muy valiente soldado. 8. Certain adjectives and adverbs do not admit of the termi- nation of the Superlative. This is more especially the case with those ending with 1, i, n, and a few with r, as : Paternal, paternal; maternal, maternal ;*fA\^, filial; femenil, effemi- nate ; igual, equal ; varonil, manly ; turqui, dark blue ; ruin, low ; co- mun, ordinary. In case of doubt the student will, therefore, adopt preferably the adverb muy. 9. Some adjectives form their Superlative most irregularly, as is seen by the list given above. POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 81 Leccion XIII. Lesson XIII. POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. Singular. Plural. Masculine. Feminine. Masculine. Feminine. Mi, mis; my. Tu, tus; thy. Su, sus; his, her, its. Nuestro, nuestra, nuestros. nuestras ; our. Vuestro, vuestra, su, vuestros. vuestras, sus ; ; your. Su, sus; their. Mio, mia, mios. mias ; my. Tuyo, tuya, tuyos. tuyas ; thy. Suyo, suya. suyos. suyas ; ^ his, her, its. Nuestro, nuestra, nuestros, nuestras; our. Vuestro, vuestra, vuestros. vuestras ; your. Suyo, suya. suyos, suyas ; their. Ejemplos. Mi padre es bueno. Mi madre es buena. Tn herm^no es pequeno. Tu hermana es peqiiena. Su hermano es grande. Su hermana es gi-ande. Nuestro tio es bueno. Nuestra tia es buena. Su amigo es joven. ^ Su amigo de V. es joven. >- El amigo de V. es joven. ) Su casa es grande. \ Su casa de ellos es grande. ) Mis amigos son felices. Sus hermanos son ricos. Sus libros estan aqui. Sus libros de V. estan aqui. Los libros de V. estan aqui. 6 Examples. My father is good. My mother is good. Thy brother is small. Thy sister is small. His or her brother is tall His or her sister is tall. Our uncle is good. Our aunt is good. Your friend is young. Their house is large. My friends are happy. His (her or their) brothers are rich. Your books are here. 82 LESSON 13. Mi hermano y mi hermana son jo- i venes. ) Sii tio, su tia y sus primos estan malos. Aqui esta iino de mis amigos. El peiTO esta con su amo. El arbol pierde sus hqjas. Deme V. la mano. El tiene su sombrero en la mano. El soldado ha perdido el brazo. My brother and sister are young. His (or her) uncle, aunt, and cous- ins are sick. Here is one of my friends. The dog is with its master. The tree loses its leaves. Give me your hand. He has his hat in his hand. The soldier has lost his arm. Su, his, her, your, their. Su libro or el libro de el. His book. Su libro or el libro de ella. Her book. Su (or el) libro de V., sing. \ Su (or el) libro de V. V., pi. \ Your book. Su (or el) libro de ellos, masc. \ Su (or el) libro de ellas, fern. \ Their book. Sus libros or los libros de el. His books. etc. etc. etc. Adios, padre mio. Good by, father. Si, madre mia. Yes, mother. No, hijo mio. No, my son. Son amigos nuestros. They are our friends. Son enemigos suyos. They are his enemies. Un amigo mio. A friend of mine. Un criado nuestro. A sei-vant of ours. Un amigo suyo. A friend of his. Vocabulario. El baston, the cane. El boUo, the cake. El condiscipulo, the fellow-scholar . El discipulo, the scholar. El ejemplo, the example. El marido, the husband. El padrino, the godfather. El papel, the paper. El privilegio, the privilege. La familia, the family. La leche, the milk. La libertad, the liberty. Vocabulary. La madrina, the godmother. La pizarra, the slate. La propiedad, the property. La riendai the h'idle. La silla, the saddle. Al contrario, on tlie contrary. Caliente, warm. En casa, at home. Mas, 7nore. Sagrado, sacred. Siguen, folloio. Tambien, too, also. POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 83 Exercise 25. 1. Mi hermano y mi hermana estan en casa. 2. Mis padres {'par- ents) estan en el jardin. 3. Nuestras casas son hermosas. 4. i Quien tiene mi papel, mi pluma y mis lapices 1 5. No tenemos ni el papel, ni la pluma ni los lapices de V. 6. La mujer de niiestro medico es la hermana de mi banquero. 7. i Tienen los discipulos sus libros ? 8. Tienen sus libros y sus pizarras. 9. El marido de mi prima esta en Paris. 10. [Buenos dias, tia, donde estan mis primos? 11. Estan en el jardin. 12. [Donde estas, hijo mio ? 13. Estoy aqui en el cuarto. 14. Mi amigo es pobre, pero un hermano suyo es muy rico. 15. Nues- tro tio quiere comprar la casa de mi amigo. 16. i Donde esta su padre de V. ahora? 17. Yo no se donde esta. 18. Los sombreros de V. V. son muy pequenos. 19. Nuestro cuarto esta caliente. 20. Las casas de ellos son muy grandes. 21 [ Es Y. mi amigo ? 22. Si, senor, soy el amigo de Y. y de toda su familia. 23. Los primos de Juan son los condiscipulos de mi hermano. 24. i Quien quiere un pedazo de mi bollo? 25. Yo, denie Y. un pedazito. 26. [Que tiene Y. en la mano? 27. Tengo un bastoncito. 28. Los hijos siguen el ejemplo de su padre. 29. Nuestra libertad, nuestra propiedad y nuestros privilegios son sagrados. 30. Adios, amigo mio. Exercise 26. 1. Where is your cousin (/)? 2. She is with her husband. 3. Where is your slate ? 4. My slate is on the table. 5. Who is your godfather? 6. Mr. Harris is my godfather, and his sister is my godmother. 7. Who is in your father's room ? 8. A friend of his. 9. Give me your hand, my friend. 10. Is Henry the friend of your brothers ? 11. He is their friend. 12. Is your physician tall or little ? 13. Our physician is very tall. 14. Who is up stairs in our room ? 15. No- body is in your room, but some one is in your brother's room. 16. With whom are your children ? 17. They are with their mother. 18. Is your father at home ? 19. He is in his store (tienda). 20. Are the little boys wdth their aunt ? 21. They are with their uncle and aunt. 22. My sister's friend (/) is very amiable, and her brothers too. 23. Our physician is already an old man. 24. Will you have more milk in your coffee ? 25. On the contrary, give me more coffee. 26. Who is in the garden 1 27. My father and mother. 28. Have you the saddle of my horse ? 29. I have its bridle, but not its saddle. 84 LESSON 13. Gram^tiea. Grammar. 1. Possessive Adjectives do not agree in gender and number with the antecedent or possessor, as in English, but with the object possessed. Every Possessive Adjective must, therefore, agree in gender and number with the noun to which it refers. Mi hbro, my hook. Kuestra mesa, our table. Mis amigos, my friends. 2. The Possessive Adjective must be repeated with every noun, unless it refers to the same person or object : Mi padre, mi madre, y mi hermana My father , motJier, and sister are estan malos, sick. Seilor mio y amigo, Sir and friend. 3. The Possessive Adjective vuestro, masc. sing., vuestra, feih. sing., vuestros, inasc. pZ., vuestras, fern. pL, your, is only used in the elevated style, or when addressing the divinity, the saints, or persons in elevated situation : Principe, imploro vuestro amparo, Prince, I implore your 2^rotection. In place of vuestro the Spaniards use in the usual style the Possessive Adjective SU, which also means his, her, their. Vues- tro may, in fact, be compared with the personal pronoun VOSO- tros, instead of which we use usted, sing., and ustedes, pL, with the verb in the tliird person singular or plural. In the same way, instead of vuestro, the Spaniards use the Possessive Adjec- tive in the third person singular or plural. Su sombrero, your hat, is therefore used instead of vuestro sombrero ; but as it might also be translated by his hat, her hat, their hat, the expression de V. is added after the noun, and we would therefore have to say SU sombrero de V. This addition of de v., or de V. V. may, however, be left out when the sense of the sentence sufficiently indicates to what person SU refers : i Tiene V. su sombrero ? Have you your hat? Remark. — The omission of de usted when addressing respectable per- sons is, however, considered vulgar and impoUte. POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 85 4. Instead of su or sus, el, la, los, or las may be used with de usted, de ustedes ; El libro de V., your hook. La mesa de V., your table. Los libros de V., your hooks. Las mesas de V., your tahles. S» In order to avoid the ambiguity which might arise from the use of SU and SUS, the definite article is used with de el, de ella, de ellos, de ellas : El libro de el, his hook. La casa de ellos, their (m.) house. El libro de ella, her hook. La casa de ellas, their (f.) house. 6. The Possessive its must be rendered by su or sus accord- ing to the number of the following noun : Mi padre tieiie iin hermoso caballo, My father has a 2Jretty horse, its su color es negro, color is black. El arbol pierde sus hojas, The tree loses its leaves. 7. The definite article is substituted in Spanish for the Pos- sessive Adjective whenever the sense of the sentence sufficiently indicates who the possessor is. This is more especially the case, when parts of the body are mentioned : Tengo algo en el ojo, / Jmve something in my eye. Que tiene V. en la mano, JVhat have you, (got) in your Jiand. 8. Whenever addressing a relative or friend, the Spaniards use the noun alone, as in English, or with the Possessive after the same : Buenos dias, padre (or padre mio). Good morning, fathsr. Hijo (or hijo mio), ven aqui, So^i, come here. 9. The Possessive Adjectives mi, tu, su, etc., when coming after the noun are replaced by mio, tuyo, suyo, masc. sing. ; mios, tuyos, suyos, masc. pi. ; mia, tuya, suya, fein. sing. ; mias, tuyas, suyas, fem. pi. : i Padre mio ! my father ! Madre mia, mij motJier ; etc. These Adjectives are placed after the noun : 1. In the vocative: hijos mios! my sons I If, however, an adjective or a participle precedes the noun, both forms may be used : Mi querido padre or querido padre mio, My dear father. 86^ LESSON 14. 2. When an article precedes the noun : El caballo tuyo es mayor que el mio, Thy {your) horse is larger than mine, Un criado mio or uno de mis criados, A servant of mine. 3. When an adverb precedes the noun : Tan amigos nuestros se mostraron, They showed themselves so much our friends. Leccion XIV. Lesson XIV. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. Singular. Plural. Masculine. Feminine. Masculine. Feminine. El mio, la mia, los mios, las mias, mine, my oivn. El tuyo, la tuya, los tuyos, las tnyas, thine, thy own. El suyo, la suya, los suyos, las suyas, his, her, its, (own). Elnuestro, lanuestra, los nuestros, las nuestras, ours, our own. El vuestro, lavuestra, los vuestros, las vuestras, j _, _ , , i yours, your own. El suyo, la suya, los suyos, las suyas, ) El suyo, la suya, los suyos, las suyas, theirs, their own. El de el, la de el, los de el, las de el, his. El de ella, la de ella, los de ella, las de ella, hers. El de nosotros, la de nosotros, los de nosotros, las de nosotros, ours. El de usted, la de usted, los de usted, las de usted,^ El de ustedes, la de ustedes, los de ustedes, lasdeustedes,^ El de ellos, la de ellos, los de ellos, las de ellos,^ ) El de ellas, la de ellas, los de ellas, las de ellas,^ ) Declension. Masculine Singular. Feminine "Singular. El mio, mine ; la mia, mine. Del mio, of mine ; de la mia, of mine. Al mio, to mine ; a la mia, to mine. 1 Singular. ^ Plural. ^ Masculine. * Feminine. J yours, theirs. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 87 Masculine Plural. Los mios, mine ; De los mioS) of mine ; A los inios, to mine ; ETC., etc., Feminine Plural. las mias, mine. de las mias, of mine. a las mias, to mine. ETC., etc. Ejemplos, Mi padre y el tnyo son amigos. Tu hermano y el mio estan aqui. Tengo el libro de Y. y el mio. Mi lapiz y el de V. son de oro. Su amigo de V. y el nuestro son altos. Su caballo de V. y el de ellos son negros. Mi casa y la suya (la de el) son niievas. Su jjluma (la pluma de el) y la nuestra son de acero. Mis libros y los suyos son hermosos. Nuestros amigos y los de V. estan en Francia. Nuestras sillas y las de ellos son de caoba. I Tiene el mi lapiz ? — Tiene el suyo. I Tiene ella mi libro ? — Tiene el suyo. I Tiene V. mi pluma ? — Tengo la mia. I Tiene ella su aguja ? — Tiene la suya. Hablo de mi padre y del suyo (del de v.). Escribo a mi madre y a la de V. El habla de mis hermanos y de los suyos. Escribimos a nuestros amigos y a los de ellos. Quiero lo mio. Cada uno quiere lo suyo. Examples. My father and thine are friends. Thy brother and mine are here. I have your book and mine. My pencil and yours are of gold. Your friend and ours are tall. Your horse and theirs are black. My house and his are new. His pen and ours are of steel. My books and his are handsome. Our friends and yours are in France. Our chairs and theirs are of ma- hogany. Has he my pencil ? — He has his own. Has she my book ? — She has her own. Have you my pen ? — I have mine. Has she her needle ? — She has her own. I speak of my father and of yours. I ^yrite to my mother and to yours. He speaks of my brothers and of his. We write to our friends and to theirs. I wish for what is mine. Every one wishes for what is his. LESSON 14. Vocabulario. El baile, the ball. El cocinero, the cook. El guante, the glove. El maestro, the teacher. Jfcl profesor, the professor. La escritura, the writing. La familia, the family. Alguna parte, somewhere, anywhere. A lo menos, at least. Alto, tall. Gomo, how. Vocabulary. i Conoce V. ? Do you knoio ? are you acquainted with. Conozco, I know, 1 am acquainted ivith. i De quien ? whose 1 I Escribe V. ? do.you write 1 Escribo, / write. I Habla V. ? do you speak t Hablo, / speak. Magnifico, splendid. Otra cosa, something else. Que, which. Exercise 27. 1. [Tiene V. mi libro ? 2. No, senor, no tengo el de V. 3. [Como son los caballos 1 4. El mio es negro, y el de el es bianco. 5. Los hermanos de V. son altos, y los mios son pequenos. 6. Los Ingleses ricos tienen cocineros franceses, los de ellos no son tan bnenos. 7. La familia de su madre de V. es rica, pero la familia de la mia es pobre. 8. [ Conoce V. los jardines de los Ingleses ? 9. Conozco sus jardines y sus casas. 10. Nuestros jardines son hermosos, pero los de ellos son magnificos. 11. [Habla V. de mi casa? 12. No hablo de la suya, hablo de la mia. 13. [ Quiere Y. un pedazo de boUo ? 14. Si, deme V. un pedazo del suyo. 15. [ Para quien son las manzanas, para su hermano de V. 6 para el mio ? 16. Las man- zanas son para el mio, tengo otra cosa para el de V. 17. [ Escribe V. a mis amigos 1 18. Escribo a los mios, a los de Y., y a los de el. 19. I Quien tiene nuestros libros ? 20. El profesor tiene los de Y. y los nuestros. 21. La hermana de Y. es joven, y la mia tambien. 22. La madre de Y., y la de el, estan en el jardin. 23. i Tiene Y. mi lapiz ? 24. No, senor, tengo el mio, el de Y. esta sobre la mesa. 25. Don Carlos Marty es mi maestro de escritura, quien es el de Y. ? 26. Es tambien el mio. 27. Enrique es el amigo de Y., pero no es el mio. 28. [ De quien es la casa 1 29. La casa pequeiia es mia, y la grande es de mi hermana. 30. La casa es pequena, pero a lo menos es mia. Exercise 28. 1. Who has my piece of cake? 2. I have mine, but not yours. 3. Where are your gloves 1 4. Mine are here ; where are yours ? POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 89 5. Mine are somewhere in the room. 6. Do you wish the large or the small hat I 7. I wish mine. 8. Have I your hat ? 9. No, you have your own. 10. You have no inkstand, will you have mine ? 11. No, thank you, I don't wish yours. 12. Is your house large? 13. Our house is very large. 14. My book is French, yours is English, and his is German. 15. Do you speak of our friends I 16. I speak of yours and of mine. 17. Who is in our room .^ 18. Your brother is in yours, and my sister is in mine. 19. Mr. Smith's children (hijos) are taller than ours. 20. My brother's house is large, but mine is larger. 21. The large book is mine, and the small one is his. 22. Which pens are the best, yours or mine ? 23. Mine are the best. 24. My sister and yours are at {en) the ball. 25. Is the slate yours ? 26. The slate is mine, but the pencil is not mine. 27. Do you write to your father 1 28. I write to mine and to yours. 29. Have you two tables in your room ? 30. I have one table in my room, but my brother has three tables in his. 31. Are the tables his ? 32. Two are his, and one is mine. 33. All the books are ours. Gramatica. Grammar. 1. The Possessive Pronouns, like the Possessive Adjectives, agree in gender and number with the object possessed, and not, as in English, with the 'possessor : Mi hermano y el suyo, 3fy brother and his (or hers). Mi madre y la suya, My mother and his (or hers). Mis libros y los suyos, My hooks and his (or hers). Nuestras amigas y las suyas, My lady friends and his (or liers). 2i More expression can be given to these pronouns by adding to them the words mismo, masc, misma, fem., very same; and propio, masc, propia, fem., oivu : El mio mismo, My own. La suya misma, His (her or yoiir) own. El suyo propio, His {her or yotir) own. 3« Instead of el vuestro, la vuestra, los vuestros, las vuesti^as, the Spaniards use el suyo, m. «., la suya,/. s., which really mean 90 LESSON 1 4. his or hers, when the meaning of the sentence is sufficiently clear : Hablo de mi padre y del siiyo, I speak of my father and of yours. Qiiiero mi phima y la suya, / want my pen and yours. 4, When, however, the sentence is not sufficiently clear, el (la, los, las, lo) de V. is used for yours : Mi libro y el de V., My hook and yours, sing. Mi casa y la de V.V., My house and yours, pi. 5i In the same way if we wish to indicate clearly the differ- ence hetween his, hers, or theirs, we use el de el, el de ella, el de ellos, and el de ellas, instead of el suyo, la suya, etc. : Aqui esta mi casa y alia esta la de Here is my house and there is ellos, theirs. La mesa es de el, The table is his. 6# The definite article may also be used with the preposition de before nosotros, etc., instead of el nuestro, la nuestra, etc. : Los libros de ellos y los de nosotros, Their hooks oMd ours. 7. The Possessive Pronouns are also used with the neuter article lo, and mean the property of, what belongs to, etc. : r Thine and mine (tuum et meum). Thy property and mine. What helongs to thee and to me. Lo tiiyo y lo mio, -{ Thy property and mine. 8. The verb ser, to he, with or without the adjective mio, m., mia,/. ; tuyo, m., tuya, /. ; suyo, m., suya, /. ; and nuestro, m., nuestra,/., is frequently used to express possession. When used without the adjective, it is accompanied by the preposi- tion de : El libro es mio, The hook is mine. La casa es suya, The house is his {hers or yours). El caballo es nuestro, The horse is ours. El libro es de mi hermano, Tlu hook is my brother's. 9. Conoce V. ? (from conocer), and sabe V. ? (from saber) both mean do you know? but COnocer means rather to know by the DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES. 91 senses, while saber means more properly to knoiv hy the mind, to he versed in. Conocer, besides, is applied to persons and things, while saber is said only of things, and may precede another yerb : Yo conozco al hombre, ^ / know the man. i Conoce V. mi casa ? Do you know my house ? i Sabe V. su leccioii ? Do you know your lesson ? i Sabe V. leer ? Do you know hovj to read ? Conozco or se el ingles, / know the English language. leccion XV. Lesson XV. DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES. Singular. Masculine. Femimne. Este, e^ta, this ; Ese, esa, that ; Aquel, aquella, that; Plural. Masculine. Feminine. estos, estas, these, esos, esas, those. aquellos, aquellas, those. Ejemplos. Este hombre es rico. Esta miijer.es jo ven. Ese libro y esa pluma son mios. Aquel soldado es valiente. Aquella mujer es pobre. Estos hombres son Yieos. Estas mujeres son jovenes. Aquellos muchachos son jovenes. Sxamples. '' This man is rich. This woman is young. That book and that pen are mine. That soldier is brave. That woman is poor. These men are rich. These women are young. Those boys are young. Adverbs and Adjectives of Quantity. Cuanto, m. , cuanta, f. , how much. Poco, m., poca, f., little. Tanto, m., tanta, f., so much. MuchOf m., miLcha, f., much. Demasiado, m., demasiada, f., too muchy too. Unos cuantos, algunos, some. Bastaate, s., bastantes, pi., enough. Cuantos, m., cuantas, f., how many. Pocos, m., pocas, f.,few. Tanto s, m., tantas, f., so many. Muchos, m., muchas, f., many. Demasiados, m., demasiadas, f., too many, too. Unos pocos, a few. 1 See p. 106, R. 3. 92 LESSON 15. Vocabulario. Vocabulary. El haul, the trunk. El clavel, the pink. El pais, the country. La carta, the letter. La experienoia, the experience. La fiesta, the holy day. La ropa, the clotJies. A casa, to the house. Exercise 29. Ahi, there. Londres, London. i Va V. 1 are you going 1 Voy, / am going. 1. [ Quien es esta senora ? 2. Esta senora es mi madre, y este caballero es mi padre. 3. i A donde va V. esta maiiana ? 4. Voy a casa de mi primo. 5. [ Quiere V. esta rosa 6 aquel clavel ? 6. No quiero ninguna flor. 7. Este muchachito es mi hermano, y esta muchachita es mi hermana. 8. El general es el padre de estos mu- chachos. 9. i Son bonitas aquellas senoritas ? 10. Son jovenes, pero no son niuy bonitas. 11. ^Habla frances aquel hombre ? 12. Habla ingles, pero no habla frances. 13. Ese Ingles es el amigo de aquel Frances. 14. Aquel oficial es hermano de esta senora. 15. El capi- tan de este buque es joven, pero tiene mucha experiencia. 16. [ Es pobre esta mujer? 17. Esta mujer es pobre, pero aquella mujer es rica. 18. ^ Son franceses esos muchachos % 19. Son alemanes. 20. I Que tiene V. en aquellos baules % 21. Tengo todos mis libros en el pequeno haul, y mi ropa en el grande. 22. ^ Son para V. estas cartas ? 23. No, sen or, son para mi padre. 24. i Quien vive en esa casa? 25. El padre de esos muchachos vive ahi. 26. Este hombre es el padre de aquellos muchachos, y esta mujer es la madre de aquellas muchachas. 27. Esta senora es de Paris, y su prima de Londres. Exercise 30. 1. Is the book yours 1 2. This book is mine, but that book is my brother's. 3. Who is that little boy ? 4. He is ( the ) son of that lady. 5. This gentleman and that lady are French. 6. Are you the brother of these ladies ? 7. I am their cousin. 8. Give me a piece of that cake. 9. That cake is not mine. 10. This book and pencil are for your brother. 11. This house is higher than that church. 12. Where are you going this afternoon ? 13. I don't know yet. 14. These flowers are most beautiful. 15. Are these two gentlemen l)rothers? 16. They are not brothers, they are friends. 17. Do you know that country? 18. I know all these countries. 19. Is this gentleman the husband of that lady ? 20. No, he is her brother. DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES. 93 21. This house is too small for us. 22. How many children has that man ? 23. He has three or four. 24. Have you money enough (enough money)? 25. I have not much, but I have enough. 26. Have you much money ? 27. I have very little. 28. You speak too much. Gramatica. Grammar. 1, Este, m., esta,/., designate the person or object nearer to the speaker; ese, m., esa, /., the person or object nearer to the person spoken to ; while aquel, m., aquella, /., designate the person or object equally distant from the speaker and the person who is addressed : Este hornbre. — Ese libro. — Aquel - This man. — That hook. — TJutt lapiz. ^^c?ici7. Esta mujer. — Esa pluma. — Aquella This woman. — That pen. — That cosa. thing. The same rule is applicable to the plural of these Demonstra- tive Adjectives : Estos hombres. — Esos libros. — Aquellos These men. — Those hooks. — 1dpi ces. Those pencils. Estas mujeres. — Esas plumas. — Aquellas These women. — These pens. — cosas. Those things. 2. Although the Demonstrative Adjectives precede the nouns, they are placed sometimes after them to express contempt, anger, or irony : Al picaro ese le hare yo castigar, / will have this rogue jnmished. 3t The Demonstrative Adjective must be repeated before every noun : Este hornbre, esta mujer y este muchacho This man, womaii, and child estan malos, are sick. 4 1 Donde, lohere, is preceded by the preposition a when the verb expresses motion, and by en when it expresses position or situation. A donde and en donde correspond in fact to the English whither and xvherein : I A donde va V. ? Wliere are you going to .? i En donde esta V. ? Where are you / 94 LESSON 16. Leccion XYI. Lesson XVI. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. Singular. Plural. Masculine. Masculine. Este, this one, the latter ; estOS, these, the latter. Ese, that one ; esos, those, Aquel, that one, the former ; aquellos, those, the former. Feminine. Feminine. Esta, this one, the latter ; estas, these, the latter, Esa, that^ one ; esas, those. Aquella, that one, the former ; aquellas, those, the former. Neuter. Esto, this, this thing. Eso, ) AqueUo, r^'^^' ^'^^^ ^^^''^^- El, la, los, las, lo, as Pronouns. El de, — la de, That of. Los de, — las de, Those of. El or la de hierro, The iron one (that of iron). Los or las de ore, The gold ones (those of gold). El or la que yo tengo. The one I have (that which I have). Los or las que yo tengo. Those I have (those which I have). El que, la que, los que, las que, lo que. El que esta aqui, The one who is here (he who is here). La que esta alli, The one who is there (she who is there). Los que dicen eso, Those who say that (they who say that). Las que hahlan, Those (fern.) who speak (they (fern.) who speak). Lo que yo tengo, IFJiat I have (that which I have). Es hueno, it is good. Son buenos, theij arc good. Es muy hermoso, it is very pretty. Son muy hermosos, they are very pretty. Es mi libro, it is my hook. Son mios, they are mine. Que es ? what is it ? Esta listo ? is it ready ? DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 95 Ejemplos. Mi lapiz y el de mi hermano. Mis lapices y los de mi hermano. Mi pluma y la de mi hermana. Mis plumas y las de mi hermana. Mis libros y los de mi amigo. Mis casas y las de mi hermano. Este es grande, aquel es pequeno, m. sing. Esta es grande, aquella es pequena, /. sing. Estos son buenos, aquellos son ma- los, m. pi. Estas son buenas, aquellas son ma- las, /. pi. Esto es mio, aquello es suyo. e Que libro quiere V. ? — Este 6 aquel. i Que pluma quiere V. ? — Esta 6 aquella. i Que libros quiere V. ? — Estos 6 aquellos. I Que plumas quiere V. ? — Estas 6 aquellas. [ Que quiere V. ? — Eso. i Que cuchillo veude V. ? — El de hieiTO. I Que casas compra V. ? — Las de madera. Esto es bueno, aquello es malo. Deme V. eso. Lo que tengo es bueno. Examples. My pencil and my brother's (that of my brother). My pencils and my brother's (those of my brother). My pen and my sister's (that of my sister. ) My pens and my sister's (those of my sister). My books and my friend's (those of my friend). My houses and my brother's (those of my brother. This one is large, that one is small. This one is large, that one is small. These are good, those are bad. These are good, those are bad. This (thing) is mine, that (thing) is his. What (which) book will you have ?, — This one or that one. What (which) pen will you have ? — This one or that one. What (which) books will you have ? — These or those. What (which) pens will you have ? — These or those. What w^ill you have ? — That. What knife do you sell ? — The iron one. What houses do you buy ? — The wooden ones. This is good, that is bad. Give me that. What I have is good. 96 LESSON 16. I Que es eso ? I Qiiien es ? — Soy yo. i Quien habla ? — Es ella. El es Ingles. Ellas son Francesas. Su hermano es sastre. What is that ? Who is it ? — It is I. Who speaks ? — It is she. He is English. They (fern.) are French. His brother is a tailor. I V. tieue dinero, no es verdad ? I El esta malo, no es verdad ? i V. habla ingles, no es verdad ? I V. quiere comprar la casa, no es verdad ? I V. puede venir, no es verdad ? I V. salio, no es verdad ? You have money, have you not ? He is sick, is he not ? You speak English, do you not ? You wish to buy the house, do you not ? You can come, can you not ? You went out, did you not ? Vocabulario. El haul, the trunk. El papel, thex^aper. El paquet9, the package. El pulpero, the grocer. El vaso, the glass. La plata, the silver. Las tijeras, the scissors. Ayer, yesterday. Vocabulary. De este modo, in this way. Demasiado, too, too much, too many. Dice, says. Hace V. ? do you do ? Julio, Julius. Limpio, clean. Por supuesto, of course. Exercise 31 • 1. Tiene V. mis tijeras ? 2. Tengo las de su hermana. 3. [ Quiere V. este pedazo de pan 6 aquel ? 4. Deme V. ese. 5. [ Donde estan mis libros ? 6. Los de V. estan en mi cuarto, pero los de su hermano estan aqui. 7. i Quiere V. el reloj de oro 6 el de plata ? 8. Quiero el de oro, por supuesto. 9. Carlos y Eduardo ya tienen sus baules, el de Carlos es muy grande, pero el de Eduardo es demasiado pequeiio. 10. Deme V. otra pluma, la que tengo es muy mala. 11. El que dice eso, es im hombre malo. 12. ^ Tiene V. la pluma de Enrique ? 13. Tengo la de Julio. 14. Aqui esta el libro de mi hermano y el mio ; este es mas bonito que aquel. 15. Las manzanas de hoy son mejores que las de ayer. 16. i Quiere V. este vaso 6 aquel 1 17. Deme V. el que V. tiene ; el que esta alii no estd limpio. 18. [ Sabe V. lo que tengo ? 19. Yo se muy bien lo que V. tiene. 20. i Que quiere V. aqui ? 21. Yo quiero lo que es mio. 22. [ Que es eso ? 23. Es DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 97 im pedazo de papel. 24. Estos dos hombres son hermanos, el que tiene el sombrero negro habla frances. 25. i Quien esta a la puerta ? 26. Es im muchacho con un paquete. 27. j Es un paquete grande 1 28. No, es un paqnete niuy pequeno. 29. [ Es aquello para ustedes ? 30. No, es para mi liermano. Exercise 32. 1. I have two pencils ; this one is for you and that one for your sister. 2. These gentlemen are French, and those are English ; the latter are rich, but the former are poor. ^ 3. Are the apples good ? 4. Those of our grocer are very good. 5. Is this package for you ? 6. No ; not this one, but that one. 7. What pen will you have ? 8. Give me the gold one. 9. My house is small, but my brother's is much smaller. 10. Give me that. 11. I want this, but not that. 12. Is this well 1 13. This is well, but that is not so well. 14. Are those gentlemen English ? 15. They are French. 16. Who is at the door l is it Edward 1 17. No, sir, it is Henry. 18. What is that ! 19. It is a little box. 20. For whom is that 1 21. It is for your brother. 22. Is it good 1 23. It is not good. 24. How do you do that ? 25. In this way ; it is very easy. 26. Do you speak English or French ? 27. I speak English, but not French. 28. Who is the man at the door 1 29. It is not a man, it is a woman. 30. Will you have this or that ? 31. I don't wish anything. 32. Who is it 1 33. It is I. Gramatica. Grammar. 1, In the foregoing lesson the difference between este, ese, and aqnel has been sufficiently explained. The same rule (L. 15, E. I) is applicable to the neuter esto, eso, and aquello, that is to say, that esto refers to the object nearer to the speaker ; eso to the object nearer to the person spoken to, and aquello the object equally distant from the speaker and the person who is addressed : Esto es bueno, eso es inalo ; This (thing) is good, that one is had ; hut pero aquello es peor, that one there is worse. 2. When there are two objects in the sentence to which ref- 7 98 LESSON 16. erence is to be made, aquel is used for the first one mentioned, and este for the last mentioned. The same rule is applicable to the feminine, the j)lural, and the neuter : Carlos era grande, Federico ambi- Charles teas great, Frederic amhi- cioso ; este (Federico) valiente, tious ; the latter brave, the former aquel (Carlos) poderoso, powerful. 3« Esto is also used when referring to something which the speaker has already mentioned ; and eso when referring to some- thing mentioned by the person who is addressed : Esto que yo digo, es cierto, TFhai I say is certain. Eso que V. dice, no es verdad, What you say is not true. 4, When a fourth object is referred to, the adjective otro, other, is added to the adjective, or to the pronoun : Aquel otro libro, That other hook. Aquel otro, That other one. 5 1 The word mismo is often added to the Demonstrative Pronouns to call attention more especially to them : Este mismo, Tliis very or same one. Aquel mismo, Tlmt very or same one. 6* That of is rendered by el de or la de, and those of by los de or las de according to the gender of the noun referred to. The English formation of the possessive does not exist in Spanish : Mi libro y el de mi amigo. My hooTc and my friend! s. Nuestra casa y la de nuestros amigos, Our house and our friends'. Mis amigos y los de V. My friends and yours. Sus libros de V. y los de Juan, Your books and John's. 7t That which, the one which, are rendered by el que or la que, and those wMch by los que or las que. ftuien, who, may be used instead of que at the beginning of a sentence when speaking of a person : El que w el quien habla mal de He who {ivhoever) speaks ill of his su projimo, no sera admitido neighbor shall not be admitted in en mi casa, my house. AUXILIARY VERB HABER, 99 8. The article and the Demonstrative or Relative Pronoun should never be separated in Spanish, and when this separation takes place in English a different construction must be adopted : Yeri*an los que dicen eso, Those are 'mistaken who say thai. 9. Ello is often used for eso, and corresponds also to the Pro- noun it : Hablamos de ello, ^Fe speak of it, 10. The Pronoun it and its corresponding they for the plural, when the subjects of a sentence, are generally suppressed in Spanish : Es bueno, it is good; Son buenos, they are good. Esta aqui, it is here ; Estan alia, they are there. XVII. Lesson XYII AUXILIARY VT:RB HABEB, to have. Yohe, I have. Tu has, thou JiasL Elba, he has. Ella ha, she has. Nosotros hemos. we have. Vosotros habeis, -^ V. ha, I you have. V.V.han,... J Ellos (m.) ban. they have. Ellas (/.) ban. they have. Begular Verbs, Verhs of the \st Conjugation, ending in ar : Hablar, hablado, to speak, spoken. Cortar, cortado, to cut, cut. Tomar, tornado, to take, taken. Coraprar, comprado, to buy, bought. Verhsrof the 2d Conjiigation, ending in er: Coiner, comido, to eat, eaten. Beber, bebido, to drink, drank. Vender, vendido, to sell, sold. Temer, temido, to fear, feared. 100. LESSON 17. ^ Verbs of the 3d Conjugation, ending in ir: - Recibir, recibido, to receive, received. Subir, subido, to ascend, to go up; ascended^ gone up. Partir, partido, to divide, divided. Sjemplos. i A quien ha hablado V. ? He hablado a este hombre. Mi hermano ha vendido su casa. Los muchachos ban comido el pan. l Han recibido V. V. dinero ? Hemos recibido un poco. i Donde ha estado V. ? He estado eu la casa. i Quien ha tornado mi sombrero ? Nadie ha tornado su sombrero. Hemos sido muy felices. i Quien ha salido ? Nadie ha salido. No he comprado nada. He dado un pedazo de pan al pobre. Examples. To whom have you spoken ? I have spoken to this man. My brotlier has sold his house. The boys have eaten the bread. Have 3^ou received any money ? We have received a 'little. Where have you been ? I have been in the house. Who has taken my hat ? Nobody has taken your hat. We have been very happy. Who has gone out ? Nobody has gone out. I have not bought anything. I have given a piece of bread to the poor man. Vocabulario. El cajon, the drawer. El campo, the country, i El pais, the countrjj.^ El panuelo, the handkerchief. El peso, the dollar. El tiempo, the time. La cosa, the thing. Las mercancias, the goods. La sopa, the soup. Aprender, to learn. Castig-ar, to punish. Dar, to give. Desobediente, disobedient. Vocabulary. Estar, to he. Eiiropa, Europe. ~- Hallar, to find. Malo, umvell. Otro, another. Perder, to lose. Porque, because. Salir, to go out. Ser, to be. Tener, to have. Todo el mundo, ererij Varies, as, several. Vivir, to live. 1 Campo refers to the country contrasted with the city, while pais means a tract of land inhabited by a nation. AUXILIARY VERB HABER. 101 Exercise 33. 1. Los muchachos han comido todas las maiizanas del jardin. 2. I Ha dado V. el cafe al caballero 1 3. No, seiiora, pero he dado el te a la senora. 4. [ Ha comprado V. una mesa ? 5. Si, senor, he comprado una mesa de caoba. 6. [ En donde ha hallado V. esto 1 7. En nuestro jardin. 8. i Quien ha tomado dinero de mi cajon I 9. Su hermano de V. ha tomado dinero y papeles. 10. Que sopa han tenido V. V. ? 11. Hemos tenido una sopa muy buena. 12. | Que han comprado V. V. hoy 1 13. Hemos comprado muchisimas cosas. 14. I Que ha perdido su hermanade V. 1 15. Ha perdido supanuelo. 16. I Han comprado V. V. manzanas ? 17. No, senor, hemos com- prado peras. 18. [Ha recibido V. algo de su padre? 19. He reci- bido varias cosas. 20. i Ha estado Y. malo ] 21. Si, senor, he estado bastante malo. 22. [ Quien ha estado en la casa \ 23. Nadie ha estado en la casa, pero alguno ha estado en el jardin. 24. i Por- que no ha comprado V. la casa del medico, V. que es tan rico ? 25. Nunca he sido rico. 26. i Ha aprendido Y. su leccion ? 27. To- davia no, no he tenido tiempo. 28. i De quien ha hablado Y. ? 29. He hablado de mis buenos amigos. 30. Mi hermano ha vendido su caballo, pero ha comprado otro mas grande. Exercise 34. 1. The soldier has given an apple to the child. 2. My sister has received 'two letters from Paris. 3. The children have been in the garden with their little friends. 4. Have the boys eaten the cheese ? 5. They have eaten the bread. 6. Has the general bought a house ? 7. He has bought a house in our street. 8. Have you had any money ? 9. I have had two dollars. 10. Where have you been, John? 11. I have been in the country. 12. Have you bought your silk dress in that large store ? 13. I have bought no dress. 14. Who has been sick at your house ? 15. Every body has been sick. 16. Charles has been disobedient and he has been punished. 17. The merchant has received many goods from Europe. 18. Have you found anything in the drawer 1 19. I have not found anything in it {en ^l). 20. Why has not your brother gone out? 21. Because he has not been well. 22. Have you bought anything for the chil- dren 1 23. Yes, I have bought something useful for them ( ellos ). 24. Have you lived in that country 1 25. No, sir, I have never been 102 LESSON 17. in that country. 26. Have you eaten enough, my friend 1 27. Yes, sir, I have eaten and drank enough. 28. Has your father gone out ? 29. He has not gone out yet. 30. The soldiers have received less bread than meat. Gram^tica. Grammar. 1 , The verb to have is rendered in Spanish by two different verbs, tener and haber. Tener, of which we have already spoken (L. lY., P. 35), is used as an active verb to indicate a material or immaterial pos- session, and generally means to possess, to hold, as : Yo tengo dinero, I have money. El tiene tiempo, he has time. El tiene un haston, he Ims a stick. Tenemos pan, we have bread. Haber is used as an auxiliary verb preceding the past parti- ciple as : He recibido dinero, / have received money. Hemes comido pan, We have eaten bread. Haber cannot be separated from the principal verb as is the case in English in interrogative sentences. Thus : Have you given ? must be rendered by ^ha dado V. ? and has he come ? by jha venido dl? 2. Haber was formerly used as an active verb, and had then the following Imperative : He tu, thou shalt have ; hayamos, we shall have. Haya el, he shall have ; habed, you shall have. hayan, they shall have. It may be used even now in sentences with the Infinitive : Aprovechare cuantos medios yo puedo / will use all the means I may haber, have. El empleo cuanta influencia pudo ha- He used all the influence he could her, com,mand (have). 3« The verb tener may be used sometimes as auxiliary, and the sense of the sentence would be but slightly altered. In this AUXILIARY VERB HABER. 103 case the participle would have to agree in gender and number with the noun : Tengo escritas las cartas, / have the letters {all) written, Tenemos el dinero contado, We have the money counts. This way of expressing one's self ought, however, to be avoided by all tliose not perfectly familiar with the language, as it might lead to mistakes in style. 4# All verbs in Spanish end in ar, er, or ir. Verbs ending in ar belong to the 1st Conjugation, as : A mar, to love ; dar, to give ; hablar, to speak. Verbs ending in er belong to the 2d Conjugation, as : Comer, to cat ; beber, to drink ; correr, to run ; tener, to ham. Verbs ending in ir belong to the 3d Conjugation, as : Recibir, to receive ; huir, to flee; dividir, to divide ; salir, to go out, 3, All regular verbs of the 1st Conjugation end in the Past Participle in ado, and those of the 2d and 3d Conjugation in ido. The same may be said of nearly all the irregular verbs in the three Conjugations : amar^ amado ; coger^ COgido ; atribuirf atribuido ; etc. Leccion XVIII. lesson XVIII. VERB HABER, to have (continued). Irregular Participles. Abrir, to open ; abierto, opened. Cubrir, to cover ; cubierto, covered. Dscir, to say, to tell; dicbo, said, told. Escribir, to lorite ; escrito, written. Hacer, to make, to do; hecho, 'inade, done, Morir, to die ; muerto, died. Voner, toput; puesto, ;?w^. Ver, to see ; visto, seen. Volver, to return ; vuelto, returned. 104 LESSON 18, Haber de and tener que : I Que he de hacer ? i Que tengo que hacer ? V. ha de estudiar, \ V. tiene que estudiar, { I Que hemos de decir ? l Que teiiemos que decir, V. V. han de decir la verdad, V. V. tienen que decir la verdad,. What am I to do ? You must study. Wliai are we to say ? You must tell the truth. Preposition a and Active Verbs : i A quien ha visto V. ? He visto d su padre de V. Amo d mis aniigos, Juan ha perdido d su padre. El medico cura al enfermo, Pero and No tengo oro, i)ero tengo plata. No tengo oro, sino plata, El es joven, pero es muy prudente. No tenemos hermanos, sino hermanas, No hablo ingles, sino espanol, El no habla ingles, pero.habla es paiiol, JVhom have you seen ? I have seen your father. I love my friends. John has lost his father. The physician cures the patient. sino : / have not gold, hut I have silver. I have not gold, hut silver. He is young, hut he is very prudent. We have no hrothers, hut sisters. I don't speak Eiiglish, hut Spanish. He does not speak English, hut he speaks Spanish. O and 11, or ; Y and e, and : El 6 yo, Uno u otro (hefore o), Tio y sobrino, Verano e invierno, \ hefore i Padre e hijo, \ or hi. He or I. One or the other. Uncle and nephew. Summer and winter. Father and son. Vocabulario. El criado, the servant. El dueiio, the owner. El maestro, the teacher. El rincon, the corner. El teatro, the theater. El viaje, the journey. La batalla, the battle. La carta, th^ letter. 'L2i. manana, the morning. Vocabulary. La nieve, the snow. La tierra, the earth. La ventana, the windov). Alguien, alguno, some- body, anybody. Asi, thus. Con, with. Desde, since. Dos, two. Enfermo, ill, sick. Escribir, 3. to write. Espana, f. Spain. Europa, f. Europe. Francia, f. France. • Italia, f. Italy. Sino, hut. Tres, three. Viajar, 1. to travel. AUXILIARY VERB HABER. 105 Exercise 35. 1. I Quien ha abierto la ventana ? 2. Creo quo es el criado. 3. ^ A quieii ha visto V. en el teatro ? 4. He visto a toclos mi« amigos. 5. [ Quien ha dicho eso ] 6. El panadero ha dicho eso a mi hermano. 7. I Como ha hecho V. eso ! 8. Asi. 9. i Ha escrito V. a su padre ? 10. No, seiior, no he escrito todavia a nadie. 11. [Ha vuelto su fainilia del campo ? 12. Toda la familia ha vuelto a la ciudad desde tres dias. 13. j Quien ha muerto en esa casa ? 14. Nadie ha muerto, pero todo el raundo esta enfermo. 15. i Donde ha puesto V. mi bas- ton 1 16. Esta en el rincou. 17. i A quien ha hablado V. en aquella casa? 18. He hablado al dueiio de la casa. 19. [Ha conocido V. a mi padre 1 20. He conocido a su padre y a sVi madre de V. en Fran- cia. 21. [Han comprado V. V. buenas manzanas? 22. Las manzanas que hemos comprado no son muy buenas. 23. [ Ha visto V. a mi hermana ? 24. No he visto a nadie. 25. [ Que tiene V. que hacer '? 26. Tengo muchisimo que hacer. 27. j Tiene V. oro 6 papel? 28. No tengo oro, pero tengo papel. 29. Este caballero no habla sino ingles. Exercise 36. 1. Have you seen anybody in the garden? 2. I have seen Mr. Rojas and his son. 3. Why have you said that ? 4. I have not said anything, I have not spoken. 5. Is the door open ? 6. The door and the window are closed. 7. Have you written to your father ? 8. I have written to my father, mother, and sisters. 9. AVho has put my cane in the other room ? 10. I don't know, no one has been here since this morning. 11. Has your friend returned from Europe? 12. He has not returned yet. 13. Is this gentleman your brother ? 14. He is not my brother, but my cousin. 15. Where must you go this afternoon? 16. I have to go out with my father. 17. The gen- eral has died in the battle. 18. Where have the children been this morning ? 19. They have been in the house. 20. With what have you written that ? 21. I have written all that with a pencil. 22. Do you know what the teacher has said ? 23. I know very well what he has said. 24. Is your uncle rich? 25. He has been rich, but he is poor now. 26. Have the children written their letters ? 27. They have w^ritten two or three letters. 28. Do you know this gentleman ? 29. I know his brother. 106 LESSON 18. Gram&tica. Grammar. 1, The Past Participle agrees in gender and number with its subject when accompanied by the verb estar, to he. It remains invariable when used with the auxiliary haber, to have. He comido. — Hemos comido, I have eaten. — We have eaten. Ellos {or ellas) han comido, They have eateri. La carta esta esciita, The letter is written. Las cartas estaii escritas, Tlie letters are loritten. Los caminos estan cubiertos de nieve, The roads are covered with snow. 2. The verb haber is also us.ed to express obligation, and is then followed by the preposition de and the Infinitive of the principal verb. The verb tener followed by que is used in the same way, and both verbs correspond then to the English verb must. The active A^erb deber has also the same meaninpj : He de ir a la ciudad, -^ dad J Debo ir a la ciudad, Tengo que ir a la ciudad, V I must go to the city. 3« The object of an active verb requires the preposition a be- fore it when this object is a person, a rational being, or a thing personified : Yeo d un hombre, I see a man. Vemos a,l hombre, We see the man. Conocemos d estos caballeros, We knoiv these gentlemen. ? I A quien conoce Y . ? Whmn do you know ? 4. The preposition ft, which is not translated in English, must, however, be left out in Spanish after an active verb and a per- son, if by the addition of this preposition the sentence should not be clearly expressed : Envio el hijo al padre (not : envio al hijo al / send the son to tlie padre), father. Han robado un niiio. They have stolen a child. Han robado d un nino would mean They have robbed a child. Quiero im criado, ** ** I want a servant. Quiero d un criado, ** ** Hove a servant. PRESENT PAETICIPLE, OR GERUND. 107 5* Pero and sino are both rendered by hut. Pero is used when a verb is expressed in the second part of the sentence, while sino is used when the first part of the sentence is nega- tive and no verb is expressed in the second part. Sino has also the meaning of except, and is used with the nefifative : Hablo frances, pero no hablo ingles, No hablo frances sino ingles, El no habla sino aleman, I speak French J hut I do not speak English. I don't speak French^ hut English. He speaks nothitig hut {except) German, 6i Solamente, only, hut^ may be used instead of sino in the affirmative : No tengo oro, tengo solamente papel, / have no gold, I have only paper. Leccion XlX* Lesson XIX. THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE, OR GERUND. Amar ; amando, Hablar; hablando, Comprar; coniprando, Tomar ; tomando. Comer; comiendo, Beber ; bebiendo, Hacer ; haciendo, Perder ; perdiendo. Recibir ; recibiendo, Salir ; saliendo, Partir ; partiendo, Subir ; subiendo. \st Conjugation: to love ; loving, to speak ; speaking, to huy ; huyinjg. to take ; taking. 2d Conjugation : to eatj to dine ; eating, to drink ; drinking, to do, to make ; doing, to lose ; losing. ^d Conjugation: to receive ; receiving, to go out ; going out. to divide ; dividing, to ascend, to go out ; ascending, going out. 108 LESSON 19. Leer ; leyendo, Instruir ; instruyendo, Decir ; diciendo, Dormir ; diirmiendo, Morir; muiiendo, Pedir ; pidieiido, Poder ; pudiendo, Sentir ; sintiendo. Verbs in eer and uir : to read ; reading. to instruct ; instructing. Irregular Verbs. to say, to tell ; saying^ telling. to sleep; sleeping. to die ; dying. ■to ask for ; asking for. to he able, can ; being able. to feel, to hear ; feeling, hearing. Sjemplos. \ De que esta V. liablando ? Estoy liablando del tiempo. Los muchachos estaii jugaiido. I Que esta V. haciendo ? Estqy escribiendo una carta. i Que estan diciendo estos h ombres ? Ko estan liablando. Mi inadre esta durmiendo. Los ninos vienen llorando. He esta do leyendo todo el dia. Aprendo estudiando y le3^endo. I Que estan V. V. leyendo ? Estamos leyendo un libro frances. Examples. Of what are you speaking ? I am speaking of the weather. The boys are playing. What are you doing ? I am writing a letter. What are these men saying ? They are not speaking. My mother Tis sleeping. The children are coming crying. I have been reading the whole day. I learn by studying and reading. What are you reading ? We are reading a French book. Vocabulario, El albaiiil, the tnason. El barco, the vessel. El capitan, the captain. El gusto, the pleasure. El vaso, the glass. La fonda, the hotel. La tarde, the afternoon. La noche, the night. Abierto, opened. Alemania, f. Germany. Almorzar, 1. to breakfast. Bebo, / drink. Vocabulary. Can tar, 1. to sing. Concluir, 3. to finish. Conocer, 2. to know. Correr, 2. to run. Estudiar, 1. to study. Hasta, until. Importante, important. Jugar, 1. to play. Llegar, 1. to arrive. Llorar, 1. to cry, to weep., Mandar, 1. to send. Muchas gracias, / (or ive) thank you. Nosotrcs, us. Pasar, 1, to pass. Por, through, by. Pre star, 1. to lend. Tarde, late. Tomar, 1. to take. Va, goes. Venir, 3. to corm, Ya, already. PRESENT PARTICIPLES, OR GERUND. 109 Exercise 37. 1. I Que estan haciendo los muchachos en el cuarto ? 2. Estan jugando con sus amiguitos. 3. [ Quien esta cantando en la calle ? 4. Una pobre mujer esta cantando. 5. Mi hermano esta leyendo, y mi hermana esta escribiendo. 6. i Ha hablado V. al capitan ? 7. Yo no he hablado a nadie, he estado en mi ciiarto hasta ahora. 8. i A quien ha prestado V. dinero ? 9. He prestado dinero a su hermaiio de V. 10. [Sabe V. si el general esta en casa ? 11. Esta en su cuarto, pero esta durmiendo. 12. El muchacho va corriendo por las calles. 13. [ De que esta V. hablando ? 14. Estoy hablando de una cosa muy importante. 15. [ Quiere V. comer hoy con nosotros ? 16. Con mucho gusto. 17. i En que pais ha vivido V.? 18. He vivido dos anos en Francia, y tres aiios en Alemania. 19. [ Cuantas cartas han escrito V. V. ? 20. Hemos escrito dos 6 tres. 21. [ Quiere V. tomar un vaso de vino ? 22. Muchas gracias, yo no bebo vino. 23. I Que ha dicho el medico ? 24. No se lo que ha dicho, porque ha hablado con mi hermano. 25. [ Porque esta llorando ese muchacho ? 26. El llora por nada. 27. He estado escribiendo desde esta maiiana, y todavia no he concluido mis cartas. 28. [ Donde ha pasado V. la noche ? 29. He pasado la noche en la fonda, no conociendo a nadie aqui. 30. i Porque no ha venido V. a mi casa ? 31. Porque no sabia (7 did not know) donde Y. vivia {lived). Exercise 38. 1. Where are the children ? 2. They are playing in the garden. 3. Have they studied their lessons ? 4. They have been studying all the morning. 5. With whom were you (estaba V.) speaking in the garden ? 6. I was speaking with a French gentleman. 7. Were you sleeping this afternoon ? 8. No, I was writing in my room. 9. Who is crying in the other room ? 10. The little boy is crying. 11. What is your brother doing now ? 12. I don't know where he is now. 13. Where are you going to ? 14. T am going home. 15. T\Tiy have you eaten my bread ? 16. Because I had (hahia) not eaten anything since this morning. 17. Has your father gone out? 18. No, sir, he is in the house ; he is breakfasting. 19. The masons are building a splendid house in our street. 20. What was (estaba) that man say- ing ? 21. He was speaking of the w^eather. 22. Why are you run- ning 1 23. Because it is already late. 24. Have you sent the money 110 LESSON 19. to the tailor ? 25. Not yet, I have not received my money. 26. This poor boy has lost his father and mother. 27. Do you know if the vessel has arrived ? 28. Yes, sir, it has arrived ; I have spoken to the captain. 29. Who has been in my room this morning 1 30. Your brothers and sisters have been here and have opened your room. 31. What is that man asking for? 32. He is asking for money. Gram^tica. Grammar. 1 • The Present Participle (Gerund) ends in Spanish in ando, for the 1st conjugation ; and in iendo for the 2d and 3d conju- gations. These terminations are added to the Present of tlie Infinitive after suppressing the terminations ar, er, and ir. This is the case in regular verbs and also in most of the ir- regular verbs : the termination never changes, but the radical part of a few irregular verbs undergoes a slight change : Hablar, hablando ; to speak, speaking. Comer, comiendo ; to eat, eating. Escribir, escrihiendo ; to write, writing. Tedir, pidiendo ; to ask for, asking for. Dormir, durmiendo ; to sleep, sleeping. 2. Verbs ending in eer and uir change the i into y : Leer, leyendo ; to read, reading. Instruir, instruyendo ; to instruct, instructing. 3« The Present Participle used with the verb estar, to he^ corresponds to the progressive form in English, and expresses the action of the verb as continuing and unfinished : Estoy leyendo, / am reading. I Que esta V. haciendo ? What are you doing ? Esta lloviendo, It is raining. El estaha escribiendo, He was writing. He estado leyendo todo el dia, / have been reading the whole day. 4, The verb estar is not used with the Present Participle of the verbs ser, to he ; ir, to go ; venir, to come. Thus w^e would not say : estoy yendo, / am going ; but voy, / go ; nor esta viniendo, he is coming, but viene, he comes ; etc. PRESENT PARTICIPLES, OR GERUND. Ill 5, When other verbs are used as auxiliaries of the Present Participle, they sufficiently explain themselves : El nino sigue durniiendo, The child continues sleeping. El viene corriendo, He comes running. 6f The Present Participle indicates a certain continuation of the action : Andan entrando y saliendo, They continioe coming in and going out. 7. The Present Participle is also used to express the way in which a thing happens : La tos se cura sudando, Coughing is cured by perspiring. Se aprende estudiando, Oiie learns by studying. 8. It is also used with the preposition en, in ; and refers then to the action of the other verb : En acabando ira, WJien he has finished he will go. Observation. — The preposition may, however, be left out in most cases, without altering the sense of the sentence. 9. The Present Participle of the verb estar often precedes that of another verb : Estaudo comiendo, recibio la carta, Whilst he was dining he received the letter. 10. The Present Participle is used very frequently in Span- ish for the sake of brevity and euphony, and in cases where the English use adverbs, conjunctions, and prepositions, as : when, as, while, whilst, since, if, by, etc. : Habla durmiendo. He talks while he sleeps. Se aprende leyendo, One learns by reading. Siendo asi, no quiero ir. Since it is so, I shall not go. Dandole yo licencia, saldra, If I give him permission^ he will go out. Viendo que su hermano no When he saw tlmt his brother was not com- venia, se fue. i7ig, he went away. 112 LESSON 20. Leccion XX. Lesson XX. CARDINAL NUMBERS. The Cardiual Numbers are : Uno, m., una, /. Dos, Tres, Cuatro, Cinco, Seis, Siete, Ocho, Nueve, Diez, Once, Doce, Trece, Catorce, Quince, Diez y seis,^ Diez y siete, Diez y ocho, Diez y nueve, Veinte, Veinte y uno, Veinte y dos, Veinte y tres, Veinte y cuatro, Veinte y cinco, Veinte y seis, Veinte y siete, Veinte y ocho, Veinte y nueve, Treinta, Treinta y uno, Cuarenta, Cincuenta, One. Two. Three. Four. Five. Six. Seven. Fight. Nine. Ten. Eleven. Twelve. Thirteen. Fourteen. Fifteen. Sixteen. Seventeen. Eighteen. Nineteen. Twenty. Twenty-one. Twenty-two. Twenty-three. Twenty-four. Twenty-five. Twenty-six. Twenty-seven. Twenty-eight. Twenty-nine. Thirty. Thirty-one. Forty. Fifty. 1 These numbers are also written in one word, as : Dieziseis, veintiuno, treintaiuno, etc. CARDINAL NUMBERS. 113 Sesenta, Setenta, Ochenta, Noventa, Ciento,! Ciento y uno, Ciento y diez, Doscientos (-as, /.), Trescientos (-as, /.), Cuatrocientos (-as, /.), Quinientos (-as,/.), Seicientos (-as,/.), Setecientos (-as, /. ), Ochocientos (-as, /.), Novecieiitos (-as,/.) Mil, Mil y ciento. Mil y doscientos (-as,/.) Dos mil, Cien ^ mil, Doscientos (-as, /.) mil, Un millon, Dos millones, Zero (cero). Sixty. Seventy. Eighty. Ninety. One hundred. One hundred and one. One hundred and ten. Two hundred. Three hundred. Four hundi'ed. Five hundred. Six hundred. Seven hundred. Eight hundred. Nine hundred. One thousand. One thousand one hundred. One thousand two hundred. Two thousand. One hundred thousand. Two hundred thousand. One million. Two millions. Zero or cipher. Dies de la semana. Days of the "week. Domingo, Liines, Martes, Miercoles, Jueves, Viernes, Sabado, Sunday. Monday. Tuesday. Wednesday. Thursday. Friday. El domingo, Los liines. El martes por la manana. El miercoles por la noche. El jueves proximo, ) El jueves que viene, ( Saturday. El sabado pasado, On Sunday. On Mondays. Tuesday morning. Wednesday evening. Next Thursday. Last Saturday. Divisiones del dia. La manana, El dia. La tarde, Divisions of the day. The morning. The day. The afternoon. 1 Ciento drops the syllable to before another word. Cien hombres, One hundred inen. 8 114 LESSON 20. La noche, Manatia por la manana, Manana por la uoche, De dia, De noche, Buenos dias, Buenas tardes, Buenas noches. The evening, the night. To -morro w inorn ing. To-morrow evening. In day-time. In the evening, at night. Good morning, good day. Good afternoon. Good evening, good night. Vocabulario. El ailo, the year. El banco, the bank. El bocoy, the hogshead. El correo, tJie post-office. El dia, the day. El hotel, the hotel. El mes, the month. El minuto, the minute. El saco, the bag. La biblioteca, the library. La caballeria, the cavalry. La caballeriza, the stable. La carne de vaca, the beef. La estacion, the season. La bora, the hour. La libra, the pound. La persona, the person. La semana, the week. Vocabulary. La tripulacion, the crew. Anocbe, last night. Como, about, how. Contar, to count, Contiene, contains. Convidar, to invite. Cuando, when. En casa, at home. Lo siento, / am sorry for it. Mas, more. Matar, to kill. i Puede V. ? can you ? Puedo, / can. Necesitar, to need. Nosotros, us. Publico, public. Solamente, only. TInos pocos, a few. Exercise 39, 1. He comprado doscientos bocoyes de aziicar y trescientos sacos de cafe. 2. [ Que ban comprado V. V. hoy ? 3. Hemos comprado diez polios y cincuenta libras de carne de vaca. 4. i Cuanto dinero ha recibido V. 1 5. He recibido cuatrocientos y noventa y niieve pesos. 6. [ Y porque no quinientos ? 7. Porque hemos pagado un peso en el correo. 8. Un mes tiene yeinte y ocho, veinte y nueve, treinta, 6 treinta y un dias. 9. El dia tiene veinte y cuatro boras ; la bora tiene sesenta minutos. 10. Un ano tiene trescientos sesenta y cinco, 6 trescientos sesenta y seis dias. 11. [ Cuando va V. a casa de su her- mano 1 12. Voy los miercoles. 13. EI general tenia (had) cincuenta mil bombres de infanteria y diez mil bombres de caballeria. 14. Esta CAKDINAL NUMBERS. 115 aldea no tiene sino dos calles. 15. El principe tiene mas de cincuenta caballos en sus caballerizas. 16. i Cuando esta V. en casa ? 17. Estoy en casa todos los dias por la noche. 18. Hemos matado mas de veinte pajaros en el jardin. 19. Una semana tiene siete dias, ciento y sesenta y ocho horas, y diez mil y ochenta minutos. 20. Un ano tiene cin- cuenta y dos semanas, doce meses, y cuatro estaciones. 21. i Ha contado V. todo el dinero ? 22. He contado tres mil JDesos en oro, y dos mil pesos en papel. 23. i A cuantas personas ha convidado V. para el domingo 1 24. No he convidado todavia a nadie ? 25. i Ha perdido soldados el general 1 26. Ha perdido dos mil de sus me j ores soldados. 27. [ Cuanto dinero quiere V. ? 28. Deme V. doscientos y cincuent-a pesos. 29. [Es bastante? 30. Es bastante con los ochenta pesos que yo tengo. Exercise 40, 1. Our city has now twenty thousand inhabitants ; in 1860, it had (tenia) only a few houses, and about five hundred inhabitants. 2. The vessel has a crew of twenty-two men. 3. Charles's father is one of the richest men in (de) our town ; he has at least two millions of dol- lars. 4. Have you bought apples or pears 1 5. I bought a hundred apples, but no pears. 6. Washington was born {nacio) in 1732, and died (murio) in 1799. 7. Where are you going on Monday next? 8. I don't know yet. 9. I go to school on Mondays, Tuesdays, Wed- nesdays, Thursdays, and Fridays ; on Saturdays I go to the country, and on Sundays to church. 10. Do you work in day-time or in the evening ? 11. I always work in the evening. 12. Can you come to-morrow morning? 13. No, but I can come to-morrow evening. 14. Have you any money for us 1 15. I have twenty-five dollars for you, and fifty dollars for your brother. 16. It is not enough ; I need twelve dollars more. 17. I am sorry for it, but I have not one dollar more. 18. Mr. Felix Ronda has more than twenty houses in the city. 19. This hotel has more than two hundred rooms. 20. We have a hotel in our city which (que) contains three hundred. 21. How many dollars do you need to (para) buy that horse ? 22. I need one hundred and twenty dollars, having already one hundred and eighty dollars in the bank. 23. My father has given five hundred pounds of meat to the poor. 24. There are (hay) more than twenty thou- sand volumes in our Public Library. 25. There were (habia) at least four thousand persons at (en) the theater last night. 116 LESSON 20. Gram^tica. Grammar. 1 , Uno, one, a, an, has for feminine una. Both add s in the plural when used substantively : Los iinos y los otros, m., ) Las Unas y las otras, /., j ^^' ^^^ ^^^^ ^^ '^^'''''' 2. From dos, tivo, up to ciento, hundred, the numbers are plural and common to both genders ; but from doscientos, two hundred, to novecientos, 7iine hundred, the termination OS is changed into as for the feminine : Tres hombres y cuatro mujeres, Three ivomen and four men, Doscientos hombres y trescientas Two hundred tiicn and three hundred nnijeres, women. 3t The conjunction y, and, is placed only before the last number : Doscientos noventa y ocho, Two hundred and ninety -eight. 4. Ciento drops the last syllable before a noun. [In the same way uno drops also the before a noun.] Cien hombres y cien mujeres, One hundred mtn and mie hundred women, Veinte y un muchachos, Twenty -o^ae hoys. 5, Although mil, one thousand, has neither gender nor num- ber, it may be used in certain cases in the plural, as in English, and is then a noun : Este hombre ha gastado muchos miles, This man has spent many thousaiids. 6* The preposition a is left out after an active verb when the object of the sentence is preceded by a cardinal number : He visto veinte hombres (not a veinte hombres), Iliave seen twenty men. 7. More than, less than, are rendered in Spanish by mas de, and menos de before a cardinal number : Mas de cien pesos, More than a hundred dollars. Menos de tres dias. Less than three days. 8. Eleven hundred, twelve hundred, thirteen hundred, etc., cannot be expressed as in English, but must be translated : Mil y ciento. One thousand one hundred. Mil y doscientos, One thousand two hundred. Mil y trescientos. One thousand three hundred. ORDINAL NUMBERS. 117 Leccion XXI. Lesson XXI. ORDINAL NUMBERS. Primero or primo, Segundo, Tercero or tercio, Cuarto, Quinto, Sesto, Septimo, Octavo, Nono or uoveno, Decimo, Undecimo, Duodecimo, Decimo tercio,^ Decimo cuarto, Decimo quinto, Decimo sesto, Decimo septimo, Decimo octavo, Decimo nono, Vigesimo, Vigesimo primo, Vigesimo segundo, Vigesimo tercio, etc. Trigesimo, Cuadragesimo, Quincuagesimo, Sexagesimo, Septuagesimo, Octagesimo, Nonagesimo, Centesimo, Centesimo primo, Centesimo undecimo, Ducentesimo, First Sccotid. Third. Fourth, Fifth, Sixth. Seventh. Eighth. NiTith. TentJi. Eleventh. Twelfth. Thirteenth. Fourteenth. Fifteenth. Sixteenth. Seventeenth, Eighteenth. Ivineteenth. Twentieth. Tweyity-flrst. Twenty-second. Twenty -third. Thirtieth. Fortieth. Fiftieth. Sixtieth. Seventieth. Eightieth. Ninetieth. Hundredth. Hundred and first. Hundred and eleventh. Two hundredth. 1 These numbers are also written in one word, as decimo tercio, deoi- mocuarto, etc. 118 LESSON 21. Trecentesimo, Cuadragentesirao, Q uingentesimo, Sesceutesimo, Septengeiitesimo, Octogentesimo, Nonagentesimo, Milesimo, Dumilesimo, Diezmilesimo, Millonesimo, Three hundredth. Four hundredth. Five hundredth. Six huTidredth. Seven hundredth. Fight hundredth. Nine hundredth. Thousandth. Two thousandth. Ten thousandth. Millionth. Niimeros fraccionarios. La mitad, Un medio, Un tercio, Dos tercios, Un cuarto, Tres cuartos, Un quinto, Un sesto or ) Un seisavo, ) Un septimo, Un octavo, Un noveno, Un decimo. The half. One half. One third. Two thirds. One fourth. Three f our tJis. One fifth. One sixth. One seventh. One eighth. One ninth. One tenth. Un Un Un Un Un Un Un Un Un Un Un Fractional numbers. undecimo or onzavo. One eleventh. dozavo, trezavo, catorzavo, quinzavo, diez y seisavo, diez y sietavo, etc. etc. veintavo, treintavo, centavo, milavo. One twelfth. One thirteenth. One fourteenth. One fifteenth. One sixteenth. One seventeenth. etc. One twentieth. One thirtieth. One hundredth. One thousandth. Collective Numbers. Un par, .A pair. Una quincena, Fifteen. Una docena, A dozen. Una sesentena, Sixty. Multiplicative Numbers. Simple, Single. Doble, Double. Triple,r Treble. Cuadruple or cuadruplo, Quadruple. Quintuple o?' quintuplo, Quintuple. Una vez, once. Dos veces, twice. Tres veces, three times. Sestuple or sestuplo, Sextuple. Septuple or septuplo, Septuple. Octuple or octuplo, Octuple. Decuple or decuplo, Decuple. Centuple or centuplo. Centuple, Esta vez, this time. Aquella vez, that time. Todas las veces, every time. ORDINAL NUMBERS. 119 Varias veces, several times, Algunas veces, sometimes. La priraera vez, tJie first time. La ultima vez, the last time. Cada vez, each time. Muchas veces, many times, Otra vez, anotlier time. La pr6xima vez, next time. Meses del ano. Months of the year. Enero, January. Julio, Jidy. Febrero, February. Agosto, August. Marzo, March. Setiembre, September. Abril, Aiwil. Octubre, October. Mayo, May. Noviembre, November. Junio, June. Dicieinbre, December. Las estaciones. The Seasons. La prima vera, the spring. El verano or el estio, the summer. El otoho, the autumn, the fall. EI invierno, the winter. Ejemplos. i Que dia del mes tenemos ?a I Que dia es hoy ? V I A cuantos estamos ? J Hoy es el priniero. Mariana es el cinco. Estamos a dos de Febrero. Naci el quince de Mayo. El vapor sale el diez de este mes. I Que tomo tiene V. ? Tengo el primer tomo. Enrique es el quinto en la clase. Examples. What day of the month is it ? To-day is the first. To-morrow is the fifth. It is the second of February, I was born on the fifteenth of May. The steamer leaves on the tenth of this month. Which volume have you ? I have the first volume. Henry is the fifth in the class. Vocabulario. El almuerzo, the breakfast. El capitulo, the chapter. El cuaderno, the copy-book. El emperador, the emperor. El huevo, the egg. El ingenio, the genius. El jamon, the ham. El pavo, tlie turkey. El periddico, the newspaper. Vocabulary. El vapor, the steamer. La onza, the ounce. La parte, the part. Asi, therefore.^ Cada, each. Comer, to eat. Cor to, short. Cuando, when. Dar, to give. Despues de, after. Leer, to read. Pedro, Peter. Pertenece, belongs. Saro, rare. Rusia, Russia. Sale, leaves. Siempre, always. Viene, comes. 120 LESSON 21. Exercise 41. 1. Febrero es el segundo mes del ano. 2. Enrique y Eduardo son los dos primeros discipulos de la clase. 3. [ Cuando ha escrito V. a sii padre ? 4. He escrito la primera vez el tres de Enero de mil ocho- cientos sesenta y cinco, y la segunda vez en el mes de Mayo del mismo aiio. 5. i Ha dado V. libros a los muchachos de la primera clase ? 6. He dado libros y cuademos a los de la segunda clase. 7. El mes de Julio tiene tantos dias como el mes de Agosto. 8. [Cuando ha recibido V. sus cartas 1 9. He recibido una el dos de Abril, y la otra el cinco de Setiembre. 10. Hemos tenido mucha lluvia el treinta de Octubre. 11. [ Que pan ban comprado V. V. ? 12. Hemos comprado cinco libras y media de pan frances. 13. Cada soldado ha recibido media libra de came. 14. Estaremos {we shall he) en nuestra casa nueva el primero de Mayo proximo. 15. El muchachito ha dado la mitad de su almuerzo al pobre. 16. He comprado una docena de polios, y mi hermano ha comprado media docena de pavos. 17. [A cuantos estamos 1 18. Estamos a once 6 doce. 19. Carlos Quinto fue (was) un gran emperador. 20. i Cuantas veces ha sido V. el pri- mero en su clase ? 21. He sido dos veces el primero ; tres veces, el segundo ; y cuatro veces, el tercero. 22. [ No ha sido V. nunca el ulti- mo 1 23. No, senor, mi primo es siempre el ultimo. 24. j Que mes viene despues del mes de Abril ? 25. El mes de Mayo, por supuesto. 26. I Es frio el invierno en este pais 1 27. El invierno es frio, pero corto. Exercise 42. 1. Have you read the newspaper of the first of December ? 2. No, but I read that of the thirtieth of November. 3. My brother will be (esturd) here in July or (in) August. 4. What day of the month is it ] 5. It is the thirteenth. 6. One half and one third are Qiacen) five sixths. 7. This poor woman is sick for the third time this month. 8. The Seventh Eegiment is a fine regiment. 9. How many chapters have you read ? 10. I have read the first two (tw^o first). 11. December is the last month of the year. 12. That child is in his sixth year. 13. Have you been sick here ? 14. I have been very sick the first month, but I am very well now. 15. A half ounce is the thirty-second part of a pound ; therefore, eight ounces are the half, and four ounces the fourth part of a pound. 16. One third of the money belongs to the father ; one sixth, to the children ; and one ORDINAL NUMBERS. 121 Lalf, to the mother. 17. I have bought a dozen hams and sixty eggs. 18. Peter the First, emperor of Russia had {tenia) a rare genius. 19. When does the steamer leave 1 20. It leaves on the twenty-third of this month. 21. How many times have; you been in Paris ? 22. I have been once in Paris, and twice in London. 23. Has your father bought another horse l 24. He bought three horses. 25. When are you going to the country 1 26. I go in the month of June. 27. Give me the half of your bread. 28. I cannot, I have eaten all the bread. 29. Where is your house ? 30. My house is the seventh house after the church. Gr^matica. Grammar. I • Ordinal numbers are considered as adjectives, and agree in gender and number with the noun to which they refer : Este muchacho es el primero, This hoy is the first. Estas muchachas son las primeras, These girls are the first. La quinta avenida, The fifth avenue. 2. Primero, first, and postrero, last, drop the o in the singu- lar when they precede the noun : El primer hombre, The first man. El postrer discipulo, The last scholar. Observation. — Tercero, third, either drops or retains the o : - El tercer dia or el tercero dia, The third day. 3* Primo and tercio are used instead of primero and tercero, after another ordinal number : Vigesimo primo, twenty-first. Trigesimo tercio, thirty-third. But we say : El primero de los oficiales, The first among the ojficers. 4. Ordinal Numbers are used in Spanish as in English after the names of sovereigns, but without the article : Fernando segundo, Ferdinand the Second. Felipe cuarto, Philip the Fourth. Observation. — The Spaniards generally use, as being shorter, the Car- dinal Numbers after the names of sovereigns when their order of succession exceeds ten. Thus, they prefer to say : Luis Catorce, Louis the Fourteenth. Carlos Doce, Charles the Twelfth. 122 LESSON 22. 5« After the number eleven .the Cardinal or Ordinal Numbers may be used with equal propriety to indicate the divisions of a book or other works : Capitulo quince or decimo quinto, Fifteenth chapter. Pagina veinte or vigesima, Twentieth page. 6« In Spanish the Cardinal I^umbers are used by abbreviation before the names of months. Primero, first, forms, however, an exception, and must be used instead of uno : El primero de Enero, The first of January. El cinco 6 seis de Mayo, The fifth or sixth of May, 7i Mitad is synonymous with medio, half ; but medio is an adjective, while mitad is a noun. Medio and the other fractions take the feminine form when ' speaking of libra, pound, vara, yard, etc., even if these nouns are not expressed : Media libra de aziicar, A half pound of sugar. Una cuarta de arroz, A quarter pound of rice. Media vara de pano, Half a yard of cloth. . Tres cuartas de muselina. Three fourths of a yard of muslin. 8t The endings 0, a in multiplicative numbers, as dtiplo, dupla, double ; triplo, tripla, treble ; although often used, are not con- sidered as correct as those given above. Leccion XXII. Lesson XXII. LO, LE, LA, LOS, LAS, AS PRONOUNS IN SIMPLE TENSES. Yo lo {or la) tengo, I have it. Tu lo {or la) tienes, thou hast it. El lo {or la) tiene, he has it. Ella lo {or la) tiene, she has it. Nosotros lo {or la) tenemos, loe have it. Vosotros lo {or la) teneis, you have it. Ellos lo {or la) tienen, they (masc.) have it. Ellas lo { Veia, I saw or I was seeing. Veias, tliou sawest or tJiou wast seeing. Veia, he saw or he was seeing. VeiainoSy we saiu or we were seeing. Veiais, you suw or you were seeing. Veian, they saw or they were seeing. 3. Era, I was. Eras, thou wast. Era, he was. Eramos, we were. Erais, you were. Eran, they were. 7"ocabulario. Vocabulary. El enemigo, the enemy. El escritorio, the office. El modo, the way. El negocio, the business. El oso, the hear. El paraguas, the wnhrella. El tiempo, the time. La elegaucia, the elegance. La fortaleza, the fortress. La limonada, the lemonade. La luz, the light. La puerta, the door. Caro, dear. Dife rente, different: Creer, 2. to believe. Entrar, 1. to enter. Gas tar, 1. to spend. Llamar, 1. to call. Lie gar, 1. to arrive. Mandar, 1. to send. Mirar, 1. to look at. Ocupar, 1. to occupy. Tocar, 1. to play on. Vestir, 3. to dress. Exercise 71. 1. Yo sabia que su bermano de V. estaba malo la semana pasada, pero yo creia que el estaba bueno ahora. 2. i Estaba V. en Francia en aquel tiempo 1 3. Si, senor, yo estaba alii desde dos anos. 4. i Que bacia V. entonces ? 5. Yo estudiaba para ser medico. 6. i Como estaban vestidas las dos seiioras ? 7. Estaban vestidas con niucba elegancia. 8. Yo no sabia lo que querian estos bombres. 9. Querian entrar en la casa para robar. 10. Hablabamos muy bien el frances cuando eramos jovenes. 11. ^ Que bacia su hermano de V. cuando ( UNIV-KSITY IMPERFECT TE^^, JNDI^^ATiyjgMOOD. 201 estaba en Inglaterra ? 12. No hacia nada, pero gastaba mucho dinero. 13. I Cuanto recibia j)or mes ? 14. Mi padre le mandaba doscientos pesos todos los meses. 15. ^ Que estaban V. V. mirando en la calle 1 16. Estabamos mirando a un hombre que hacia bailar un oso. 17. i Que le decia aquella sefiora a V.? 18. Me decia que esperaba a su marido y a sus hijos esta noche. 19. [ A quien conocian V. V. en aquella ciudad ? 20. No conociamos a nadie. 21. i Que querian estos caballeros ? 22. Querian verle a V. 23. Juan queria comprar mi caballito, pero no tenia bastante dinero. 24. [ A que hora iba V. a casa del medico 1 25. Yo iba todas las mananas a las diez y media. 26. I A quien veia V. en su casa ? 27. Yo veia a su seiiora y a sus hijos. 28. I Que vendia aquella mujer ? 29. Ella vendia muy buenas peras. 30. i A quien daba V. todo su dinero ? 31. Yo no lo daba a nadie, yo lo prestaba a mi primo que hacia muy buenos negocios. 32. Nuestros soldados ocupaban todas las fortalezas del enemigo. 33. [ A que hora almorzaban V. Y. ? 34. Almorzabamos muy tem- prano, pero comiamos muy tarde. Exercise 7 2, 1. Who was the man at the door ? 2. It was not a man, it was a little boy. 3. What did he want ? 4. He wished to know if Mr. Charles Marti lived in this house, as (pues) he had a letter for him. 5. Was not the gentleman in his room ? 6. He was there this morn- ing, but he has gone out. 7. Did you not know that my brother had arrived ? 8. I did not know it, 9. Were you acquainted with Mr. Arroyo ? 10. I knew him very well when he was young. 11. He was very poor then, but now he is very rich. 12. Why did you not wish to buy that house ? 13. Because it was too dear, and I had not money enough. 14. With whom were you in Paris 1 15. I was there with my mother and sisters. 16. Do you know what Charles was telling me ? 17. I could see that he was speaking to you, but I could not hear a word. 18. He was telling me that he knew who had stolen your umbrella. 19. Where were you going this morning ? 20. I was going to my office ; I go there now very early. 21. To whom were you writing this morning ? 22. I was writing to all my friends. 23. Could you see any one in the house ? 24. I could see no one, because there was no light in the room. 25. Who was play- ing on the piano ? 26. My sisters were playing, and my brothers were singing. 27. Where were you when I was calling you ? 28. I 202 LESSON 36. was in the garden with the children. 29. My friend used to come every day, but I don't know where he is now. 30. What did you drink when you were sick ] 31. I drank lemonade. Gram^tica. Grammar. 1, The use of the Imperfect^ Past Definite, and Past Indefi- nite, which in many cases would have but one form in English, presents one of the greatest difficulties met by those learning the Spanish language. The following rules are calculated to facili- tate the task of the student. Practice, reading, and reasoning must also be depended upon as the best auxiliaries for the correct use of the Imperfect Tense. 1. The Imperfect is used to express an action or event which has already occurred, but which was existing or going on when another action or event took place : El estudiaha ciiaiido entraron, He was studying when they entered. 2. This Tense is also used to express what was customary or habitual at a certain past time, and in that case may generally be rendered in English by prefixing " used to " to the Infinitive Mood, as : Cuando viviamos en el campo, estu- When we lived (used to live) in the diabamos mucho, country we studied (used to study) much. Observation. — We should not use the Imperfect, however, in speaking of an accidental occurrence : Sin embargo, una vez, jugamos todo Once, however, we played the whole el dia, day. 3. The Imperfect is also used to describe the qualities of per- sons or things, and the state, place, or disposition in which they were in past time. This Tense may, therefore, be called the Descriptive Tense of Spanish : Las muchachas estaban vestidas de The girls were dressed in white, and bianco, y tenian flores en los ca- had fiowers in their hair. bellos, THE PAST DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE. 203 leccion XXXVII. lesson XXXVII. THE PAST DEFINITE OR PRETERITE, AND THE PAST INDEFINITE. 1. The terminations of the Past Definite are the following for most verbs : For the 1st Conjugation. For the 2d and 3d Conjugations. -6 -i -aste -iste -d -16 -amos -imos -asteis -isteis -aron -idron Is^ Conjugation, Hablar, to speak. Habl-^, / spoke or I did speak. Habl-aste, thou spokest or thou didst speak. Habl-d, he spoke or he did speak. Habl-amos, we spoke or we did speak. Habl-asteis, you spoke or you did speak. Habl-aron, they spoke or they did speak. Amar, to love. Am-^, / loved or I did love. Am-aste, thou lovedst or thou didst love. Am-d, he loved ot he did love. Am-amos, we loved or we did love. Am-asteis, you loved or you did love. Am-aron, they loved or they did love. 2d Conjugation. Vender, to sell. Vend-i, / sold or / did sell. Vend-iste, thou soldest or thou didst sell, Yend-i6, he sold or he did sell. Vend-imos, we sold or we did sell. Yend-isteis, you sold or yoic did sell. Vend-ieron, they sold or they did sell. 204 LESSON 37. Com-i, Com-iste, CoQi-id, Com-imos, - Com-isteis, Com-ieron, Comer, to eat. I ate or / did eat. thou atest or thou didst eat. he ate or he did eat. we ate or we did eaZ. you ate or you did eat. they ate or tluy did cat. 3d Conjugation. Becibir, to receive. Recib-i, / received or / did receive. Kecib-iste, thou receivedst or thou didst receive. Recib-io, he received or he did receive. Recib-imos, we received or we did receive. Recib-isteis, you received or you did receive. Recib-ieron, they received or they did receive. Salir, to go out. Sal-if / went out or / did go out. Sal-is te, thou weiitest out or thou didst go out. Sal-i6, he went out or he did go out. Sal-imos, we went out or we did go out. Sal-isteis, you ivent out or you did go out. Sal-ieron, they went out or they did go. out. He hablado — vendido — recibido, etc. Has hablado — vendido — recibido, etc., Ha hablado — vendido — recibido, etc. Hem OS hablado — vendido — recib- ido, etc., Habeis hablado — vendido — recib- ido, etc., Han hablado — vendido — recibido, etc.. Past Indefinite. I have spoTcen — sold — received^ etc. thou hast spohen — sold — received, etc. he has spohen — sold — received, etc. we have spoken — sold — received, etc. you have spoken — sold — received, etc.\ they have spoken — sold — received, etc. THE PAST DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE. 205 Vocabulario. El bosque, tlie ivood. El embajador, the ambassador. El enemigo, the enemy. El ladron, the thief. El lugar, the place. El veneno, the poison. La deuda, the debt. La fonda, the hotel. La posteridad, the posterity. Cansado, tired. Colon, Columbus. Dios, m God. Romano, Roman. Abrir, 3. to open. Aconsejar, 1. to advise. Vocabulary. Andar, 1. to walk. Asegurar, 1. to assure. Comprender, 2. to understand. Derrotar, 1. to defeat. Entrar, 1. to enter. Esperar, 1. to expect. Ofrecer, 2; to offer. Pelear, 1. to fight. Perder, 2. to lose. Preguntar, 1. to ask. Presentar, 1. to introduce. Prometer, 2. to j^romise. Responder, 2. to answer. Salir, 3. to leave, to go out. Veneer, 2. to conquer. Exercise 73. 1. Don Juan me pregunto si V. estaba en su cuarto ? 2. ^ Y que respondio V. 1 3. Eespondi que yo no sabia, pero que el podia subir a ver. 4. El general presento los oficiales al principe. 5. Mi padre vendio su casa al tio de V. 6. i Sabe V. lo que pago por ella 1 7. Pago mucho menos de lo que valia. 8. i Cuanto dinero recibieron V. V. ? 9. Recibimos como trescientos pesos. 10. Dios prometio a Abrahan una grande posteridad. 11. i Cofioce V. a este caballero 1 12. Le he conocido en Paris. 13. [ Cuando vio V. a Carlito ? 14. Le vi el mes pasado en Boston donde estaba con su padre. 15. [ A que hora comieron Y. Y. ayer ? 16. Comimos a la misma hora que los otros dias. 17. [Con quien hablo Y. en el escritorio ? 18. liable con el dependiente del banquero. 19. [ Han escrito Y. Y. sus cartas ? 20. Las escribimos anoche ; sabe Y. si ha salido el vapor ? 21. Salio ayer a las cuatro de la tarde. 22. [ Quien bebio el vino 1 23. Yo no se quien bebio el vino, pero se muy bien quien comio los hollos. 24. Los enemigos perdieron diez mil hombres en aquella batalla. 25. Jose {Joseph) me aseguro que el habia pagado todas sus deudas, pero yo le respond! que no lo creia. 26. Cuando Anibal vio a los embaj adores romanos, tomo veneno. 27. El enfermo queria salir esta maiiana, pero yo le aconseje de no hacerlo. 28. Los muchachos abrieron la puerta del jardin y entraron en el. 29. Colon descubrio la America en el aiio 1492. 30. El pobre Felipe perdio todo su dinero 206 LESSON 37. en aquella especulacion. 31. Los ladrones entraron en aquella casa y robaron todo lo que hallaron. 32. Trabajamos muchisimo hoy, y estamos muy cansados. 33. i A quien vieron V. V. en el teatro ? 34. Vimos d todos nuestros amigos. 35. Los Romanos vencieron a todas las naciones del mundo. Exercise 14:. 1. Why did you not write to your brother? 2. I wrote to him, but he did not answer me. 3. Did you see Mr. Martin ? 4. I did not see him, I was not in the city when he was here. 5. The general lost the battle, but his soldiers fought with much courage. 6. Have you studied your lessons ? 7. We studied them last night. 8. Did you go out with your sister when she w^as here ? 9. We went out every day. 10. Who took my book 1 11. Nobody took it, it is in the same place yet. 12. Did you receive what you were expecting ? 13. We have not received anything yet. 14. Did you understand that man ? 15. I understood everything, although he spoke French. 16. Did you ever study French ? 17. I spoke it very well when I was younger. 18. Did your brother sell his horses ? 19. He sold two of them, and he sent the other to the country. 20. Why did he not lend it to you ? 21. Because I have a horse myself. 22. Why did not your sister dance at the ball ? 23. Because she was not very well, and she only stayed (se quedo) half an hour. 24. Does she know how to dance ? 25. She learned all the new dances during the win- ter. 26. The thieves killed a poor man in the forest. 27. Our soldiers defeated the enemy and took their principal cities. 28. That little boy ate too much last night ; and to-day he is sick. 29. My brother saw your mother when he was in England ; did she reside a long time in that country 1 30. She resided there for two years. 31 . The man killed the dog because he bit his little boy. 32. Where did you breakfast this morning 1 33. I breakfasted in the French hotel where you saw me last week. 34. Did you drink anything at his house ? 35. He did not offer us anything. Gram^tica. Grammar. !• The Fast Definite or Preterite and the Past Indefinite are used in all those cases of past time where the Imperfect cannot THE PAST DEHNITE AND INDEFINITE. 207 be used. The Preterite, however, is used more especially to ex- press an action which took place hut once, and when the time at which the action took place has entirely elapsed. The Preterite is, therefore, especially used in narrative style, and is also designated as the Preterito historico : Pedro el Cruel no respeto las leyes, Peter the Cruel did not respect the J se porto mal con sus aliados. • laws, and acted wrongly towards his allies. 2. The Preterite may, however, be used when there is con- tinuation of time ; but, in this case, the action must have taken place at a remote period, and the time must be designated : llorna fue por mas de dos siglos la lio^ne was for niore than two centu- senora del orbe, ries the mistress of the world. 3« The same tense is also very often used to express cus- tomary and repeated actions or qualities, when it is intended to express the time rather than the action. When we say : Napoleon era {iinperf.) gran guerrero, Napoleon was a great warrior , we express the quality, but when we say : Napoleon fue {preterite) gran guerrero, we think of the time in which he was living. 4, The Preterite may be rendered in English according to the meaning of the sentence by its corresponding form, or by the auxiliary did which has no equivalent in Spanish : Comimos a3^er en su casa, We dined yesterday at his house. No sail anoche, / did not go out last night. 5t The Past Indefinite is also used to express a past action when the time at which it took place belongs to a period of time (day, week, month, year, etc.) not entirely elapsed : Hoy he estado en la iglesia, / have been to church to-day. No he ido al teatro este aho, / have not been to the theater this year. 6« The Past Indefinite is also used to express an action but lately performed : He leido los papeles, / have read the papers. 208 LESSON 37. It is furthermore used to express the successes or merits of a " person when we wish to give more expression to the sentence : Napoleon ha conquistado en poco Napoleon {has) conquered in a short tierapo Itaha y Aleraania, time Italy and Germany. 7. General Obse7'vat{ons on the Imperfect, Preterite, and Past Indefinite. The Imperfect can seldom, be rendered in EngUsh by the past tense which takes did as an auxihary except, when in interrogative sentences, did is used as an auxiliary to used to, either expressed or understood. The Preterite never corresponds like the Imperfect to the English Imper- fect, composed of the auxiliary and the Present Participle, nor can it be rendered by a verb preceded by used to. The three Tenses above mentioned offer in their application a certain difficulty, as they are sometimes obligatory, and sometimes optional ; or, in other words, their use is sometimes a question of grammar, and sometimes only a qusstion of style. When several sentences concur to the same end, as in the following nar- rative, it is not always an easy matter to determine whether the student should use the Imperfect or another Tense, ^the Preterite for instance, as he has to take into consideration not only the special shade of meaning of each verb, but also the general tenor of the other sentences forming the whole of the narration. As already stated, the Imperfect is used as a descriptive tense, while the Preterite is only used as a iiarrativfi..,tense. ^ ^ All the Imperfects of the following Spanish translation are printed in italics. Era poco mas de mediodia cuando It was a little over mid-day ichen entraron los Espaftoles en su alo- the Spaniards entered their lodg- jamiento, y hallaron prevenido un ings, and found a delicate and banquete regalado y esplendido splendid banquet prepared for para Gortes y los cabos de su Cortes and the captains of his ejercito, con grande abundancia army, and at the same time a de bastimentos menos delicados g^^eat abundance of less delicati para el resto de la gente, y mu- provisions for the remainder of chos Indios de servicio que su- the people, while many Indians, ministraban los manjares y las attending to the service, brought in bebidas con igual silencio y pun- the eatables and beverages with tualidad. Por la tarde vino Mo- equal silence and punctuality. IRREGULARITIES OF THE PRETERITE. 209 tezuma con la misma pompa y acompanamiento, a visitar a Cortes, que, avisado poco antes, salio a recibirle hasta el patio principal, con todo el obsequio debido a semejante favor. Acom- panole hasta la puerta de su cuar- to, donde le hizo una profunda reverencia, y el paso a tomar su asiento con despejo y gravedad. Mando luego que acercasen otro a Cortes : hizo sena para que se apartasen a la pared los caballeros que andaban cerca de su persona, y Cortes advirtio lo mismo a los capitanes que le asistian. Llegaron los interpretes, y cuando se prevenia Cortes pa,ra dar prin- cipio a su oracion, le detuvo Mote- zurna, dando a entender que tenia que hablar antes de oir, y se refiere que discurrio en esta sustancia : Montezuma came m the afternoon with the same pomp and retinue to visit Cortes, and the latter hav- ing been informed of this some time before, came out to receive him as far as the principal court, with all the courtesy due to such a favor. Cortes accompanied him as far OS the door of his room, where he made a deep bow to him, and Mmitezuma passed on and took his seat with ease and gravity. He then ordered tlmt they should bring forward another seat for Cortes, and made a sign to the nobles who icalked near his person to with- draw as far as tlw wall, ivhile Cortes did the same to the ca.ptains who followed him. The interpreters then arrived, and as Cortes teas preparing to commence his discourse, Montezuma stopped him, giving him to understand that he had to speak before he would listen, and it is related tlmt he spoke thus : Leccion XXXTIII. Lesson XXXYIII. IRREGULARITIES OF THE PRETERITE. 1. Tener, 2. to have. Tuve, / had {did have), Tuviste, thou hadst. Tuvo, he had. Tuvimos, we had. Tuvisteis, you had. Tuvieron, they had. \i 2. Estar, 1. to be. Estuve, I was. Estuviste, thou wa^t. Estuvo, he was. Estuvimos, we were. Estuvisteis, you were. Estuvieron, they were. 210 LESSON 38. 8. Hacer, 2. to make, to do, Hize, / made or / did make. Hiciste, thoic madest, Hizo, he made. Hicimos, we made. Hicisteis, you made. Hicieron, they tnade. 4. Querer, 2. to wish, to he willing. Quise, / wished or / did ivish. Quisiste, thou wished. Quiso, he wished. Quisimos, we wished. Quisisteis, yoio wished. Quisieron, they wished. 6. Poder, 2. to he ahle. Pude, / was ahle or / could. Pudiste, thou wast ahle. Pudo, he ivas able. Pudiinos, we were ahle. Pudisteis, you were ahle. Pudieron, they were ahle. 6. Poller, 2. to put. Piise, I put or / did put. Pusiste, thou didst put. Puso, he put. Pusimos, we put. Pusiste is, you 2^ut. Pusieroii, they put. 7. Saber, 2. to know. Supe, / knew or / did know. Supiste, thou didst know. Supo, he knew. Supinios, loe knew. Supisteis, you knevj. Supieron, they knew. 8. Decir, 3. to say, to tell. Dije, / said or / did say. Dijiste, thou saidst. Dijo, lie said. Diji'mos, we said. Dijisteis, you said. Dijerou, they said. 9. Haber, 2. to have (auxiliary and impersonal). Hube, I had {did have). Hubiste, thou hadst. Hubo, he had. Hubimos, we had. Hubisteis, you had. Hubieron, they had. 10. Andar, 1, to vmlk. Anduve, / walked or / did walk. Anduviste, thou didst walk. Anduvo, he walked. Anduvimos, we walked. Anduvisteis, you walked. Anduvieron, tliey walked. 11. Caber, 2. to he contained. Cupe, / ivas contained. Cupiste, thou wast contained. Cupo, M was contained. Cupimos, we were contained. Cupisteis, you were contained. Cupieron, they were coTitained. 12. Traer, 2. to hring. Traje, / brought or / did hring. Trajiste, thou didst hring. Trajo, he brought. Trajinios, we brought. Trajisteis, you brought. Trajeron, they brought. IRREGULARITIES OF THE PRETERITE. 211 13. Conducir, 3. to conduct, to take. Condiije, I conducted or / did condioct. Condujiste, thou didst conduct. Condujo, lie conducted. Condujimos, ive conducted. Condujisteis, you conducted. CondujeroD, they conducted. 14. Venir, 3. to come. Vine, / ca7)u or / did coine, Viniste, thou earnest. Vino, he came. Vinimos, we cams. Vinisteis, you came, Vinieron, tJiey cajne. XL 1. Dar, 1. to give, Di, I gave. Diste, thou gavest, Dio, lie gave. Dimos, we gave. Disteis, you gave. Dieron, they gave. 2. Ser, 2. to he, and Ir, to go. Fui, / wa^ ; I went or / did go. Fuiste, tliou wast ; thou wcntest. Fue, he was ; lie went. Fuimos, we were ; we went. Fuisteis, you were ; you went. Fueron, they were ; they went. in. 1. Sentir, 3. to feel. Senti, I felt or I did feel, Sentiste, thou feltest. Sintio, he felt. Sentimos, we felt. Sentisteis, you felt. Sintieron, they felt. 2. Pedir, 3. to ask for. Pedi, / asked or / did. ask for, Pediste, thou didst ask for. Pidio, he asked for. Pedimos, we asked for. Pedisteis, you asked for. Pidieron, tliey asked for. 3. Dormir, 3. to sleep. Dormi, I slept. Dormiste, thou didst sleep, Dunnio, he slept. Dorminios, we slept. Dormisteis, you slept. Duniiieron, they slept. 4. Morir, 3. to die. Mori, I died or I did die. Moriste, thou diedst. Murio, he died. Morimos, we died. Moristeis, you died. Murieron, they died. 212 LESSON 38. Vocabulario. El Arabe, the Arab. El cartero, the postman. El cielo, the heaven. El huracan, the hurricane. El instante, the instant. El Bomano, the Roman, La muerte, the death. La nacion, the nation. Afuera, out. A pie, on foot. Cansado, tired. Despues, afterwards, then. Dios, m. God. En soguida, immediately. Galileo, Galileo. Vocabulary. Hasta, till, until, as far as. Indomable, i7idmnitdble. Mismo, very, self Ocupado, busy. Romulo, Romulus. Asolar, 1. to devastate. Caar, 2. to fall. Consolar, 1. to comfort. Dejar, 1. to leave. Derribar, 1. to upset. Echar (1.) a pique, to founder. Nacer, 2. to be born. Presentar, 1. to present. Sontir, 3. to feel, to regret. Someter, 2. to subdue. Exercise 75. 1. [ Donde estuvo V. esta maiiana ? 2. Estuve todo el tiempo en mi cuarto. 3 i Diirmio bien el enfermo 1 4. Durmio hasta las cinco esta manana, y despues estuvo mejor. 6. En el ano de 1846 liubo en la Habana un terrible huracan que echo a pique muchos barcos, derribo casas y asolo muchas haciendas. 6. Mi ainigo vino con nosotros hasta la puerta, pero no quiso entrar. 7. Tuvimos muy buen tiempo en nuestro viaje. 8. i Porque no hablo Y. con mi padre ? 9. No pude hablarle, estaba tan ocupado que me dijo de {to) volver esta tarde. 10. [ Supieron V. Y. sus lecciones hoy? 11. Las supimos muy bien. 12. [ Quien le dio a Y. tanto dinero ? 13. Pedi cien pesos a mi padre, y otros cien pesos d mi tio, y me los dieron en seguida. 14. [ Sabe Y. donde puse mi baston ? 15. Y. lo ha dejado en el otro cuarto. 16. [ Quieii trajo esto aqui ? 17. Nose, pero creo que es el hombre que vino anoche. 18. [ Ha venido el cartero ? 19. En este mismo instante ; ahi tiene Y. las cartas. 20. [ Quien fue el primer re}^ de Roma ? 21. Eomulo fue el primero. 22. i Creyo Y. esto ] 23. Si, lo crei, y todo el mundo lo creyo tambien. 24. El general murio en la batalla. 25. [ Estuvo Y. ajioche en el teatro ? 26. No, seiior ; estuve en el concierto. 27. Los hermanos Rodriguez estuvieron aqui ayer, sentimos muchisimo haber Qiaving) estado afuera. 28. i Oyo Y. lo que dijo este hombre ? 29. Oi todo lo que dijo. 30. El caballero que vino ayer estd todavia durmiendo ; nos dijo cj^ue venia muy can- IRREGULARITIES OF THE PRETERITE. 213 sado del viaje. 31. Newton nacio en el mismo aiio en que murio Galileo. 32. Porque no quiso V. ir al parque con los otros cabal- leros ? 33. Porque no quisieron ir a pie. 34. Mi padre vivio en este pais cuando tenia veinte anos. 35. El banquero dio un baile la semana pasada. Exercise 76. 1. What did that man tell you ? 2. He told me that he had no money, and that he could not pay you. 3. The Arabs were always an indomitable nation ; the Romans themselves could not subdue them. 4. Louis XIV. was a great king. 5. He read the letter and gave it to his lather. 6. The general presented his sons to the king. 7. They gave all their money to the poor. 8. My brother went first to France and then to England. 9. The rain fell for (durante) three days. 10. He brought a great deal of money, and bought many things for his friends. 11. He took his friend by the hand and presented him to his father. 12. God made the heaven and the earth. 13. We had very bad weather in the country. 14. He put the money on the table and went out. 15. Several generals died in that battle. 16. We felt the cold more this year than last year. 17. What did your sister do when she heard of the death of her best friend ? 18. She wept a great deal, and we could not comfort her. 19. The children went to the park with their father. 20. We could not do that, and nobody in the house could do it. 21. Why could you not write to him ? 22. Because I did not know what to write. 23. The boy came and brought this letter for you. 24. My father gave us money and we went to the theater. 25. Why did you not come earlier ? 26. We could not come because we were very busy. 27. What did you do in the city ? 28. We bought all the things that we needed. 29. Napo- leon was a great general. 30. Did you ask him for the money ? 31. I only asked him for twenty dollars, and he gave them to me. 32. We were very well received by your family. Gram^tica. Grammar. 1, As seen above, the verbs tener, 2. to have; estar, 1. to he ; hacer, 2. to make^ to do ; querer, 2. to wish, to he 'willing ; poder, 2. to he ahle; ponor, 2. to put; sabcr, 2. to know; decir, 3. to say; to tell ; haber, 2. to have (auxiliary and impersonal) ; andar, 1. to 214 LESSON 38. walk; caber, 2. to he contained; traer, 2. to bring; conducir, 3. to conduct, to take ; and venir, 3. to come ; have the same termina- tions for the Preterite, namely : -e -iste -0 -imos -isteis -i^ron, having a sort of regularity among themselves in this Tense. 2« The verb dar, 1. to give, unlike the other verbs of the 1st conjugation takes, for the Preterite, the terminations of the regular verbs of the 2d and 3d conjugations, namely : -i -iste -16 -imos -isteis -ieron. 3* The verbs ser, 2. to he, and ir, 3. to go, as shown, have the same Preterite, namely : f-ui f-uiste f-ue f-uimos f-uisteis f-ueron. i. Verbs like pedir, 3. to asTc for ; sentir, 3. to feel, to re- gret ; etc., which in the Gerund change the e into i (pidiendo, sintiendo, etc.,) change also the same letter in the 3d person sin- gular and 3d person plural of the Preterite (pidio, pidieron ; sin- tio, sintieron, etc.). Verbs like dormir, 3. to sleep ; morir, 3. to die ; etc., which in the Gerund change the o into u (durmiendo, muriendo, etc.), change also the same letter in the 3d person singular and 3d person plural of the Preterite (durmio, durmieron ; muri6, nmrieron, etc.). 5, Verbs ending in the Infinitive in car, change in the Pre- terite c into qu before e: tocar, 1. to touch; toque, / touched or / did touch ; etc. Verbs ending in gar insert a U before the e in the same tense : jugar, 1. to play ; jugue, I played or I did play ; etc. Verbs ending in eer change the i into y before the : creer, 2. to helieve ; creyo, he believed ; etc. Verbs ending in uir change the i into y before the : huir, 3. to flee; huyo, he fled ; etc. Observation. — The changes above given also take place in other tenses and, in the two last cases, also before the letters a and o. THE PAST ANTERIOR AND THE PLUPERFECT. 215 Leccion XXXIX. Lesson XXXIX. THE PAST ANTERIOR AND THE PLUPERFECT. Past Anterior. Hube hablado, / had spoken. Hubiste hablado, thou Jiadst spoken, Hubo hablado, he had spoken. Hubimos hablado, we had spoken. Hubisteis hablado, you had spoken. Hubieron hablado, they had spoken. Pluperfect. Habia hablado, / had spoken. Habias hablado, thou hadst spoken. Habia hablado, he hoA spoken. Habianios hablado, we had spoken. Habiais hablado, you had spoken. Habian hablado, tJicy had spoken. Vocabulario. El heredero, the heir. El nombre, the name. El periodico, th^e newspaper. El vapor, the steamer. La noticia, the news. La palabra, the ivord. La urbanidad, the urbanity. Abierto, opened. A caballo, on horseback. Amistoso, friendly. Apenas, hardly, no sooner. Aun, yet. Cuando, ichen. Despues que, after. Que, when. Triste, sad. Vocabulary. Tan pronto como, -| Luego que, ^ , (-as Soon a Asi que, Al punto que, ^ Ya, already. Comer, 2. to dine. Consul tar, 1. to considt. Contener, 2. to contain. Entregar, 1. to hand. Llevar, 1. to take. Merecer, 2. to deserve. Montar, 1. to mount. Olvidar, 1. to forget. Pronunciar, 1. to pronounce. Tomar, 1. to take. Visitar, 1. to visit. Exercise 77. 1. [ Que hizo V. cuando hubo almorzado 1 2. Tan pronto conio hube almorzado, volvi a mi escritorio. 3. Asi que me hubo visto, me dio el dinero. 4. Apenas me hubo dicho estas palabras, cuando salio. 5. Luego que hubo leido la carta, monto a caballo y salio de la ciudad. 6. [ Donde habia olvidado V. su baston 1 7. Yo no habia olvidado mi baston, habia olvidado mi paraguas ; lo que era peor, pues comenzo a Hover muchisimo. 8. Cuando hubo vistado la casa. dijo que no queria comprarla. 9. Yo habia salido cuando entraron los ladrones en mi cuarto. 10. Cuando hubieron abierto la puerta, 216 LESSON 39. vieron que no habia nada que robar. 11. Guillermo no habia apren- dido su leccion, y habia sido castigado como lo merecia. 12. Despues que hubo visto a su amigo, estuvo mas satisfecho. 13. [ Habia re- cibido su padre la carta cuando salio 1 14. Aiin no la habia recibido. 15. Cuando hubo comido, tomo su sombrero y dijo que tenia que salir. 16. Me entrego el dinero tan pronto como lo hubo recibido. 17. Cuando hubo vendido su casa, conipro otra mas grande. 18. Cuando le hubo dicho mi nombre, me recibio con la mayor urbanidad. 19. Al punto que me hubo visto, me hizo sena de (to) seguirle. 20. Me presto el libro asi que le hube dado otro. 21. Despues que hubo llegado, me escribio una carta muy amistosa. 22. Luego que hubo muerto el general, vendieron los herederos la casa. 23. Ya habia yo leido la carta cuando llego mi hermano. 24. I Habia hablado V. al medico 1 25. Si, yo le habia consultado varias yeces. Exercise 78. 1. When he had said what he had to say, he left (salio de) the house. 2. As soon as the father had read what the letter of his son contained, he handed it to me. 3. Hardly had he said that when his friend entered. 4. What did you do when you had dined ? 5. I went to my friend's, who took me to the theater. 6. When I had written my letters I went out. 7. As soon as I had finished my work I gave it to him. 8. After he had visited the city he returned to the country. 9. We had hardly breakfasted when we heard the news. 10. Had you seen my lawyer? 11. I had seen yours and mine. 12. The children had told me that you had gone out. 13. I wished to go out, but I had no umbrella and it was raining. 14. When they heard that I had received good news they all came to (a) see me. 15. When they had read the newspapers they wrote their letters. 16. After they had seen our house they wished to buy it, but my father would not sell it. 17. The steamers had arrived, but we had not received any letters. 18. The father had died without seeing (ver) his sons. 19. Why had you opened the door ? 20. Be- cause I was too warm with the door closed. 21. Mr. Martin had not arrived this morning when I was at his house. 22. Had you not heard that he was yet in Boston 1 23. I had not heard anything. 24. To whom had you spoken ? 25. I had spoken to the servants. THE PAST ANTERIOR AND THE PLUPERFECT. 217 Gramatica. Grammar. 1, Tlie Past Anterior is formed from the Preterite of the auxiliary haber, to have, and the Past Participle of the verb ; while the Pluperfect of the Indicative is composed of the Imper- fect Indicative of the same auxiliary, and the Past Participle of the verb : Cuando liube reconocido {past a7ite' When I had perceived my error, I rior) mi error, me avergonze de lo was ashamed of what I Jiad done. que habia hecho {pluperfect). 2# The Past Anterior generally expresses that an action took place immediately before another 2mst action or event. This Tense is principally used after one of the conjunctions : despues que, after; luego que, asi que, al momento que, al punto que, as soon as ; apenas, hardly , scarcely, no sooner .\ Despues que — asi que — cuando After — as soon as — wJien he had hubo comido, saUo, diiud, he went out. Se embarco luego que hubo recibido He embarked as soon as he had re- el pasaporte, ceived the passimrt. Ob.semvations. — 1. As seen by the examples given, the verb of the prin- cipal sentence must be in the Preterite when the tense of the subordinate sentence is in the Anterior. 2. The conjunctions and conjunctive locutions above given do not neces- sarily require the verb to be put in the Past Anterior tense ; they may be frequently used with other tenses : Asi que hemos comido, vamos a pa- As soon as we have dined, we go and sear, take a walk. Apenas tuvo el dinero cuando me He had hardly the money when he pago, paid me. 3, The Pluperfect marks an action or event not only as past in itself, but also past with regard to some other past action or event : Habiamos pensado que V. vendria We had thought that you woidd temprano, come early. Observation. — Nearly all the rules given for the Imperfect may be applied to the Pluperfect. 218 LESSON 40. Leccion XL. Lesson XL. THE FUTURE AND FUTURE ANTERIOR. Regular Verbs. 1st Conjugation, Hablar, to speak. Hablar-e, / shall or ivill speak. Hablar-as, thou shall or wilt speak. Hablar-a, he shall or will speak. Hablar-emos, we sJtall or will S2)eak. Hablar-eis, you shall or vnll speak. Hablar-an, they shall or will speak. Amar, to love. Amar-^, / shall or icill love. Amar-as, thou shall or wilt love. Amar-a, he shall or will love. Amar-emos, we shall or loill love. Amar-^is, you shall or will love. Amar-an, they shall or will love. Comer, to eat. Comer-e, I shall or will eat. Comer-as, thou shall or wilt eat. Comer-a, he shall or will eat. Comer-emos, ?<;e shall or ivill eat. Comer-eis, you shall or will eat. Comer-an, they shall or will eat. 2d Conjugation. Beber, to drink. Beber-e, / shall or will drink. Beber- as, thoic shall or wilt drink. Beber-a, he shall or ivill drink. Beber-emos, tve shall or will drink. Beber-eis, you shall or will drink. Beber-an, tliey shall or will drink. Becibir, to receive. Recibir-e, / shall or will receive. Recibir-as, tlio^t shall or wilt receive. Recibir-a, he shall or will receive. ■ Recibir-emos, we shall or will receive. Recibir-eis, you shall or will receive. Recibir-an, they shall or will receive. Zd Conjugation. Partir, to depart. Partir-^, / shall or will depart. Partir-as, thou shall or wilt depart. Partir-a, he shall or will depart. Partir-emos, we shall or will depart. Partir-^is, you shall or will depart. Partir-an, they shall or will depart. Irregular Futures. 1. Hacer, 2. to do, to make. Hare, I shall or will do. Haras, thou shall or unit do. Hard, he shall or will do. Harem OS, we shall or will do. Hareis, you shall or will do. Haran, they shall or will do. 2. Poder, 2. to he able. Podre, / shall or will he able. Podras, thou shall or wilt be able. Podra, he shall or will be able. Podremos, we shall or will be able. Podreis, you shall or will be able. Podran, they shall or will be able. THE FUTURE AND FUTURE ANTERIOR. 219 3. Poner, 2. to p^U. Pondre, / shall or xcill put. Pondras, thou shall or wilt put. Pondra, he shall or will put. Pondremos, wc shall or luill put. Pondveis, you shall or will put. Pondran, they sliall or will put. 6. Saber, 2. to know. Sabre, / shall or will know, Sabras, thou shall or wilt know. Sabra, he shall or will know. Sabremos, wc shall or loill know. Sabreis, you shall or will know. Sabran, they shall or will know. 7. Venir, 3. to come. Vendre, / shall or will come. Vendras, thou sh^lt or wilt come. Vendra, he shall or will come. Vendremos, we sJuill or will come. Vendreis, you shall or will come. Vendran, they shall or will come. 9. Salir, 3. to go out. Saldre, / shall or will go out. Saldras, thou shall or wilt go out. Saldra, he shall or will go out. Saldremos, we shall or will go out. Saldreis, you shall or will go out. Saldran, they shall or will go out, 11. Tener, 2. to have. Tendre, / shall or will have. Tendras, thou shall or wilt have, Tendra, he shall or will have. Tendreinos, we shall or will have. Tendreis, you shall or will have. Tendran, they shall or will have. 4. Qnerer, 2. to wish, to he willing. Qnerriy I shall or will wish. Querras, thou shall or wilt wish, Querra, he shall or will wish, Querremos, we sliall or will wish. Querreis, you shall or loill wish. Qaen'an, they shall or will wish, 6. Valer, 2. to he worth. Valdre, / sJiall or will he worth, Valdras, thou shall or wilt he worth, Yaldra, he shall or will he worth. Valdremos, we shall or will he worth, Valdreis, you shall or will he worth, Yaldran, they Shall or will he worth, 8. Decir, 3. to say, to tell. Dire, / shall or will say. Diras, thou shall or wilt say, Dira, he shall or will say, Diremos, we shall or loill say, Direis, you shall or will say, Diran, they shall or will say, 10. Ir,* 3. to go. Ire, I shall or will go. Iras, thou shall or wilt go. Ira, he shall or will go. Iremos, loe sliall or will go, Ireis, you shaJl or will go. Iran, they shall or will go, 12. Haber, 2. to have. Habre, / shall or will have. Habras, thou slialt or wilt have. Habra, he shall or will have. Habremos, we shall or will have. Habreis, you shall or will have. Habran, they shall or will have. * The verb ir, 3. to go, although one of the most irregular verbs in Span- ish, forms its future regularly. 220 LESSON 40. Vocabularia, Vocabulary. ' El merito, the merit. El negocio, the business. La procesion, the procession, Asi que, so that. Junio, m, June. Necesario, iiecessary. Pronto, soon. Segun, according to. Siempre, always. Acabar, 1. to finish. Asegurar, 1. to assure. Enriquecer, 2. to enrich. Exercise 79. Pasar, 1 . to pass. Pensar, 1. to think. Perdonar, 1. to forgive. Prometer, 2. to promise. Tratar, 1. to treat. Veneer, 2. to conquer. 1. I Cuando vendra V. a veriios ? 2. Iremos iin dia de estos, cuando no estemos tan ocupados. 3. i Como lo sabra V. ? 4. Mi hermana me lo dira. 5, Vere miiy pronto si V. sabra sus lecciones. 6. Le aseguro a Y. que las sabre. 7. El panadero vino esta manana y dijo que no podra volver hoy. 8. [ Cviando tendra V. el dinero. 9. Lo tendre esta tarde. 10. A que bora comeremos hoy ? 11. Come- remos niuy temprano, 12. i Cuando habra V. acabado su trabajo ? 13. Lo habre acabado manana por la manana. 14. i Que bebera V. 1 15. Bebere agxia si V. no tiene vino. 16. Hoy recibiremos todo lo que necesitamos. 17. [Que haran V. V. si no tienen dinero? 18. Haremos lo que siempre hemos hecho. 19. [Vendra su her- mano de V. hoy ? 20. Yendra si tiene tiempo. 21. i Que dira su padre si sabe esto ? 22. Dira que V. ha hecho muy raal en no con- sultarle. 23. i Cuando saldran los muchachos ? 24. No saldran hoy, pues el tiempo esta malisimo. 25. i No ira V. al concierto de la senorita Abel. 26. No podre ir, pues no estare en la ciudad. 27. Dios nos tratara segun nuestros meritos. 28. V. no habra acabado su trabajo manana, porque V. no trabaja bastante ; y yo habre acabado el mio, porque trabajo sin perder (losing) un momento. 29. [ Cree V. que Juan hara lo que le he dicho ? 30. El no querra hacerlo. 31. Mis hermanas ban ido al campo, pero volveran la semana que viene. 32. Espero que mi amigo me perdonara. 33. V. j)odra salir tan pronto como habra acabado lo que tiene que hacer. 34. i Que diran V. V. a estos hombres ? 35. No les hablaremos. Exercise 80. 1. When will you receive letters from your family ? 2. I shall re- ceive one to-morrow. 3. This business will enrich us all. 4. Will you write to me ? 5. I will Avrite to you every week. 6. When will you go out with the children? 7. I will go out this afternoon. THE FUTURE AND FUTURE ANTERIOR. 221 8. They will conquer or die. 9. Will you be able to do it without me ? 10. I don't know if I shall be able to do it. 11. How much money w^ill you give to your brother ? 12. I will give him enough for his journey. 13. Will it be necessary to tell him anything ? 14. It will be better {valdrd mas) not to say anything. 15. If we go to his house, he will treat us well. 16. Do you think that I shall be able to speak Spanish in two years ? 17. You will speak pretty well, if you are will- ing to study. 18. When will the procession pass ? 19. It will pass at three o'clock. 20. I will go and (a) see them as soon as I shall have finished this work. 21. If we go out now, our teacher will see us. 22. When will your cousin go to the country ? 23. He will go in the month of June. 24. When will you send me the book that you promised me ? 25. I will send it to you to-morrow morning. 26. Shall you be at home this afternoon. 27. Yes, sir, I shall be (there). 28. My friend has not received any letter, so that he will not be able to tell you anything. 29. Will it be necessary to go to your house this evening 1 30. It will not be necessary. 31. How much money shall you receive ? 32. I don't know how much I shall receive. 33. Have the boys finished their lessons ? 34. They will soon have done {finished). 35. I know what he has said, but I shall not say a word. Gram^tica. Grammar. 1, The Future of regular verbs is formed by adding to the Present Infinitive the following terminations : -e -as -a -emos -els -an The termination of the Future is the same for all verbs, whether regular or irregular, the radical part alone being changed for the latter. 2. The verb satisfacer, 2. to satisfy, is conjugated like hacer, 2. to do, to make; the f being, however, preserved through the conjugation : satisfago, / satisfy, satisfare, / shall or will satisfy, etc. 3« Caber, 2. to contain, to he contained, has the same irregu- larity as poder, 2. to he able, and makes cabre, etc., in the Future. 222 LESSON 40. 4« All the other verbs which form their Future irregularly, have been given above. Their derivatives are conjugated in the same way. Thus : componer, 2. to mend, deponer, 2. to lay down, dis- pone!, 2. to dispose, oponer, 2. to oppose, etc., are conjugated in the Future like poner, 2. to put. Contener, 2. to contain, detener, 2. to detain, obtener, 2. to obtain, etc., are conjugated like tener, 2. to have, Equivaler, 2. to he equivalent, is conjugated like valer, 2. to he ivorth. Observation. — Valer mas, lit. : to he worth more, is rendered in Eng- lish by to be better. Avenir, 3. to happen, convenir, 3. to agree, intervenir, 3. to interfere, etc., form their Future like venir, 3. to come. Predecir, 3. to foretell, contradecir, 3. to contradict, desdecir, 3. to deity, form their Future like decir, 3. to say, to tell. Bendecir, 3. to bless, and maldecir, 3. to curse, of which the Past Participle is bendecido (or bendito), and also maldito, form, however, their Future regularly : Bendecire, / shall or will bless. Bendeciremos, we shall or ivill bless. . Bendeciras, thou shalt or wilt bless. Bendecireis, you shall or loill bless. Bendecira, he shall or will bless. Bendeciran, they shall or will bless. 5f The Future is often used in Spanish instead of the Im- perative : Iras a la plaza y comprards un polio, Go to the w,arJcet and buy a. chicken. 6f The Future Anterior is formed from the Past Participle of the verb conjugated with the Future of the auxiliary haber, to have : Habre acabado esta noche, / shall have finished to-night. IMPERATIVE MOOD. 223 Leccion XLI. Lesson XLI. IMPERATIVE MOOD. 1st Conjugution, Hablar, 1. to speak. Comprar, 1. to buy, Cantar, 1. to sing, Yo habl-o, / speak ; \ ^^^^'^ ^- (^^'^^•) ^^ ^^^^'^-^T^ V. V. {pi), speak (you). \ Habl-emos, let us speak. Yo compr-o, I buy; \ ^^^^Pi'-e V. (sing.) or compr-en V. V. {pl.\ buy {you). ( Compr-emos, let us buy. Yo cant-o, Isiiig; j ^^"*-® ^'-(^^^^^O or cant-en V. V. (pi), sing (you), ( Cant-emos, lei u^ sing. '2d and 3d Conjugations, Comer, 2. to eat. Beber, 2. ^o (^rm^. Vender, 2. jfo 5eZ?. Decir, 3. to say, to tell. Venir, 3. to coirn. Salir, 3. to go out. Yo com-o, I eat; \ ^'^"^-a V. (sing.) or com-an V. V. (pl.\ eat (you), i Com-amos, let us eat. Yo beb-o, I drink ; \ ^^^-^ ^^ (sing.) or beb-an V. Y. (pi.), drink (you). \ Beb-amos, let us drink, Yo vend-o, I sell ; j "^end-a Y. (sm^r.) orvend-an Y. Y. (pi), sell (you). ( Yend-amos, let us sell r Dig-a Y. (sing.), say or tell (you). Yodig.o,Isa7/,Itell;] Dig-an Y. Y. (pi), say or tell (ycm). ^Dig-amos, let us say or tell Yo veng-o, I come ; j ^eng-a Y. (sing.) or veng-an Y. Y. (^^.), cowe (i/o^a). ( Yeng-amos, let us come. Yo salg-o, I go out; \ ^^^^'^ ^' (sing.) or salg-an Y. Y. (2^1), go (you) out ) Salg-amos, let us go out. EuLE. — The of the 1st Person of the Present Indicative is changed into e and en for the 1st Conjugation, and into a and aa for the 2d and 3d Conjugations. 224 Ser, 2. to he; Estar, 1. to he; Dar, 1. to give; LESSON 41. Exceptions. (sing.) or s ' Seamos, let us he. I Sea V. (sing.) or scan V. V. (pL), he (you). SSe Este V. (sing.) or esteu V. Y. (pL), he (you). Estemos, let us he. !De V. (sing.) c Demos, let us give. or den Y. Y. (pi.), give (you), give. Saber, 2. to know; \ ^P^ ^' ^^"^'^ ^'' ^^P^^ ^' ^' ^^^'^' ^^^ (2/^^). ( Sepamos, let its know. Ir, 3. to go ; Yaya Y. (sing.) or vayaii Y. Y. (pL), go (you), Yayamos, let us go. Imperative with Pronouns* Traigame Y. esto, No se lo de Y., Yendanos Y. su caballo, Prestemelo Y., Biisquelos Y., Ko lo corte Y., Yeiigan Y. Y. esta noche, No salgan Y. Y. ahora, D^amelo Y., No se lo diga Y. a nadie, Salgamos im rato, Yen aqui, Juanito, Yuelva Y. esta noche, No hablen Y. Y. tanto, Trahajemos, No hagas eso. Conform ate con tu suerte, Ponga Y. el libro sobre la mesa, Digale Y. a Juan que su padre ha llegado, Hahlad a este hombre. Bring me this. Do not give it to him. Sell us your horse. Lend it to me. Look for them. Do not cut it. Come this evening. Do not go out now. Tell it to me. Do not tell it to anyhody. Let us go out for a moment. Co'iue here, Johnny. Return this evening. Do not speak so much. Let us work. Do not do that. Be satisfied with your lot. Put the hook on the table. Tell John that his father has ar- rived. Speak to tliat man. IMPERATIVE MOOD. 225 Vocabulario. El asunto, the matter. El boticario, the drug- gist. El coclie, the coach. El correo, the post, the mail. El estado, the condition. El favor, the favor. El ruido, the noise. El temor, the fear. La cancion, the song. La patria, the country. La verdad, the truth. La virtud, the virtue. Alto, loud. Enfadado, angry. Ligero, quick. Pronto, quickly. Quieto, quiet. Turbulento, boisterous. Amar, 1. to love. Abrir, 3. to ojjen. Cantar, 1. to sing. Correr, 2. to run. Vocabulary. Emplear, 1. to employ. Encender, 2. to light Llevar, 1. to take. Obedecer, 2. to obey. Oir, 3. to liear. Olvidar, 1. to forget. Pagar, 1. to pay. Practical, 1. to practise. Prestar, 1. to lend. Salir, 3. to leave. Saltar, 1. to jump. Tomai) 1. to take. Exercise 81. 1. No tenga V. niiedo, el perro no inuerde. 2. Emplee V. bien el tiempo. 3. Amemos nuestra patria. 4. Sepa V. sus lecciones inana- iia. 5. No digas todo lo que haces, pero hagas todo lo que dices. 6. Este V. quieto. 7. Mandeme V. mis libros por el muchacho. 8. Seamos aniigos. 9. Denie V. esto, lo necesito. 10. Pregunte V. si el Seiior Martinez esta en casa. 11. Yaya V. a casa del Seiior Gutier- rez y digale que le quiero ver. 12. Saiga V. de aqui y no vuelva mas. 13. Yenga V. pronto, yo le necesito a Y. 14. Digame Y. quien ha heclio esto. 15. Hagame Y. el favor de {to) decirme donde vive el medico. 16. Hay uno que vive en esta casa. 17. Sepa Y. que soy el mejor amigo que Y. tiene. 18. Tome Y. este dinero y deselo a este pobre. 19. Hable Y. sin temor, y diga la verdad. 20. Muchachos, no jueguen en la calle. 21. Corra Y. pronto y traigame mi paraguas. 22. Hable Y. a ese horabre, y preguntele lo que quiere. 23. Hablele Y. mismo, yo no hablo frances. 24. Tome Y. un coche, si Y. no quiere ir a pie. 25. No hagas eso, amiguito. 26. Deme Y. la mano ; muy bien, ahora salte Y. 27. No me hable Y., estoy enfadado con Y. 28. Digamos siempre la verdad. 29. Piense Y. en {of) mi. 30. Es- cribame Y. de Paris. 31. Creame, amigo, la cosa no es asi. 32. Sal- gamos, ya es tarde. 33. Denos Y. puestro dinero, lo necesitamos. 34. Lleve Y. esa carta al correo ; ya es tiempo. 35. Yamonos tem- prano. 36. No venga Y. tan tarde manana, pues tengo que salir. 15 226 LESSON 41. Exercise 82. 1. Take this key, open my room, and bring me my stick. 2. Let us write our letters, the mail leaves to-night. 3. Come early to-mor- row morning, we have a great deal to do. 4. Do not go out without me. 5. Write to us every week from Paris. 6. Give something to that poor man ; he is hungry. 7. Be my friend. 8. Go out, I don't need you here. 9. Don't speak to that man, he is not your friend. 10. Take this letter to your father, and tell him that I wish to see him. 11. Speak louder, I cannot hear you. 12. Do me the favor to {de) give me a piece of bread. 13. Call that gentleman, he has forgot- ten something. 14. Give me something to {que) drink, I am very thirsty. 15. Ask that woman if Mr. Zamora is at home. 16. Do not run so fast, it is not late. 17. Do not believe what that man says, he never tells the truth. 18. Light the gas ; we don't see anything here. 19. Shut the door; we do not wish to be seen. 20. Don't buy that house, it is in very poor {mal) condition. 21. Take this and give it to your sister. 22. Do not make so much noise, your little brother is sleeping. 23. Tell me all that you know about {de) this matter. 24. Write to this merchant and tell him that we need blue cloth. 25. Go to the druggist's, but return quickly. 26. If you do not need your book, lend it to me. 27. I will tell you something, but do not tell it to anybody. 28. Obey your masters. 29. Let us love and practise virtue. 30. Let us see who is at the door. 31. Here is a dollar, take it and pay that ijian. 32. Do not be so boisterous, your mother is not well. 33. Come here, I have something to tell you. 34. Do not give her that, she is too small yet. 35. Let us sing a Spanish song. Gram^tica. Grammar. 1, Those verbs which insert an i in the conjugation of certain tenses, as encender, 2. to light; comenzar, 1. to commence; etc. (L. 33, E. 2), and those which change o into ue, as almorzar, 1. to breakfast; morder, 2. tohite; etc. (L. 33, E. 2) do not change their radical in the first person plural of the Imperative : Enciendo, / light ; encendaraos, let us light. Comienzo, / comnunce ; comeiizemos, let us commence. Muerdo, / hite ; mordamos, let us bite. Almuerzo, / breakfast ; almorzemos, let us breakfast. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 227 Note. — Pedir, 3. to ask, sentir, 3. to feel, and a few others, make pidamos, let us ask, sintamos, let us feel, etc. Dormir, 3. to sleep, and morir, 3. to die, make durmamos, let us sleep, and muramos, let us die, 2. Verbs ending in car change the c into qu before an e. Those ending in gar insert a u after the g and before an e : Busquelo V., look for it. Juegue V., play. For other changes required by the rules of Pronunciation see Lesson 38. 3. The pronouns usted (Y.), and ustedes (V. Y.) must ac- company the Imperative in the second person plural : Venga V., come ; Vengan V.V., come. a. These pronouns may be left out if there exists a certain familiamty between the speaker and the person addressed, and we can say : Venga aqui, come here ; Vengan aqui, corae here. Politeness does not admit of this omission, however. h. If two or more Imperatives occur in the same sentence, it is sufficient that the pronoun should accompany the first Imper- ative : Vaya V. a mi cuarto, y traigame mi Go to my room arid brincf me my libro, hook. 4t For rules referring to the place of the pronouns accom- panying the Imperative see L. 22, 30, 31. The student will have to bear in mind, however, that the pronouns listed and ustedes are always placed last in the Imperative. 5t Besides the three persons of the Imperative given above, there is also a second person singular which is used as the pro- noun tli when speaking to friends, relations, children, etc. The verb estar, 1. makes in the 2d person singular este, he (thou), ser, 2. makes se, he (thou). a. Hablar, 1. to speak^ cortar, 1. to cut, amar, 1. to love, make in the imperative hahla, carta, ama. Vender, 2. to sell, comer, 228 LESSON 42. 2. to eat, beber, 2. to drink, make veiide, come, hehe. Recibir, 3. to receive, dividir, 3. to divide, abrir, 3. to open, make recihe, di- vide, ahre, b. Some verbs in the same person, end with an e instead of an a, as : oye, hear (thou), conduce, conduct or take {thou), pide, ask (thou), etc. Other verbs drop the last letter or the last syl- lable of the second person plural : ten, have (thou), pen, put (thou), ven, co7ne (thou), di, sai/ (thou), sal, c/o out (thou), etc. c. The Imperative negative of the second person singular is expressed by means of the subjunctive : No hables, do not speak. No saigas, do not go out. No veiigas, do not come. 6« Besides the terminations given, there are also two others ending for the 2d person plural of the Imperative, namely : d, preceded by a, e, and i, and is, preceded by a or e ; Sed, ) No seais, , he . -vr 4. ' i he not, I be 1 Estad, ) ' No esteisj Corned, eat. No coniais, do not eat. Venid, come. No vengais, do not come. These forms of the Imperative are used with vosotros (see the use of this pronoun L. 4, R. 3) ; the second form being used in the negative. 7» The second person singular is generally used in proverbs, maxims, etc. : Ama a tu projimo coino a ti mismo, Love thy nxiighbor as thyself. Leccion XLII. Lesson XLII. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. It The First Person Singular or Plural of the Present of the Subjunctive is formed in the same way as the Imperative (see SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 229 Lesson 41, p. 223), while the other Persons may easily be con- jugated with their proper terminations, as is shown below. The same exceptions exist in this tense as in the Imperative. Que yo habl-e, Que tu habl-es, Que el habl-e, Que uosolros habl-emos. Que vosotros habl-eis. Que ellos habl-en. 1st Conjugation. Hablar, to speak. that I may speaJc. that thou maycst speak. that he may speak. that we may speak. that you may speak. iJiai they may speak. Que yo vend-a, Que tu vend-as, Que el vend-a, Que nosotros vend-amos, Que vosotros vend-ais. Que ellos vend-an. 2d Conjugation. Vender, to sell. tJiat I may sell. that thou may est sell. that lie may sell. tliat we may sell. that you may sell. that they may sell. Que yo recib-a, Que tu recib-as, Que el recib-a. Que nosotros recib-amos. Que vosotros recib-ais. Que ellos recib-an. Zd Conjugation. Recibir, .^0 receive. that I may receive. that thou mayest receive, that he may receive, that we may receive, that you may receive, thai they may receive. Exceptions. Ser, 2. to he. Que yo sea, that I may he. etc. etc. Estar, 1. to he. Que yo este, that I may he, etc. etc. 230 LESSON 42. Haber, 2. (auxiliary) to have. Que yo haya, that I may have, etc. etc. Dar, 1. to give. Que yo de, that I may give, etc. etc. Saber, 2. to knoiv. Que yo sepa, that I may know, etc. etc. Ir, 3. to go. Que yo vaya, that I may go. etc. etc. Vocabulario. El carbon, the coal. El ejercito, the army. El empleo, the employment. El invierno, the ivinter. El memento, the moment. La lengna, the language. La lena, the loood. A menos que, unless. Aunque, although. Con tal que, pi^ovided. Contrario, contrary. Desgraciado, unfortunate. Vocabulary. Hasta que, until. Listo, ready. Menester, necessary. Natural, natural. For mas... que, liowever. Satisfecho, satisfied. Sorprendido, surprised. Tonto, foolish. Buscar, 1. to look for. Convenir, 3. to be proper. Convidar, 1. to invite. Desear, 1. to desire. Esperar, 1. to wait. Marchar, 1. to march. Preferir, 3. to prefer. Preparar, 1. to p^'epare. Pretender, 2. to pretend. Querer, 2. to grant. Sentir, 3. to regret, r c Suplicar, 1. to entreat, Temer, 2. to fear. Ver, 2. to see. Exercise 83. 1. [Que qiiiere V. que yo haga? 2. Quiero que V. escriba a su amigo y que le diga de venir. 3. Me alegro (/ am glad) que V. este satisfecho de mi trabajo. 4. Estoy sorprendido de que V. no sepa nada de eso. 5. Es necesario que salgamos temprano, pues debemos llegar a la ciudad antes de la noche. 6. Siento que V. no tenga el dinero que V. me prometio. 7. Es posible que las cartas lleguen hoy. 8. Es de desear que acabemos hoy. 9. Es mejor que V. no le diga . nada. 10. No coiiviene que V. hable tanto. 11. Deseo que V. vaya en seguida a su casa. 12. Dios quiera que no Ueguemos demasiado SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 231 tarcle. 13. i Cree V. que el pueda venir la semana que viene ? 14. No creo que lo pueda. 15. Es tiempo que acabe el iiivierno, pues ya no tenemos carbon ni leiia. 16. Si es verdad (true) que su padre llegue maiiana, sera menester prepararle un cuarto. 17. Denie V. una leccion que sea mas facil. 18. i Cuando quiere V. que yo le devuelva el dinero ? 19. Devuelvamelo tan pronto como V. pueda. 20. He suplicado a mi amigo que venga a mi casa, pero el prefiere ir a la fonda. 21. Este hombre pretende que le den un empleo. 22. Que venga si quiere. 23. Queremos que V. V. trabajen mas. 24. El maestro desea que aprendamos la lengua inglesa. 25. Tememos que este hombre sea nuestro enemigo. 26. No apruebo que V. saiga todas las noches. 27. Puede ser que el vaya a Paris. 28. Quiero que V. me diga lo que sea la verdad. 29. Quiero un maestro que no sea demasiado joven. 30. Nuestro padre no quiere que durmamos tan tarde. 31. No encuentro ninguno que pueda prestarme el dinero que necesito. 32. Don Juan Morales es el raejor hombre que conozca. 33. Este es el mejor vino que haya bebido. 34. El me dara dinero hasta que yo haya encontrado un buen empleo. 35. Lo hare aunque no sepa muy bien hacerlo. Exercise 84. 1. Captain Henry is the bravest officer I know in the army. 2. It is the best bread we have had this year. 3. Here is, I think, the last book he has written. 4. 1 am surprised that your brother should come at (en) this moment. 5. He wishes me to return to-morrow, but I don't think that I shall be able to do it. 6. It is unfortunate that you should have lost all your money. 7. It is better for you to arrive in the morning. 8. Is it true that he has said that ? 9. I don't think he has said it. 10. At what time do you think he will be here ? 11. I don't think he can be here before eleven. 12. It is im- possible for me to go out so early. 13. Although he is poor he has more friends than you. 14. Do you think that I am foolish enough to believe that ? 15. Is it possible that you should have spent so much money ? 16. My father wishes me to go to the country with him. 17. We wish you to study your lessons. 18. The general wishes that every soldier be ready to march. 19. God grant that he may live long (mubchos anos) ! 20. I wish him to come and to bring the money. 21. It is very natural that he should think that I am his friend. 22. It is well (hueno) that he should know it. 23. I am looking for a 232 LESSON 42. man who may be willing to lend me some money. 24. See that ever^^thing is ready. 25. I do not believe it, although he may say the (lo) contrary. 26. Wait till he comes. 27. I shall go out unless it rains. 28. We will wait for you, provided you do not come too late. 29. However rich he may be, he is unhappy. 30. Unless he invites me, I shall not go to his house. 31. I will buy that house when I have money enough. 32. He says he will come provided they send him a carriage. 33. I do not wish you to speak so. Gram^tica. Grammar. 1. The Spanish Subjunctive Mood is used when the verb of the principal proposition expresses command, consent, desire, will, wish, doubt, fear or apprehension, approbation, duty, ignorance, suspicion, convenience, entreaty, surprise, admiration, joy, wonder, necessity, possibility, denial, advice, proiiibition, permission, warn- ing, and, in general, the emotions of the mind ; the two propo- sitions being connected by the conjunction que, that. The Subjunctive Mood, being always subordinate to the verb that precedes it, its tenses are regulated by this verb. The Present Subjunctive is generally used when the preced- ing verb is in the Present or Future Indicative, and in the Im- perative. Le ruego cjue venga, / heg him to come. Le rogare que venga, / will heg him to come. Ruegale V. que venga, heg him. to come. Quiero que V. V. trahajen, / wish that yozi should work. Es posible que yo vaya, / may possibly go. 2t The first proposition may be understood or may be placed after the Subjunctive : Que venga si quiere, or Si quiere que venga, j Dios lo quiera ! May God grant it ! c- • i Let him coTue if he wishes. Si quiere que venga, ) Observation. — In this last example the principal proposition is under- stood, the sentence being an abbreviation of : j Deseo que Dios lo quiera ! / desire that God may grant it I SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 233 3« Spaniards never say do you wish or require me, him, her, us, them, etc., to do so and so, etc. Another expression with the Subjunctive Mood is used in such cases, and instead of I wish you to come, the Spaniards say : Deseo t^ue V. venga, / wish that you should come. 4. The conjunction que, that, which connects the two propo- sitions, can never be understood, as is often the case in English, but must be expressed and even repeated before every subordi- nate verb : No creo que venga, / do not think he will come. Quiero que -venga y que traiga el / wish him to come and to bring tlu dinero, money. Observation. — It does not follow when the two propositions of a sen- tence are joined by the conjunction que, that, that the verb of the second proposition must be put in the Subjunctive Mood. It requires for this, that the verb of the first proposition should express as said in Rule I, an idea of command, consent, etc. Thus we should say, using the In- dicative : Yo se que el es rico, / know that he is rich. Creo que tic7ie razon, / believe that he is right. 5i The subjunctive is generally used after verbs used inter- rogatively or negatively, when doubt is expressed. Thus if we say, using the Indicative : Pienso que saldrd hoy, / think he will leave to-day ; we should say, using the Subjunctive : i Piensa V. que el saiga hoy ? Do you, think lie ivill leave to-day ? This rule is, however, far from being absolute, for we can say Avith equal propriety : Creo -^ que el saiga niaiiana / believe ~\ Espero \ or I hope V that he will leave to-morrow. Pienso ) que el saldrd ma nan a / think J a. The second verb may in some cases be placed in the Pre- terite perfecto, Preterite perfect, of the Subjunctive, or in the Future perfecto, Future perfect, of the Indicative : Presumo que le havan encontrado, or ) Presume que le habran encontrado, j ^ P''^^'"'^ ""^ t'^'V *«« ^nct hi,n. 234 LESSON 42. 6. There are certain verbs in Spanish, as pretender, 2. to pre- tend, which require the Present Indicative or the Subjunctive, according to their meaning : Mi hermano pre ten de que le den un empleo, Este horabre pretende que le ha da- do a V. el dinero. My brother pretends {is of opinion) that they should give him a situ- ation. This man pretends {insists) that he has given you the money. 7. The Subjunctive is also used in Spanish after an Imper- sonal verb expressing an idea of volition, douht, necessity, contin- gency, uncertainty, etc. (See Eule I.), as : Es propio (conveniente or a proposito), It is proper. Es de desear, It is desirable. Conviene, It becomes. Es bueno, It is proper or luelL Es malo, It is wrong. Es necesario, i Es menester, } ^^ ^' necessary. Es lastima, It is a pity. Es sorprendente, It is surprising. Es facil, Es imposible, Es tiempo, Es sufieiente. Es natural, etc. Basta, It is easy or possible. It is impossible. It is time. It is sufficient. It is natural, etc. 8t The Subjunctive is also used when the verb of the second proposition expresses some contingent ov fuiure effect : Lo comprare cuando tenga dinero, I will buy it when I have money. Le hablare asi que le vea, I will speak to him when I see him. Lo hare antes que el venga, / will do it before he comes. 9t A Relative Pronoun either used alone or preceded by a noun, and any of the words solo, alo7ie, ninguno, no, none, no one, pocos, few, cualquiera, whatever, quienquiera, whoever, na- die, nobody, no one, linico, only thing, primero, first, ultimo, last, mas, more, mejor, best, requires the Subjunctive when there is an idea of uncertainty : SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 235 Busco a un hombre que quiera pres- tarme dinero, Esto es, creo, lo linico que le per- tenezca, Hay pocos que lo sepan, Quienquiem que lo vea, pensara como yo, Cualquiera que sea su fortuna, el niorira pobre, I am looking for a man willing to lend me money. This is, I think, the only thing he- longing to him. There are few who know it. Whoe«^er sees it will think as I do. Whatever he his fortune, he will die poor. 10 1 A few Conjunctive expressions require the Subjunctive Mood when they express a doubt or uncertainty. Such are : A fin que, in order tlmt. A menos que, unless. Antes que, before. Aunque, although. Ann cuando, although. Bien que, though. En case que, in case that. Con tal que, pwided that. Hasta que, iintil. Lejos de ({UBi far from. Por poco que, however little. Por mucho que, | ^^^^^ Por mas que, ) Para que, m order that. Siempre que, vjhenever. Supuesto (iMm^sumosing that. \ Ojala ! would to God ! 11, For those verbs which change c into qu, and for those which insert a H after the g and before an e^ and for other obser- vations which refer to the Subjunctive, as well as to the Impera- tive, see grammatical part of Lesson XLI. 12. The Perfect of the Subjunctive is formed from the Pres- ent of the Subjunctive of the auxiliary haber, 2. to have, and the Past Participle of the verb : Que yo haya hablado, That I may have spoken. Que hayamos salido, That we may have gone out. Observation. — All the general rules given on the use of the Present Subjunctive apply to the Perfect of the Subjunctive. 236 LESSON 43. Leccion XLIII. Lesson XLIII. IMPERFECT AND PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. Regular Verbs. 1st Conjugation. Que yo habl-ara or habl-ase, Que tu habl-aras or liabl-ases, Que el habl-ara or habl-ase, Que uosotros habl-aramos or habl- asemos, Que vosotros habl-arais or habl- aseis, that I might or should speak, that thou mightest or shouldst speaTc. that he might or should speak, that loe might or should speak. that you might or should speak. Que ellos habl-aran or habl-asen, that they might or should speak. 2d Conjugation. ^ Vender, to sell. Que yo vend-iera or veud-iese, Que tu vend-ieras or vend-ieses, Que el vend-iera or vend-iese, Que nosotros vend-ieramos or vend- iesemos, Que vosotros vend-ierais or vend- ieseis, Que ellos vend-ieran or vend-iesen. that I might or should sell, that thou mightest or shouldst sell, that he anight or should sell, that tve might or should sell. that you might or should sell. that they might or should sell. 3^ Co7ijugation. Kecibir, to receive. Que yo recib-iera or reeib-iese, Que tu reeib-ieras or recib-ieses, Que el reeib-iera or reeib-iese. Que nosotros recib-i^ramos or recib- i^semos, Que vosotros recib-ierais or recib- ieseis. Que ellos recib-ieran or recib-iesen, that I might or should receive, that thou m/tghtest or shouldst receive, that he m.ight or should receive, that we might or should receive. that you might or should receive. that they might or should receive. IMPERFECT AND PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. 237 Irregular Verbs. Tener, 2. to have. Que yo tuviera or tiiviese, Que tu tuvieras or tuvieses, Que el tuviera or tuviese, Que uosotros tuvieramos or tuvie- semos, Que vosotros tuvierais or tuvieseis, Que ellos tuvieran or tuviesen, that I might or should have, that tho2c raightcst or shouldst have, that he inight or should have, that we might or should have. that you might or should have, that they might or should have. Haber, 2. (auxiliary) to have. Que yo hubiera or hubiese, Que tu hubieras or hubieses, Que el hubiera or hubiese, Que uosotros hubieramos or hubie- semos, Que vosotros hubierais or hubieseis, Que ellos hubieran or hubiesen, that I might or should have, that thou mightest or shouldst have, that he might or should have, that we might or should have. that you might or slwuld have, that they might or should have. Estar, 1. to he. Que yo estuviera or estuviese, Que tu estuvieras or estuvieses, Que el estuviera or estuviese, Que uosotros estuvieramos or estu- viesemos, Q ue vosotros estu vierais or estuvieseis, Que ellos estuvieran or estuviesen, tliat I might or should he. that thou mightest or shoiddst he. that he might or should he. tliat we might or should he. that you might or should he. that tliey might or should he. Ser, 2. to he, Que yo fuera or fuese. Que tu fueras or fueses, Que el fuera or fuese, Que uosotros fueramos or fuesemos, Que vosotros fuerais or fueseis. Que ellos fueran or fuesen, that I might or should he. that thou mightest or shouldst he. that he 'might or should he. that we might or should he. that you might or should he. that they might or should he. Que yo diera or diese, etc. Dar, 1. to give. that I might or should ( etc. 238 LESSON 43. Andar, 1. to walk. Que yo anduviera or anduviese, that I might or should walk, etc. etc. Hacer, 2. to make, to do. Que yo hiciera or hiciese, that I might or should do. etc. etc. Caer, 2. to fall. Que yo cay era or cayese, that I might or should fall. etc. etc. Poder, 'I. to he able. Que yo pudiera or pudiese, that I might or should he ahle. etc. etc. Poner, 2. ^o;m^. Que yo pusiera or pusiese, that I might or should put. etc. etc. Querer, 2. ^o he willing. Que yo quisiera or quisiese, that I might or should he willing. etc. etc. Saber, 2. ^o A:?io2^. Que yo supiera or supiese, that I might or should hiow. etc. etc. Traer, 2. to hring. Que yo trajera or trajese, that I might or should hring. etc. e^c. Valer, 2. ^o 5e worth. Que yo valiera or valiese, that I might or should he worth. etc. e^c. Conducir, 3. to conduct, to take. Que yo condujera or condujese, that I might or should conduct. etc. etc. Pedir, 3. to ask for. Que 3^0 pidiera or pidiese, that I might or should ask for. etc. e^c. IMPERFECT AND PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. 239 Venir, 3. to come. Que yo viniera or viniese, that I might or should come, etc. etc. Decir, 3. to say, to tell. Que yo dijera or dijese, that I might or should say, etc. etc. Salir, 3. to go out. Que yo saliera or saliese, that I might or should go out. etc. etc. Que yo fuera or fuese, etc. Ir, 3. to go. that I might or should go. etc. Vocabulario. El articulo, the article. El asunto, the business. El espejo, the mirror. El gas to, the expense. El idioma, the language. El lugar, the spot. El medio, the means, the way. Aprobar, 1. to approve. Arreglar, 1. to arrange. Convidar, 1. to invite. Dedicar, 1. to devote. Devolver, 2. to give hack. Dudar, 1. to doubt. Vocabulary. Encontrar, 1. to meet. Enganar, 1. to deceive. Fabricar, 1. to manufacture. Llorar, 1. to weep, to cry. Permitir, 3. to alloio. Recomendar, 1. to recommend. Suplicar, 1. to entreat. Suponer, 2. to suppose. A credito, on credit. En seguida, immediately. En tiempo pasado, formerly. Per precision, by necessity. Teoretico, theoretical. Exercise 85. 1. Mi maestro queria que yo aprendiese una leccion mavS larga. 2. I Que queria V. que el hiciera sin dinero ? 3. Que cornprase las mercancias a credito. 4. Estos dos caballeros querian que yo les vendiese mi caballo. 5. Yo no creia que fuese tan tarde. 6. [ Temia Y. que el saliese sin nosotros 1 7. Lo linico que yo temia era que el no nos esperase. 8. Era el linico almacen donde pudieramos hallar este articulo. 9. El queria que yo le dijera lo que yo debia, antes que me diera el dinero. 10. i Dudaba Y. que el viniera como lo 240 ' LESSON 43. habia prometido ? 11. ^ Aprobaba V. que el me hablase asi ? 12. Era menester que gastasemos muchisimo dinero para arreglar nuestra casa. 13. Yo no creia que V. engaiiase d sus amigos. 14. Era el unico medio que nos quedase, pues nuestros asuntos no permitian que bicieramos nuevos gastos. 15. Cuando sali para Francia, mi padre me recomendo que viviese con personas que no bablasen otro idioma mas que el frances, y con quienes tuviese que bablarlo por precision, bien 6 mal. 16. Tambien que leyese algunos buenos autores, y hecbo todo esto por algun tiempo, me dedicase entonces al estudio teoretico. 17. \ Quien bubiera pensado que nos encontrariamos en un lugar como este, despues de tanto tiempo que no nos benios visto ! 18. Yo le habia escrito a fin de que viniera. 19. He comido mucho, y mas de lo que bubiera debido. 20. Yo iba todas las maiianas a su casa para que me diera una leccion de espaiiol. 21. Cantaban aunque tuviesen gana de llorar. 22. El deseaba que yo fuese en seguida a su casa. 23. Yo le habia suplicado que viniese temprano, pero llego el ultimo de todos. 24. Aquel hombre pretend ia que le pagasen mucho mas de lo que habia ganado. 25. El estaba muy sorprendido de que no supiesemos nada de esto. Exercise 86. 1. What did you wish me to do? 2. I wished that you should write to your friend, and that you should tell him to return. 3. I was surprised that he had not sent me the money. 4. It was to be desired that they should finish in time. 5. When did he wish us to return the money ? 6. He wished that you should return it as soon as possible. 7. I did not think that he was so ill. 8. Our teacher wished that we would come earlier to school. 9. We were afraid that it would rain the whole day. 10. He was looking for a man who would lend him money. 11. I went to his house, although I was very tired. 12. Our father did not wish that we should go out so late. 13. He was the best friend I had in the city. 14. It was the best wine that I had ever drank. 15. It was very unfortunate that he had lost all his money. 16. Although he was poor, he had many friends. 17. It was very natural that he should speak so. 18. He could not spend so much money, however rich he might be. 19. I would not go to his house unless he invited me. 20. He said he would come (vendria) provided you would send him a carriage. IMPERFECT AND PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. 241 21. The Venetians were formerly the only people who manufactured and sold mirrors. 22. I was afraid he would come without his brother. 23. I did not think that you were so foolish. 24. It was necessary for us to go every evening to his house. 25. We did not think that it was so late. 26. Mr. Martin did not wish me to go out without him. 27. He was the only one who spoke Spanish. 28. We did not suppose he would arrive in time. 29. My mother wished us to sing for her. Gr^matica. Grammar. 1 , The Imperfect of the Subjunctive has three forms : The first ending in : -ra -ras -ra -ramos -rais -ran the second in : -ria -rias -ria -riamos -rials -rian and the third in : -se -ses -se -semos -sets -sen The 1st and 3d forms, vrhich are treated in this lesson, are formed from the 3d person plural of the Past Definite, by chang- ing the termination ion into the terminations given above. Examples. Tuvie-ron, they had; S t^^ie-ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran. ; \ tuvie-se, -ses, -se, -semos, -seis, -sen. Hubie-ron, they had; \ ^^^^^'^^^ -^^s, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran. ( hubie-se, -ses, -se, -semos, -seis, -sen. Estuvie-ron, they were ; \ ^^tuvie-ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran. \ estuvie-se, -ses, -se, -semos, -seis, -sen. Fue-ron, they ivere ; Habla-ron, they spoke ; S * Comie-ron, tUy ate; \ ^^^^i^-^a, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran. \ comie-se, -ses, -se, -semos, -seis, -sen. 16 fue-ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran. fue-se, -ses, -se, -semos, -seis, -sen. habla-ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran. habla-se, -ses, -se, -semos, -seis, -sen. 242 LESSON 43. Eecibie-ron, they received ; I ™«bie-ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran. I recibie-se, -ses, -se, -semos, -seis, -sen. Pudie-ron, Ihey were able ; \ P"die-ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran. ( pudie-se, -ses, -se, -semos, seis, -sen. Supie-ron, tlicy knew; I su^^-^a, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran. I supie-se, -ses, -se, -semos, -seis, -sen. Dije-ron, tluy said; \ ^^J^"^*' '^^^' -^^' "^^^o^' -^^is. -ran. ( dije-se, -ses, -se, -semos, -seis, -sen. Yinie-ron, they came ; 1 ^'"^'^-"'' -'"' ■'^»' "'"""o"' -«»"- -'»"• I viuie-se, -ses, -se, -semos, -seis, -sen. . etc. etc. Note. — The second form of the Subjunctive will be treated in the fol- lowing lesson. 2. The Imperfect Subjunctive is used when the verb of the 1st proposition which requires a Subjunctive after it, is in one of the Past tenses of the Indicative : Yo queria >. I wished ■>, Yo desee I que el viniera / desired I that he would Yo he solicitado \ 6 viniese. I have entreated [ come. Yo habia solicitado -^ I had entreated ^ Obsekvation. — All the general mles given on the use of the Present Subjunctive, apply to the Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive. 3« The Present Subjunctive may, however, be used after the Past Definite, when the time of the action is not definitely stated : Le he suplicado que venga a mi / have entreated him to come to my casa. house. 4. The Present or the Imperfect Subjunctive maybe used when the verb of the 1st proposition is in the Futuro perfecto : iX habra pretendido que le dejen He will have pretended that they (dejaran 6 dejasen) libre. should let him free. 5t The Imperfect Subjunctive is used instead of the Present when followed by a conditional clause : i Cree V. que me lo diesen, si les Do you think they would give it to pidiera ? me^ if I should ask them. SUBJUNCTIVE (continued). 243 6* The Pluperfect Subjunctive is formed from the Imperfect Subjunctive of the auxiliary haber, to have ; and the Past Parti- ciple of the verb : Que yo hubiera or hiibiese hablado ; that I might have spoken. Que el hubiera or hubiese salido ; that I might have gone out. Leccion XLIY. Lesson XLIY. SUBJUNCTIVE (CONTINUED). Conditional and Potential Mood* 2d Terinination of the Subjunctive. Yo hablar-ia, I should or would speak. Tii hablar-ias, Thou shouldst or wouldst speak. El hablar-ia, He should or would speak. Nosotros hablar-iamos, We should or vjould speak. Vosotros hablar-iais, You should or would speak. EUos hablar-ian, They should or would speak. Yo come-ria, I should or would eat. Tu come-rias, Thou shouldst or wouldst eat. El come-ria, He should or would eat. Nosotros come-riamos, We should or would eat. Vosotros come-riais, You should or would eat. Ellos come-rian, They should or would eat. Yo recibi-ria, I should or would receive. Tu recibi-rias, Thou shouldst or wouldst receiv El recibi-ria. He should or icould receive. Nosotros recibi-riamos, We should or would receive. Vosotros recibi-riais, You should or would receive. Ellos recibi-rian, They should or would receive. Yo daria, I should or would give. etc. etc. Yo tendria, I should or would have. etc. etc. 244 LESSON 44. Yo habria. / should or would have. etc. etc. Yo estaria. I should or would he. etc. • etc. Yo seria. I should or would he. etc- etc. Yo baria. I should or would make (or do). etc. etc. Yo sabria. I should or would know. etc etc. Yo pondria. I should or would put. etc. etc. Yopodria, I should or would he ahle. ete. etc. Yo querria. I should or would he willing. etc etc. Yo raldriai. I should or would he icorth. €te» etc. Yo dhia. I should or would say. etc. etc. Yo saldria. I should or icould go out. etc. ete. Yo rendria. I should or would coine. etc. etc. rico? i Que Laria V. si V. fuese rico ? Eiemplos^ Examples. i Qiiien diria qne este honibre es tan Who would say that that man is so rich ? What would you do if you were rich? Yo compraria una casa grande. I would buy a large house. Si yo supiera hacerlo, lo haria. If I knew how to do it, I would do it. Yo escribiria en ingles si pudiera. I would write in English if I could. SUBJUNCTIVE (continued) 245 Yo daria mucho para saber la ver- dad. I Que le escribiria V. ? Yo le escribiria todo lo que he oido. I Cuanto dinero necesitaria V. ? Yo necesitaria a lo menos cien pesos. I Estaria V. aqui si V. pudiera salir ? Yo saldria en seguida. V. deberia venir conmigo. Yo qiiisiera saber donde esta mi hermano. Deheriamos haber salido mas tem- prano. Vocabulario. El concepto, the opinion. El motivo, the ^native. El precio, the price. El socorro, the assistance. El viento, the luind. La clase, the class. La cosa, the matter of importance. La deuda, the debt. La fresa, the strawberry. La mentira, the falsehood. La recompensa, tlie recompense. Las senas, the direction. Cansado, tired. Hasta, until, as far as. Haragan, lazy. I would give much to know the truth. What would you write to him ? I would write all I have heard. How much money would you need ? I would need at least one hundred dollars. Would you be here if you could go out ? I would go out immediately. You ought to come witli me. I should like to know where my brother is. We oicght to have gone out sooner. Vocabulary. ; Ojala ! would to God / Por cierto, certainly. Adelantar, 1. to be fast. Cambiar, 1. to exchange. Descubrir, 3. to discover. Dirigir, 3. to direct. Examinar, 1. to examine. Formar, 1. to form. Jugar, 1. to play. Marchar, 1. to go. Molestar, 1. to trouble. Obligar, 1. to oblige. Pagar, 1. to pay. Pegar, 1. to strike. Bepetir, 3. to repeat. Exercise 87, 1. Yo aprenderia el frances si tiiviera tiempo de estudiar. 2. Colon prometio una recompensa al primero que descubriera la tierra. 3. Si y. fuera al campo este aiio, yo iria tambien. 4. Los muchachos habri- an comido todas las fresas si no hubieran tenido niiedo de ser castiga- dos. 5. V. podria saber la verdad si V. quisiera. 6. Yo le habria mandado su carta, si hubiera sabido donde V. vivia. 7. i Querria V. hacerine un favor 1 8. Con mucho gusto ; que desea Y. ? 9. Quisiera 246 LESSON 44. que V. me lie vase esta carta al correo. 10. Nada mas facil, deme V. la carta. 11. i Podria V. hacer eso sin mi? 12. Podria hacerlo si no estuviese tan cansado. 13. Lloveria si no hiciera tanto viento. 14. Seria bueno que V. fuese a verle. 15. Si hubieramos recibido el dinero que esperabamos, habriamos salido con el vapor frances. 16. Si V. supiera lo que el ha dicho de su amigo, V. no estaria satisfecho. 17. [Cree V. que si el no viniese, iria yo a verle? 18. j Ojala no hubiera yo perdido mi dinero ! 19. Si lloviese esta tarde, y no pu- dieramos ir al canipo, iriamos al teatro esta noche. 20. Este b ombre tendria mas dinero, si no hubiese jugado. 21. ^unque fuesemos ricos, no pagariamos el precio que nos pide. 22. Beberiamos si tuviesemos mejor agua. 23. El S. D. Pedro Molina me dijo que dejaria a V. sus senas para dirigirle sus cartas en Paris, y con este motivo me he tomado la libertad de molestar a V. 24. Yo no cam- biaria mi caballo por el suyo. 25. Quisiera que V. examinase mi reloj, pues no marcha bien. 26. [ Marchaba bien, antes ? 27. Adelantaba un poco, pero no era cosa ; cinco minutos cad a veinticuatro horas. 28. [ Porque no me escribio V. cuando estaba en Paris ? 29. Yo le hubiera escrito, si no hubiese pensado que Y. habia salido de la ciudad. 30. Si tuvieramos tiempo, iriamos con Y. hasta la ciudad. Exercise 88. 1. What would you do, if you were invited to that ball ? 2. I should certainly not go. 3. I should tell a falsehood if I said that. 4. Would you like to go with me ? 5. I would go, if I had time. 6. That poor man would have died without assistance, if I had not come in time. 7. Would you have received my letter in time, if I had written to you ? 8. No, your letter would have arrived too late. 9. What would you have done, if he had struck you ? 10. He never would have struck me ; he is afraid of me. 11. Would you repeat what he said ? 12. I would repeat it, if you wished. 13. We would buy that house, if it were not too small for us. 14. Would you buy mine ? 15. I would buy it, if you sold it. 16. You would be now in the first class, if you had not been so lazy. 17. I should like to see your brother, where is he now ? 18. He must be in his room, if he has not gone out. 19. .You ought to have spoken to that man when he was here. 20. Were you not afraid that he would go out without you ? 21. Yes, I was afraid he would forget me. 22. I should wish SUBJUNCTIVE (continued). 247 them to be here to-morrow morning early. 23. It would be necessary for him to give me at least two hundred dollars. 24. I wish that I had never known him. 25. Had I seen the new comedy, I would have told you how it was. 26. If you always worked as much as to-day, you would soon be rich. 27. What opinion would you have formed of me, if I had done what they wished me to do 1 28. That young man would not pay his debts, if he were not obliged. 29. If I had thought that you were sick, I would not have gone out. 30. I would not speak to that man, although he were rich. Gram^tica. Grammar. 1 , The Second form of the Subjunctive ending in -ia, -ias, -ia, -iamos, -iais, -ian, is formed from the First person singular of the Future, by changing the termination e into the terminations given above : Hablare, / shall or will speak. Hablaria, / should or would speak. Comere, / shall or will eat. Comeria, / should or would eat. Recibire, / shall or will receive. Recibiria, / should or would receive. etc. etc. This Second form of the Subjunctive has therefore all the irregularities of the Future. 2, The Second form of the Subjunctive, as well as the First form, which ends in -ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran, is also used in conditional phrases, corresponding to the verb with should or would in English. These forms are therefore called sometimes Imperfect Conditionals. In phrases in which these forms are used with the Potential, there are generally two sentences, one of which is the principal and the other the subordinate. In Spanish, the verb of the prin- cipal sentence takes the second termination in -ia, -ias, -ia, -iamos, -iais, -ian ; while the verb of the subordinate sentence takes either the first termination in -ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran, or the third termination in -se, -ses, -se, -semos, -seis, -sen. 248 LESSON 44. These forms are generally preceded or followed in English by the conjunction if, d ; with a verb in the Imperfect tense : Si recibiesemos {or recibieramos) If we should receive money^ we dinero, saldriamos para la ciudad, would leave for the city. ■ 3« The conjunction si, if ; although sometimes understood in English, should be expressed in Spanish : Si yo estuviera {or estuviese) bueno, Were I (if I were) in good healthy yo iria con Y., I would go with you. Observation. — Although there are cases in Spanish where the conjunc- tion may be left out, the student will do well to adhere to the rule, as the omission of the conjunction cannot be determined by definite rules. ^ 4, The sentence may commence in Spanish either by the conjunction si, if ; or by the principal proposition : Iria con V. si tuviese {or tuviera) dinero, ) / would go with you if I had Si tuviese {or tuviera) dinero, iria con V. , S money. If, however, the sentence does not commence with the conjunc- tion, the principal verb must take the termination -ra or -ria, that is, the first termination or that of the Conditional. The termination se could not be used correctly : Tuviera or tendria mas dinero si He would have more money if he fuese mas prudente, were inore prudent. 5, When expressing a wish, without a preceding conjunction, the termination -ra or -ria must be used : ; Daria todo lo que tengo para verle ! I would give all I hrtve to see him ! i Cuanto me alegrara de verle ! Hoio glad I would he to see him I 6« If an interjection precedes the wish expressed the termi- nation -ra or -se must be used : I Ojala no le hubiera {or hubiese) yo Would to God that I had not conocido ! known him ! 7. Although the conjunction is generally left out in Spanish in the second sentence, as is the case in English, it may, how- ever, be repeated if we wish to emphasize what we express : SUBJUNCTIVE (continued). 249 Si lloviese y no pudieramos ir al If it rained and we could not go to campo, iriamos al teatro, the country , we would go to the theatre. Aun cuando V. tuviese todo el Even if you had all the money in dinero del mimdo, y aun cuando the world and you would give it V. me lo diese para que le descu- to me to reveal this secret to you, briera este secreto, no lo haria, / would not do it, 8. The Present Indicative may also govern the Conditional, if this tense is followed or preceded by another sentence in the Imperfect Subjunctive : i Cree V. que iria yo a verle sin que Bo you think that I would go and el viuiese ? or i Cree V. que si el see him without his coming ? no viniese iria yo a verle ? 9» AVhen the determining verb is in one of the Preterites of the Indicative, it governs the Imperfect Subjunctive or the Con- ditio7ial : Creyo ) que le pidieran (pidiesen He thought (or had thought) that Habia pensado ) or pedirian) una fianza, they would ask him for a se- curity. The Pluperfect or the Past Conditional may also be used : Creiamos que ya hubiera (hubiese or We thought that he would already habria) acabado su trabajo, have finished his work. 10# Other conjunctions implying a condition such as aunque, bien que, although, though; dado que, granting ; require also the Subjunctive : Aunque fuese toi aifiigo no le per- Though he were my friend I would donaria, not forgive him. lit Potential Mood. 1. May and can may be translated either by the Present In- dicative or by the Present Subjunctive of the verb poder, 2. to be able ; and also by the Present Subjunctive of the verb used in the sentence : Puedo venir, / can come. Se puede que venga, / unay come. 250 LESSON 44. Deme Y. el dinero para que pueda Give me the money, that I may pagar lo que deho, or Deme V. el jpay what I owe. dinero para que pague lo que debo, 2. Could, might, should, would. Could is rendered by the Conditional of the verb poder, when a condition is implied, and by the Imperfect or Preterite of the same verb when it implies power : Yo podria ir si quisiera, / could go if I ivished. Yo no podia ir solo, ) j ^^^^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^ ^^^^ ^^^ ^^ ^^^^^^ Yo no pude ir solo, ) 3. Might is translated by the Conditional of the verb poder when power is implied : El podria venir si quisiera, He might come if he wished. When implying possibility it is expressed in the same way as may: Se puede que venga, He may or might come. 4. Should, implying duty, or meaning ought to, is rendered by the Conditional of the verb deber : Y. deberia venir conmigo, You ought to come with me. Deberian obedecer. They should obey. 5. Should like to is rendered by the first or second form of the Imperfect Subjunctive of the verb querer : Quisiera or querria verle, / should like to see him. 6. Would, implying willingness, is rendered by the Imperfect Indicative or Preterite of the verb querer : No queria (or no quiso) hablar, He would not speak. 7. Might have and should have are in most cases translated by the Conditional of the verbs poder and deber with the In- finitive of haber : El podria haber venido, He might have come. El deberia haber veuido, He should have come. SUBJUNCTIVE FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT. 251 Leccion XLV. Lesson XLV. SUBJUNCTIVE FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT. 1. Haber, 2. — Hubiere — tuviere, Hubieres — tuvieres, Hubiere — tuviere, Hubieremos — tuviereraos, Hubiereis — tuviereis, Hubieren — tuvieren, Tener, 2. to have. I shall or will have, thou shall or wilt have, he shall or will have, we shall or will have, you sJmll or will have, they shall or will have. 3. Estar, 1. — Estuviere — fuere, Estuvieres — fueres, Estuviere — fuere, Estuvieremos — fueremos, Estuviereis — fuereis, Estuvieren — fueren, Ser, 2. to be. I shall or will be. thou shall or wilt be. he shall or will be. ive shall or loill be. you shall or will be. tliey shofll or will be. 5. Hablar, 1. to speak. 6. Comer, 2. to eat. 7. Recibir, 3. to receive. Hablare — comiere — recibiere, Hablares — coinieres — recibieres, Hablare — comiere — recibiere, Hablaremos — comieremos — re- cibieremos, Hablareis — comiereis — recibie- reis, Hablaren — comieren — recibie- reu, I shall or will speak — eat — receive. thou shall or wilt speak — eat — receive, he shall or will speak — eat — receive, we shall or will speak — eat — receive. you shall or will speak — ecU — receive. they shall or vnll speak — eat — re- ceive. Vocabulario. El alojamiento, tJie lodging. El invierno, tlie ivinter. El lugar, the place. La amistad, the friendship. La noticia, the neios. Frio, cold. Acabar, 1. to finish. Vocabulary. Aconsejar, 1. to advise. Acontecer, 2. to happen. Encontrar, 1. tofindj to meet. Mandar, 1. to order. Olvidar, 1. to forget. Padecer, 2. to suffer. Prescribir, 3. to prescribe. 252 LESSON 45. Exercise 89. 1. Si el proximo invierno fuere tan frio como el ultimo, los pobres .padeceran mucliisimo. 2. [ Ira V.^a pasar el domingo conmigo en el campo ? 3. Si yo hiibiere acabado lo que tengo que hacer, ire con mucho gusto. 4. Tu padre me ha dicho que si tu estudiares bien, te dara un bonito reloj. 5. No saldre manana, si el tiempo fuere tan malo como hoy. 6. Si viere V. a su padre maiiana, no olvide lo que le he dicho. 7. Llevaremos a su hermano con nosotros, si fuere posible. 8. Comprare la casa en que vivo, cuando tuviere dinero. 9. Si al- morzare temprano manana, ire a ver a mi amigo. 10. No olvidare- mos nada de lo que la amistad prescribiere. Exercise 90. 1. They have promised to tell me all that shall happen while I shall be (am) absent. 2. Tell your friend when you (shall) meet him, that I have good news for him. 3. If you breakfast to-morrow at {en) the same place, bring me the umbrella which I forgot there. 4. You must do, my friend, all that your father (shall) commands you. 5. The physician has advised me {de) not to go to the country, if the weather is not any better. 6. If you are unwell in the country, come back to the city. 7. If we should have money next month, we will send you some. 8. When I find a good teacher, I will learn Spanish. 9. We will write to you if we should be satisfied with {de) our new lodging. 10. We will go out, when we have dined. Gramatica. Grammar. I, The Future of the Subjunctive, of which the termina- tions are -re, -res, -re, -remos, -reis, -ren, expresses a positive future conditional action, and is therefore used 'in conditional phrases with si, if, to denote a future time. It is also used with cuando, when, and other relatives, when future time is expressed. The rules given for the use of the Present of the Subjunctive are applicable to the Future of the Subjunctive when the sense is conditional or future. The Future of the Subjunctive is not INFINITIVE MOOD. 253 of freqiieDt use, and occurs in the sentence to give more energy and precision to the idea expressed. The Future Perfect of the Subjunctive is formed from the Future of the Subjunctive of the auxiliary haber, to have ; and. the Past Participle of the verb. Leccion XLYI. Lesson XLVI. INFINITIVE MOOD. I, Government of the Infinitive without Preposition : Principal verbs requiring no Preposition before the following Infinitive : Aconsejar, 1. to advise. Acostumbrar, 1. to accustom. Afirmar, 1. to affirm. Concebir, 3. to conceive, Confesar, 1. to confess. Contar, 1. to relate. Creer, 2. to believe. Declarar, 1. to declare. Deber, 2. to owe, must. Dejar, 1. to let^ to leave. Desear, 1. to dxsire. Esperar, 1. to hope. Hacer, 2. to make, to do. Imaginar, 1. to imagine. Intentar, 1. to intend. Mandar, 1. to order. Manifestar, 1. to manifest, etc. etc Necesitar, 1. to need. Negar, 1. to deny. Oir, 3. to hear. Parecer, 2. to appear. Pensar, 1. to think, to intend. Poder, 2. to be able. Preferir, 3. to prefer. Presumir, 3. to 2iresume. Pretender, 2. to pretend. Prohibir, 3. to forbid. Prometer, 2. to promise. Protestar, 1. to protest. Querer, 2. to be loilling. Sentir, 3. to feel, to regret. Soler, 2. to be accustomed. Temer, 2. to fear. Ver, 2. to see. etc. etc. EJempIos. Deseo tener dinero. El afirma liaber dicho la verdad. Temo ver a mi amigo. Voo venir mucha gente. Ose decirle la verdad. Oigo llairiar a la puerta. Examples. I wish to have money. He affirms that he has told the truth. I fear to see my friend. I see many people coming. I dared to tell him the truth. I hear (some one) knocking at the door. 254 LESSON 46. 2. Government of the Infinitive with the Preposition a : Principal verbs requiring the Preposition a before the following Infinitive : Animar, 1. to encourage, Aprender, 2. to learn. Aspirar, 1. to aspire. Ayudar, 1. to help. Comenzar, 1. to comynence. Condenar, 1. to condemn, Consentir, 3. to consent, Convidar, 1. to invite, etc. etc. Empezar, \. to \ Ensenar, 1. to teach. Habituar, 1. to accustom, Inclinar, 1. to incline, Invitar, 1. to invite. Salir, 3. to go out. Tender, 2. to aim, Venir, 3. to come. etc. etc. Ejemplos. Autorizo a V. d hablar. El vino d visitarme, SaH d ver los soldados. El me ensena d cantar. Nos convido d comer con el. ^EiXamples. I authorize you to speak. He came to visit me. I went out to see the soldiers. He teaches me to sing. He invited us to dine with him. 3. Government of the Infinitive with the preposition de : Principal verbs requiring the Preposition de before the following In- finitive : Cesar, 1. to cease. Escusar, 1. to excuse. Disuadir, 3. to dissuade. Eximir, 3. to free. Encargar, 1. to commission. Rabiar, 1. to rage, etc. etc. etc. etc. Ejemplos. Examples. Ceso de venir aqui. He ceased coming here. Me encargo de darle a V. esta carta. He requested me to give you this . letter. 4» Government of the Infinitive with the preposition para : Lo hago para complacerle a V. I do it to please you. Trabajo para ganar dinero. I work to earn money. 5« Government of the Infinitive with the preposition en : Le ocupo en escribir una carta. I employ him to write a letter. Persiste en querer salir. He insists on going out. INFINITIVE MOOD. 255 6i • Government of the Infinitive with the preposition con : Le entretengo con leerle algo in- I amuse him by reading something teresante. interesting to him. 7. The Infinitive used with Mucho temo el verle venir. El perfecto tocar de este miisico me encanta. No es tan facil el escrihir un buen poema. A\ verle, me fui. Al salir, recibio una carta. Enfermo del mucho heber. Al ir a verle, le encontre. the Article : I much fear to see him come. The perfect playing of this musician delights me. It is not so easy to write a good poem. On seeing him I went away. On going out, he received a letter. He became sick from much drinking. In going to see him, I met him. Vocabulario. El centavo, the cent* El paseo, the walk. El viaje, the journey. La autorizacion, the authorization. La dificultad, the difficulty. La intencion, the intention. La pagina, the page. La traducion, the translation. Bajo, loiu. Dispuesto, disposed. Inocente, innocent. Seguro, sure. Tal, such as. Acostumbrar, 1. to accustom. Acusar, 1. to accuse. Autorizar, I. to aiithorize. Ayudar, 1. to help. Complacer, 2. to please. Consistir, 3. to consist. Copiar, 1. to copy. Vocabulary. Dar (1.) un paseo, to take a walk. Deber, 2. must. Descansar, 1. to rest. Dibujar, 1. to draw. Encargar, 1. to charge. En tender, 2. to understand. Escusar, 1. to excuse. Esperar, 1. to expect. Gobernar, 1. to 'inanage, to goveim. Gritar, 1. to cry. Inducir, 3. to induce. Obligar, 1. to compel. Osar, 1. to dare. Partir, 3. to leave. Pensar, 1. to intend. Resolver, 2. to resolve. Soler, 2. to he in the habit. Visitar, 1. to visit. Volver (2.) a hacer, 2. to do again. Exercise 91. 1. Creo haher visto a sii hermano en el concierto, pero no estoy seguro si era el. 2. [ Me promete V. venir manana ? 3. Yo se lo pro- meto a V. 4. Acostumbro comer y dormir poco. 5. V. no me deja 256 LESSON 46. trabajar con su mucho hablar. 6. No podremos salir hoy, porque tenemos inucliisimo que liacer. 7. Su ainigo de V. debe saber a que bora llega el correo. 8. i Quien le ha autorizado a V. a hacer eso ? 9. Nadie me ha autorizado, pero yo creia poder hacerlo sin autoriza- cion. 10. No estoy acostumbrado a corner tanto. 11. Mi amigo vino a visitarme ayer, pero no estabamos en casa. 12. El comenzo hablando bajo y acabo gritando. 13. Mi padre me ha encargado de decirle a V. que sentia mucho no poder mandarle el dinero hoy. 14. Nunca le escusare de haber hablado asi. 15. Vengo a ver si ha llegado de la Habana el seiior Alvarez. 16. No puedo decirselo, porque no lo se. 17. [ Porque trabaja V. tan tarde ] 18. Lo hago para complacerle a mi padre. 19. Este hombre no entiende gobernar su casa. 20. He resuelto no salir de la ciudad este verano. 21. [ A donde va V. ah oral 22. Voy a visitar a algunos amigos que han llegado de Francia. 23. La dificultad consiste en saber donde hallar al senor Eomero. 24. Anduve todo el dia para ver si encontraba ui^p, casa bastante grande para mi familia. 25. Preste dos libros a su amigo de V., pero el no ha vuelto a traermelos. 26. Acabo de ver al Seiior Juliano en la calle. 27. Me dijo que acababa de llegar de Europa. 28. Mis hijas aprenden a dibujar con el Senor Rondel. 29. El banquero nos convido a comer, pero no pudimos ir. 30. Aquel profesor fue el que me enseno a hablar ingles. Exercise 92. 1. We went out this morning to see the procession, but we did not see anything ; for we arrived too late. 2. My brother begins to speak Spanish. 3. I went to see your brother last Sunday, but they told me that he was not in (the) town. 4. I am working now to rest this - evening. 5. I intend to leave at the end of this week. 6. What have you resolved to do ? 7. I have resolved to sell my house, and to buy a larger one. 8. When are you going to bring me my books ? 9. I am going to bring them to-morrow. 10. The physician has advised me not to go out to-day. 11. He continued to sing and I to write. 12. I am in the habit of writing every week to my family. 13. If you will helj) me to finish my translation, I will help you to copy these pages.. 14. You cannot compel me to do this. 15. I am dis- posed to pay what is right, but not one cent more. 16. Nothing will induce me to visit him. 17. He thought that he could do it without me, but he very soon saw that it was impossible. 18. I dared to tell INFINITIVE MOOD. 257 him the truth, and he forgave me. 19. We were invited to go to the country, but we could not leave our work. 20. If I do it, it is only to please you, 21. AVe wish to have money to go to the theater. 22. He protests that he never had such an intention. 23. I fear not to have money enough for my journey. 24. Will you promise me never to do that again ? 25. I cannot promise that. 26. Will you tell your brother that we expect him to-morrow ? 27. We are going to take a walk this evening, will you come with us 1 28. We cannot go, we have too much to do. 29. Do you know how to speak French ? 30. No, sir, I only speak English. 31. He accuses me of having done that, but I assure you that I am innocent. Gram^tica. Grammar. 1. Some Spanish verbs require no preposition before another verb in the Infinitive Mood. Such are principally the verbs which indicate desire, wish, fear, doubt, need, duty, and also those which express a thought or speech, command, advice, prohi- bition, and a few others as given above. Many of these verbs may also be used with the Present Indicative and the conjunc- tion que : , El cuenta que ha ganado niucho He says tJoat he has earned much diiiero, money. 2, Although according to the Spanish Academy the verb decir, 3. to say, to tell, must never be followed by an Infinitive, many writers do not adhere to this rule : Afiadian el perjuicio que decian They added the prejudice which recibir. — Quintana. they said they were receiving. Note. — The verb decir requires in other cases the preposition a be- fore a person, and de before a verb. Dije a mi hermano de venir, / told my brother to coone. 3f Other verbs require in Spanish the preposition a before another verb in the Infinitive Mood. Such are principally those Avhich express a destination, encour- agement, habit, propriety, etc., and others given above. 17 258 LESSON 46. Verbs which indicate motion, as venir, 3. to come ; salir, 3. to go out ; belong to the same category. 4, The verb comenzar, 1. empezar, 1. and acabar, 1. require the preposition por in the sense of to begin with, and to end by : La diversion comenzo por cantar, y The amusement began with singing acabo por llorar, and ended with crying. Note. — In cases hke the above, the Gerund is more generally used : Comenzo hablando bajo y acabo He began sioeaking low and ended gritando, by shouting. 5t Those verbs which govern the Infinitive with the preposi- tion de are principally those which express distance, cessation, accusation, discussion, and a few others : Note. — The preposition de is also used when the Infinitive, as genitivo partitivo, genitive 2^ctrtitive, is governed by a noun : Tengo el honor de saludar a Y., I have the honor to salute you. 6« The preposition para is used before the Infinitive to ex- press more forcibly an intention, and whenever the English prej)o- sition to may be rendered by in order to : Trabajo ahora para descansar luego, / am working noiv to rest later. 7t Those verbs which express occupation or insistance require the preposition en before the Infinitive : Me ocupa en leer. He occupies me in reading. Persiste en decirlo, He persists in saying so. 8. The preposition COn governs in the Infinitive those verbs which indicate entertainment, diversion, amusement, etc. : Le entretengo con contarle cuentos, I amuse him by telling him stories. Note. — The Gerund is oftener used, however, in such cases : Le divierto tocando el piano, I amuse him by playing on the piano. 9. Some verbs may take or omit either of the prepositions according to their meaning : Este hombre no entiende hacer eso. That man does not understand how to do that. INFINITIVE MOOD. 259 No entiendo de meterme en negocios / dcniH mean to meddle with other ageiios, peoples hasiness. Acerte a verle al ir a su casa, / succeeded in seeing him mi goivg to his house. He acertado en hablar con el, / have done right in speaking to him. KoTE. — There are even verbs which have different meanings with the same preposition : Dejo de escribir cuando entre, He ceased ivriting when I entered, No deje V. de escribirme, Do not neglect ivriting to me. 10. The following rules for the guidance of the student in the use of Prepositions require special attention : 1. When the Infinitive occurs in the sentence as subject or object of the determining verb, it is used without a preposition when the question who ? or what ? may be asked : He resuelto salir hoy, / have resolved (what ?) to go out to-day. El ofrecio ayudarme. He offered (what ?) to help me. 2. When the question to what? or where to? may be asked, the preposition a must be used : Yo le animare a hacerle, / loill encourage him (to what ?) to do it. Voy a visitar mi tio, I am going (where to ?) to visit my uncle. 3. The preposition de is used in answer to the questions of what? from what? at what? from where? Se espanto de verle tan palido. He was alarmed (at what ?) at seeing him so pale. Su pobreza proviene de su gastar. His poverty is the result (of what ?) of his expenses, 4. The preposition en is used in answer to the questions in what? on what? La dificultad consiste en hallarle, The difficulty consists (in what ?) in finding him. YA iiisiste en salir, He insists (on what ?) on going out. 260 LESSON 46. 5. The preposition con is used in answer to the questions with what ? by what ? Este hombre ha destruido su salud This man has destroyed his health (by con mucho beber, what ?) by much drinking. Note. — Although there are many cases in which the right use of the Preposition cannot be indicated, the rules given above may be followed in most cases. 11. The verb acabar, 1. to end, to fiiiish, followed by the preposition de and an Infinitive, expresses an action which has just taken place : Acabo de verle, / have just seen him. Acababa de comer cuando yo entre, He had just dined when I entered. 12. The verbs mandar, 1. to send, to order, and hacer, 2. to make, to do, followed by an Infinitive, have the meaning of the English verbs to cause, to let, to have : Hago hacer iin sombrero, I have a hat made. Mando lavar mi ropa, / have my clothes washed. Hace tenir el paiio, He has the cloth dyed. 13. The Infinitive may be used in Spanish as a Substantive and as the subject or object of the verb. It may, therefore, be preceded in this case by the article or by any other part of speech : No he olvidado el insoportable I have not forgotten the insupiwrt- hablar de este hombre, able talking of that man. Al avanzar nuestro ejercito se re- Our army having advanced, the tiraron los enemigos, enemy retired. No ganara V. nada con ese hablar, You will gain nothing by this talk. 14. There are cases where the Infinitive may be used with or without the article : Es injusto acusar {or el acusar) este It is unjust to accuse this man of hombre de este crimen, this crime. THE INFINITIYE GOVERNED BY PREPOSITIONS. 261 Leccion XLVII. Lesson XLVII. THE INFINITIVE GOVERNED BY PREPOSITIONS. A mas de. Ademas de, Sobre, Tras de, A menos de, A pesar de, 1 Sin embargo de, I No obstante de, J Despues de, Antes de. Sin, En cuanto a, Por, En consecuencia de. Besides^ altliough^ Unless. Notxoithstaiiding^ however. After. Before. Without. As for. On account of for, instead of In consequence of Ejemplos. A mas de ) haberle visto, le he Ademas de ) hablado, A pesar de ^ haberle yo pagado Sin embargo de > no estuvo satisfe- No obstante de >* cho, Antes de salir, comio, Despues de haber comido, salio, Sail sin nadie verme. No fue admitido por ser estrangero, Tras de no pagarme, me insiilta, Sobre ser Ingles, quiere pasar por Americano. En cuanto a dar dinero, no lo hare. Ko se como acabar eso. Examples. Besides seeing him, I spoke to him. Notwithstanding that I paid him, he was not pleased. He dined before going out. He went out after having dined. I went out without anybody see- ing me. He was not admitted {on accouiU of his) being a stranger. Besides not paying me, he iu' suits me. Although he is an Englishman, he wishes to pass for an American. As for giving money, I shall not do it. I don't know how to finish that. 262 LESSON 47. Vocabulario. El ga&to, the expense. El obrero, the workman. El vestido, the dress. La colocacion, the situation. La divinidad, the divinity. La pregunta, tlie question. Generoso, generous. Tal, such as. Vocabulary. j Atacar, 1. to attack. Castigar, 1 to punish. i Cons'ultar, 1. to consult. Contestar, 1. to answer. Continuar, 1. to continue. Descansar, 1. to rest. Entrar, 1. to enter. Examinar, 1. to examine. luvocar, 1. to invoice. Obedecer, 2. to obey. Obtener, 2. to obtain. Ofender, 3. to offend. Pagar, 1. to pay. Seguir, 3. to follow. Trabajar, 1. to imrk. Volver, 2. to return. Exercise 93. 1. Despiies de haber yo leido el libro, se lo preste a mi amigo. 2. A pesar de no bien trabajar, quiere que le paguen bien. 3. Ademas de ser haragan, gasta miicho. 4. Sin embargo de ser muy pobre, quiere pasar por rico. 5. Antes de consentir yo a lo que el quiere, debo examinar si el tiene razon. 6. Perdono a sus enemigos, antes de morir. 7. En consecuencia de haberle yo dicho que viniera, vino. 8. En cuanto a tener yo que hacer todos los gastos, lo veremos. 9. [ Que contestar a tal pregunta ? 10. [ Como saber si mi amigo esta en la ciudad ? 11. A donde ir para encontrarle? 12. Este hombre me ha ofendido demasiado por poder perdonarle yo. 13. El muchacho tomo el libro sin darselo yo. 14. Sin verme nadie, entre en mi cuarto. 15. No haga V. nada antes de consultarme. 16. [ Porque hizo V. eso ? 17. Lo hize sin saber lo que estaba haciendo. 18. Ade- mas de ser el mi amigo, lo es tambien de V. 19. Quiero hacerlo sin decirselo a nadie. 20. Le di la carta por creer que era para el. Exercise 94. 1. After having written his letters, he went out. 2. You cannot obtain that situation, unless you speak Spanish and English. 3. Do not go out without seeing me. 4. Michael (Miguel) is punished for having spoken. 5. Do not speak without knowing. 6. Besides being very rich, he is also very generous. 7. Notwithstanding that I told him not to do it, he would not obey me. 8. How shall I do that ? 9. Where shall I look for my books? 10. He could not follow us (on account of his) being too old. 11. Before going away, he said that he would not return. 12. Although he works badly (mal), he wishes to be paid like a good workman. 13. After he had rested, he con- THE INFINITIVE GOVERNED BY PREPOSITIONS. 263 tinned his jonrney. 14. Besides his not reading the letter, he tore it to pieces {la hizo pedazos). 15. Besides receiving him in my house, I gave him money and clothes. 16. They invoked their divinities before attacking the enemy. 17. He took the money without my giv- ing it to him. 18. He is sick on account of having eaten too much. 19. Besides not paying us, he says that we owe him money. 20. I wish you to do it without saying a word to him. Gram^tiea. Grammar. 1. Some of the prepositions given above which govern the Infinitive have different meanings. Por, for instance, has the meaning of on account of or because in the following sentence : No fue admitido por sei* estrangero, He was not admitted on account of his being a stroMger, while in the next sentence it is to rendered by instead of: Le di mi libro por darle el suyo, / gave him my hook instead of giviny him his own, 2t The Infinitive is often governed also by the Conjunctions como, how, and que, that, by the adverb d6nde, where, and by the Interrogative Pronouns : No se como acabar esto, / do'iiut know how to finish that, Le traigo que comer, / bring yoic to eat, i Como decir lo que siento ! How shall I say what I feel .? j No sabe V. a quien vender su Do yon not knoiv to wh^m you could caballo ? sell your horse ? Note. — The above examples can only be explained by an elHpsis, by which the natural object of the Infinitive is omitted : No se como (puedo) acabar esto, / don't know how {I can) finish that. i Como (podre) decir lo que siento ! How (shall I be able) to say wJiat I feel. Le traigo (algo que V. pueda) co- / bring you {so^nething that you mer, can) eat. 264 LESSON 48. 3* The Infinitive sentences may also be rendered in Spanish by the Present Indicative or by the Subjunctive Mood, by adopting a different construction : Despues de haberle dado el dinero sa- \ ^ , , . T , T^ 1 -u X. ^ J ^ I After I had given him the money, he no or Despues que le hube dado el v *' ^ '^^ J. V ' \ went out, dinero, salio, ; Tras de no pagarme, no me saluda or \ Besides not paying me, he does not Tras de que no me paga no me saluda, J salute me. Sail sin verme el or Sail sin que el me vieraj iera, ) I went out without his seeing Tne. Leccion XLVIII. Lesson XLVIII. THE GERUND OR PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 1. Amar, 1. to love ; Causar, 1. to caiise; Habitar, 1. to inhabit ; Participar, 1. to participate j Tocar, 1. to touch , Obedecer, 2. to obey ; Pertenecer, 2. to belong ; Seguir, 3. to follow ; amando, amante, loving. causando, causante, causing. babitando, habitante, inhabiting. participando, participante, participating. tocando, tocante, touching. obedeciendo, obediente, obeying. perteneciendo, perteneciente, belonging. siguiendo, siguiente, folloiving. Vocabulario. El almirante, the admi- ral. El capitan, the captain. El colegio, the college. El enemigo, the enemy. El estudio, tlie study. El dervis, the dervis. El habitante, the inhab- itant. El lado, the side. El ojo, the eye. El palacio, the palace. El precepto, the precept. El puente, the bridge. El reino, the kingdom. La capital, the caioital. La equivocacion, the mis- take. La escuadra, tlie squad- ron. La guerra, the war. La bora, the time. La imprenta, the jyress. La posada, the inn. La posesion, the posses- sion. La Tartaria, Tartary. La victoria, the victory. Vocabulary. Dentro de, within. Por, through. Atravesar, 1. to cross over. Construir, 3. to construct. Desobedecer, 2. to disobey. Explicar, 1. to explain. Licenciar, 1. to disband. Montar, 1. to mount. Beir, 3. to laugh. Sacar, 1. to draw. Salir (2) de, ossess ; Prender, 2. to catch; Prescribir, 3. to prescribe ; Presumir, 3. to presume ; Pretender, 2. to pretend ; Profesar, 1. to profess ; Proscribir, 3. to proscribe; Proveer, to provide; Repletar, 1. to fill ; Romper, 2. to break ; Salvar, 1. to save; Secar, 1. to dry ; Sepultar, 1. to bury ; Situar, 1. to place ; Sol tar, 1. to let loose ; Sujetar, 1. to subject ; estraido, estracto, exiraded. exentado, exento, exemijted. favorecido, favorite, favored. fijado, fijo, fixed. fingido, ficto, feigned. freido, frito, fried. hartado, liar to, satiated. imprimido, impreso, hnpressed^ printed. improvisado, improviso, extemporized. incluido, incluso, included. infectado, infecto, infected. inscribido, inscrito, inscribed, inserido, inserto, inserted. invertido, inverto, inverted. » juntado, junto, joined. limpiado, limpio, cleared. maldecido, maldito, cursed. manifestado, manifesto, tnanifested. marchitado, marcbito, faded. nacido, nato, been born. ocultado, oculto, concealed. omitido, omiso, omitted. oprimido, opreso, oppressed. perfeccionado, perfecto, perfected. pervertido, perverso, perverted. poseido, poseso, possessed. prendido, preso, caught. prescribido, prescrito, prescribed. presumido, presunto, presumed. pretendido, pretenso, pretended. profesado, profeso, professed. proscribido, proscrito, proscribed. proveido, provisto, provided. repletado, repleto, filled. rompido, roto, broken. salvado, salvo, saved. secado, seco, dried. sepultado, sepulto, buried. situado, sito, placed. Eoltado, suelto, let loose. sujetado, sujeto, subjected. 276 LESSON 50. Suprimir, 3. to suppress ; Suspender, 2. to suspend; Sustituir, 3. to substitute ; Tender, 2. to spread ; Tenir, 3. to dye ; Torcer, 2. to twist ; Vaciar, 1. to empty ; suprimido, supreso, suppressed, suspendido, suspense, suspended. substituido, substitute, substituted. tendido, tenso, sj^rcad. tenido, tinto, dyed. torcido, tuerto, twisted. vaciado, vacio, emptied. Vocabulario. El accidente, the accident. El cielo, the heaven. El cdlera, the cholera.. El monte, the tiiountain. El monumento, the monument. El tnuro, the imll. El pescuezo, the neck. El populacho, the mob. El servicio, the service. La bagetela, the trifle. La carcel, the prison. La cuenta, the account. La estatua, the statue. > La invitacion, the invitation. Vocabulary. La liberalidad, the liberality. La lista, the list. La maxima, the maxim. La opinion, the opinion. La obra, the ivork. La ruina, the ruin. La silla, the chair. Bajo, under. Delante, before. Junto, together. Liberal, liberal. Militar, military. Vacio, empty. Exercise 99. 1. I Quien ha abierto la puerta y ha puesto una silla delante 1 2. I No le he dicho yo a V. que habia visto a su hermana en el teatro 1 3. He escrito todo lo que V. me ha prescrito. 4. Estoy convencido que mi amigo llegara hoy mismo. 5. El colera ha infectado a mucha gente, y todavia hay muchos que estan infectos. 6. El cocinero ha torcido el pescuezo de la gallina. 7. El buque esta provisto de todo lo necesario. 8. Los ladrones estaban ocultos en el monte, pero han sido prendidos por los soldados. 9. Aunque estuviese yo despieito, el pretende que me ha despertado. 10. El cielo ha bendecido sus obras. 11. Estoy tan confuso que no se lo que estoy haciendo. 12. No me han permitido salir todavia. 13. Este cuadro no esta todayia completo. 14. Todavia no hemos comprendido lo que el queria decir. 15. Hemos corregido todos los ejercicios, y ahora estan correctos. 16. Son los hombres mas corruptos que hemos conocido. 17. No comprendo lo que esta inscrito en {on) este monumento. THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 277 18. Fue un accidente imprevisto, y a nadie podemos culpar. 19. To- das las mesas en la casa estan rotas. 20. Estos libros han sido impresos en Paris. Exercise lOO, 1. My friend invited me to dine with him, but I could not accept his invitation. 2. I was awake when your friends arrived in the night. 3. These two friends are always together. 4. The flowera you bought for your sister are already faded. 5. The roads are not dry yet, and we will have to take a carriage. 6. Fill the empty glasses with (de) wine. 7. More than fifty mefi were buried under the ruins of the old church. 8. The thieves were caught and taken to (the) prison. 9. The mob has been dispersed by the soldiers. 10. We have included all our expenses in the account we gave you, 11, Do you know if the fire has been extinguished] 12. It was ex- tinguished when I passed through the street, 13. This young man has been exempted from military service, 14. He has confessed that he has spent all his money in buying trifles. 15. The inhabitants of the city have erected a statue to that great man. 16. I have been obliged to sell my favorite horse. 17. All these maxims were in- scribed on the walls of our school. 18. These men have been expelled from their country for their liberal opinions. Gram^tica. Grammar. 1, Many verbs have in Spanish two Past Participles, a regu- lar and an irregular one. The regular Participle of such verbs must be used in compound tenses with the verb haber, 2. to have ; or when the sentence is passive : ^ Le hem OS convencido de su error, JFe have convinced him of his error. Fue espulsado del pais, He was expelled from the country. The irregular participle is used as an Adjective or when standing alone, and with the exception of preso, prescrito, proscrito, provisto, roto, injerto, opreso, impreso, and supreso, can never be accompanied by the auxiliary haber, 2, to have. In the case of these nine verbs, either of the Participles may be used, and we can as w^ell say ha preso as ha prendido. Boto is of more frequent occurrence than rompido. 278 LESSON 51. Leccion LI. Lesson LI. THE PASSIVE VERB (VOZ PASIVA). Ser alabado, to be praised. Infinit. Pres. : Pret. Perf. : FuTURO : Part, pas.: Gkrundio : Part. pret. : Part, futuro: Indic. pres. : Pret. imperf.: Pret. definido; Pret. indefin. : Pret. anterior : Pret. pluscuamp Futuro imperf. : Futuro perf. : Imperative : subj. pres.: SuBJ. imperf.: COND. SLMP. : Pret. perf.: Pluscuamperf. : cond. comp. : Futuro imp. : Futuro comp. : Ser alabad-o, -a, -os, -as, to he praised. haber sido alabad-o, -a, -os, -as, to have been praised. haber de ser alabad-o, -a, -OS, to have to be praised, praised, being praised, having been praised, having to he praised, I am praised. -as, alabad-o, -a, -os, -as, siendo alabado, habiendo sido alabado, habiendo de ser alabado, yo soy alabado (a), nosotros(as)somosalabados(as), we are praised. yo era alabado, \ yo fui alabado, \ yo he sido alabado, yo hube sido alabado, i : yo habia sido alabado, \ yo sere alabado, yo habre sido alabado, sea alabado, que yo sea alabado, que yo fuere or fuese alabado, 5^0 seria alabado, ♦; que yo haya sido alabado, que yo bubiera i , , . > sido alabado, que yo hubiese j * yo habria sido alabado, yo fuere alabado, yo hubiere sido alabado. / was praised, I have been praised. I had been praised. I shall or will be praised, I shall or will have been praised, be praised. that I may be praised, that I might be praised, I should or would be praised, that I may have been praised, that I might have been praised. I should or would have been praised. I shall be praised. ^ I shall have been 2^raised. Ejemplos. La casa del general esta vendida. Los enemigos han sido derrotados. Examples. The general's house is sold. The enemy has been defeated. THE PASSIVE VERB. 279 El pueiite esta construido. Mi conducta ha sido aprobada. J^a carta ha sido escrita por el. Los muchachos han sido castigados. Mi sombrero esta perdido. Henios sido engafiados. El es estiinado y amado. Queremos ser obedecidos. The bridge is built. My conduct has been approved. The letter has been written by him. The boys have been punished. My hat is lost. We have been deceived. He is esteemed and loved. We wish to be obeyed. Examples with the pronoun se : Esto se ve a menudo. El cafe se vende bien. Se ama al hombre de bien. Se adniira la sabiduria de Socrates. Esto no se puede hacer asi. A qui se habla espahol. No se puede ver cosa mas mara- villosa. Vocabulario. El diputado, the deputi/. . El gobi^no, the government. El objeto, the object. El retrato, the picture. El terremoto, the earthquake. La cantatriz, the singer. La ciencia, the science. La comedia, the comechj. La conjuracion, the conspiracy. La juventud, the youth. La licencia, the license. La muerte, the death. La necesidad, the necessity. La obra, the work. La sentencia, the tnaxim. That is often seen. Cofl'ee sells well. The honest man is loved. The wisdom of Socrates is admired. That cannot be done so. Spanish is spoken here. Nothing more wonderful can be seen.-ix Vocabulary. La tienda, the shop. Barato, cheap. Escipion, Scipio. . Alabar, 1. to praise Alquilar, 1. to let Arruinar, 1. to ruin. Componer, 2. to compose^ Destruir, 3. to destroyt Escoger, 2. to select. Eligir, 3. to elect. Favorecer, 2. to favor. \ Eeconocer, 2. to know. - Representar, 1. to play: Reprimir, 3. to repress. Restablecer, 2. to re-establish. Exercise 101. 1. Este paiio se vende en la tienda del Seiior Palma. 2. Se han adniirado mucho las sentencias de Seneca. 3. Las ciencias han siempre sido favorecidas por los buenos gobiernos. 4. Este principe no sera alabado despues de su muerte. 5. La cantatriz ha sido muy 280 LESSON 51. aplaudida anoche. 6. Mi amigo ha sido eligido diputado de su ciudad. 7. [ Que se dice en la ciudad ? 8. Se dice que el azucar se vendera muy bien este ailo. 9. Este retrato ha sido hecho por uno de nuestros mejores pintores. 10. Esta senora es amada y estimada de todos los que la conocen. ll. Se ve que V. esta coiitento hoy. 12. No engariamos a nadie, pero somos enganados muy a menudo. l£^stos muchachos han sido alabados por sus niaestros. 14. No hei^ffo^ido convidados por su herraano, y asi no hemos ido a su casa. 15.^*]^!^ hubiera descubierto la conjuracion de Catilina, si Ciceron no hubifes^ sido consul ? 16. Se reconoce al verdadero amigo en la necesi- dad. 17. [ Sabe V. si se vende esa casa ? 18. No, sen or, se alquila. 19. Esta obra ha sido compuesta por mi amigo. 20. La hacienda ha sido vendida despues de la muerte del dueiio. 21. La licencia fue repriniida y la paz restablecida en el pais. 22. Estas cosas han sido escogidas por mi hermano cuando estaba en Paris. 23. No se puede saber como le fue posible al ladron entrar en la casa. 24. Estoy seguro que esta carta no ha sido escrita por el. 25. Se cree que el Presidente Uegara esta manana. Exercise 102. 1. These goorfs have been received from England. 2. Where have these objects been found ? 3. They have been found in a carriage. 4. Those gla^s have been broken by the children. 5. Those houses have been^old very cheap. 6. The general had been wounded sev- eral times in his youth. 7. This letter has been written by one of our friends. 8. What would you have done if you had known that 1 9. I would have done the same thing that I have done. 10. If you go to his house, you will be very well received. 11. This comedy has been^ayed twice at (en) the large theater. 12. Have the thieves been caught ? 13. Two of them have been caught. 14. If I had been invited to the ball, I would have gone with my sister. 15. It is said that there has been a great fire in the city. 16. It was said yesterday that the general had died. 17. That city has been de- stroyed by an earthquake. 18. I think that coffee will sell very well this year. 19. Such things are often seen. 20. French goods are sold in that store. 21. Hannibal was conquered by Scipio. 22. The beautiful house of the banker will be sold this week. 23. Your brother is seen every afternoon in the park. 24. They speak only French in that school. 25. Our friends have been ruined by the war. • THE PASSIVE. VERB. 281 26. All the sugar lias })een ba^jyi by that merchant. 27. 1 have been deceived several timef%^natinan. 28. That child is loved by everybody. Gram atica. Grammar. 1, Passive verbs are conjugated in all their tenses with the ' auxiliary verb ser, 2. to he. To this auxiliary the Past Partidple of active or transitive verbs is added, the same agreeing in gender' and number with the subject : El muchacho es amado. The hoy is loved. La muchacha es amada, The girl is loved. Los ninchachos son amados, The hoys are loved. Las muchachas son amadas, The girls are loved. 2. Active verbs are often used passively with the pronoun se in the third person singular or plural : Estos libros se venden en aquella Those hooks are sold in that hooTc- libreria, store. No se puede ver nada, Nothing can he seen. El cafe se vende bien, Coffee sells well. 3* It is to be noticed, however, that when a passive. sentence is formed with the pronoun se, this sentence may preserve the construction of the active : Se ama al hombre de bien, The honest man is loved. 4. The verb remains invariable in the singular when the pas- sive subject is a person,- and the acting ablative is not expressed : Es dolor el ver como se aprecia mas It is painful to see that infamous a los infames aduladores que a flatterers are more esteemed than los hombres honrados, honorahle men. 5, The Past Participle remains invariable with the compound tense of the verb : Se ha amado a Maria por sus vir- Mary has heen loved for Iter virtues. tudes, 282 LESSON 62. a thing, or when tlie 6« When the object of thl^|^e acting ablative is expressed, the verl^ ^^|gs with the object, although the Past Participle remains invariable : i Oh siglo miserable, en el cual se estiman las virtudes por bicocas, r, cuando las aconipana la pobreza ! Se han adinirado mucho las senten- cias de Seneca por siis proprios enemigos, miserable century y in which virtue is considered as nothing when ac- companied by poverty J The maxitiu of Seneca have been much admired, even by his ene- mies. 7f The verbs quedar, 1. to remain, and ir, 3. to go, may sometimes be used instead of ser to give more expression to the sentence : Ha quedado verificado que eso no es verdad, Va demostrado que la tierra rotura alrededor del sol, It has been proved that this is not true. It is ptfoved that the earth revolves around the sun. Leccion LII. Lesson LII. REFLECTIVE VERBS. Pronouns accompanying the Beflective Verbs* Me, • myself. Te,' thyself. Se, himself, herself, itself, themselves, yourself, yourselves. Nos, oiirselves. Os, yourselves. Alabarse, to praise one^s self Infinitive. Alabarse, to praise one's self. Past. Haberse alabado, to have praised one's self. Past Participle. Alabadose, praised one's self. REFLEi Alabandose, Habieiidose a' Me alabo, Te alabas, Se alaba, VERBS. 283 praising ones self, luiving praised one's self. Indicative Present. I praise myself, thou praisest thyself. Nos alabamos, Os alabais, Se alaban, V. se alaba (siiig.)^ V. V. se alaban (pi.), etc. She praises hitnself. she praises herself. ive praise ourselves, you praise yourselves, they p7'aise themselves, you praise yourself, you praise yourselves, etc. Past Indefinite. Me he alabado, Te has alabado, Se ha alabado, Kos hemos alabado, Os habeis alabado, Se han alabado, V. se ha (sing,) alabado, V. V. se han (pi.) alabado, etc. / Jiave praised myself thou hast praised thyself, he has praised himself, she has praised herself, we have praised ourselves, you have praised yourselves, they have pi^aised themselves, you have praised yourself you have praised yourselves, etc. Imperative. Alabate, praise thyself. Alabese, let Mm praise himself. Alabemonos, let us praise ourselves. Alabaos, praise yourselves. Alabense, let them, praise themselves, Alabese V., praise yourself. Alabense V. Y., praise yoicrselves. Reflective verb conjugated with another verb. Yo quiero alabar-me, Tu quieres alabar-te, El quiere alabar-se, Ella quiere alabar-se, Nosotros queremos alabar-nos, / will praise myself thoit wilt praise thyself, he will praise himself she loill praise herself we will praise ourselves. 284 LESSON 52. Vosotros quereis alabar-os, y. quiere (sing.) alabar-se, Y. V. qiiieren (^Z.) alabar-se, you will ijraise yourself, you will praise yourselves. Ejemplos. Llamarse, 1. i Como se llama V. ? — Me llamo Jose. Equivocarse, 1. V. se equivoca. Sentarse, 1. Sientese V., senora. Levantarse, 1. ^ A que hora se le- vanta V. ? — Me leyaiito a las seis. Acostarse, 1. i Porque no se acues- tan los muchachos ? — Se acostaran pronto. Pasearse, 1. i Quiere V. pasearse conmigo ? — No tengo tiempo de pasearme. Divertirse, 3. Me divierto mucho aqui, Enfadarse, 1. No se enfade Y. Cor tar se, 1. Los muchachos se han cortado. Vestirse, 3. Nos vestiremos mas tarde. Calentarse, 1. Calientese Y. Verse, 2. No puedo verme en el espejo. Arrepentirse, 3. El se arrepintio antes de morir. Dirigirse, 3. i A quien debo diri- girme ? — Y. puede dirigirse a mi. Ellas se han escrito. No nos hemos hablado. Examples. What is your name ? — My name is Joseph. You are mistaken. Sit down, madam. At what time do you rise ? — I rise at six o'clock. Why do not the boys go to bed ? — They will soon go to bed. ^ Will you take a walk with me ? — I have no time to walk. I amuse myself very much here. Do not get angry. The boys have cut themselves. We will dress later. Warm yourself. I cannot see myself in the looking- glass. • He repented before dying. To whom must I apply ? — You may apply to me. They have written to each other. We have not spoken to each other. REFLECTIVE VEEBS. 285 Vocabulario. El mercader, the merchant. La colocacion, the situation. La cuenta, the account. La miseria, the misery. Ligero, quick. Far ado, standing. Acordarse, 1. to remember. Acostarse, 1. to go to bed. Apoderarse, 1. to take possession. Banarse, 1. to hathe. Burlarse, 1. to laugh at. Caerse, 2. to fall. Calentar, 1. to warm. Casarse, 1. to marry. Comportarse, 1. to belmve. Vocabulary. Defender, 2. to defend. Desmayarse, 1. to faint. Despertarse, 1. to awake. Divertirse, 3. to amuse mie's self. Dormirse, 3. to fall asleep. Enfadarse, 1. to get angry. Equivocarse, 1. to make a mistake. Llamarse, 1. to he called. Levantarse, 1. to rise. Pasearse, 1. to take a walk, Quedarse, 1. to remain. Quejarse, 1. to complain. Quemar, 1. to hum. Bendirse, 3. to surrender. Sentarse, 1. to sit down. Exercise 103. 1. I Porque no se sienta V. ? 2. No estoy cansado, prefiero que- darnie parado. 3. i Se divierten V. V. en el campo '? 4. Nos diverti- mos muchisimo ahi. 5. ^ No se equivoca V. cuando V. dice eso ? 6. No me eqiiivoco. 7. i Porque ne se pasea V. todas las mananas 1 8. Me paseo cuando el tiempo esta bueno. 9. [ Se levanta V. tem- prano ? 10. Me levanto tan pronto como me despierto. 11. Si V. tiene frio, calientese. 12. No se queme V. ; el plato esta muy ca- liente. 13. No se lo que tengo, pero no puedo dormir cuando me acuesto por la noche. 14. Es porque V. se acuesta demasiado tem- prano, y se levanta demasiado tarde. 15. [ Como se llama su amigo de v.? 16. Se llama Juan, y su hermana se llama Maria. 17. [ Porque no va V. al jardin a divertirse con los muchachos ? 18. No me siento Lien, quiero ir a acostarme. 19. Los enemigos se apoderaron de una de nuestras fortalezas. 20. Toda la familia esta en el campo ; yo me he quedado solo en la ciudad. 21. [ Se acuerda V. de lo que dijo este liombre? 22. Me acuerdo de todo le que dijo. 23. Digale V. al mercader que se equivoco en la cuenta que nos mando. 24. i Porque se queja V. de mi ? 25. Yo no me quejo de nadie. 26. i Se ban bablado estas senoras ? 27. Creo que no se ban bablado. 28. [ Donde ba conocido V. a este caballero 1 29. Nos bemos conocido en Madrid. 30. ^Porque se burlan V. V. de este bombre? 31. Porque es muy ridiculo. 32. El hi jo de Juan se esta muriendo. 33. 'La pobre madre 286 LESSON 52 se desmayo cuando le hablaron de la muerte de su hijo. 34. Mi her- mano se casara cuando tenga una buena colocacion. 35. Si V. no hubiese corrido tan ligero, no se habria caido. Exercise 104. 1. Why do not the children go to bed ? 2. They will not go to bed. 3. How is that said in Spanish ? 4. I don't know how it is said. 5. What is your name, my friend ? 6. My name is Edward. 7. Why does not brother get up ; is he sick 1 8. He is not sick, but he always gets up late. 9. Sit down, I will be ready in a moment. 10. Will you take a walk with us ? 11. With pleasure ; where do you wish to go ? 12. Let us go to the park. 13. Why do you get angry so quickly 1 14. You are mistaken ; I never get angry. 15. Will you not go to the concert with us ? 16. I am so tired that I am afraid to fall asleep. 17. When I was in the country I rose very early, but since I have been (am) in town I rise very late. 18. Have the children taken a walk ? 19. Yes, sir, they take a walk every morning early. 20. What did you say when he complained to you 1 21. I did not say anything. 22. He believed himself rich, but he was far from being so. 23. Thet;e soldiers defended themselves with the greatest courage. 24. That officer covered himself with glory. 25. Where have you known each other ? 26. We have known each other in France. 27. The enemy has surrendered. 28. The children have taken a bath in the river. 29. Don't laugh at that man, because he is poor and old. 30. I have never laughed at him. 31. That boy has behaved very badly. 32. She fainted on hearing that. 33. You have made a mis- take in saying that. 34. After having lost his fortune, he saw him- self in the greatest misery. 35. My sister will be married next week. Gram^tica. Grammar. !• Eeflective or Pronominal verbs are conjugated in Spanish with two Personal Pronouns of the same Person, the first (ex- pressed or understood) being the subject, and the second, accord- ing to the active or neuter meaning of the verb, the direct or indirect object : Yo me divierto or me divierto, / amuse myself. - El se alaba or se alaba, He praises himself. REFLECTIVE \^ERBS. 287 Note. — The indirect pronoun may also be placed after the verb and form but one word with the same : Divertimonos muchisimo, JFe amuse ourselves much. 2. Eeflective verbs are either essentially reflective, that is, they cannot be used without the two personal pronouns, as arre- pentirse, 3. to repent ; acordarse, 1. to remember, etc., or acci- dentally reflective, that is, they may be formed as in English, from active or neuter verbs : quemarse, 1. to hum oiie's self, from quemar, 1. to hum ; calentarse, 1. to warm one^s self, from calentar, 1. to warm, etc. The number of verbs essentially reflective is limited, but accidentally reflective verhs are unlimited, since in Spanish, as well as in English, almost any verb may be used reflectively, 3« Many verbs which are reflective in Spanish, are not so in English. Such are among others, the verbs : Quejarse, 1. to complain. Arrepentirse, 3. to repent. Acordarse, 1. to remember. Apoderarse, 1. to take possession, etc. etc. 4« A reflective verb, conjugated with another verb, takes the corresgonding personal pronoun before the Infinitive : Quiero divertirme, I loish to amuse myself. Vamos a baharnos, We are going to take a bath. Note. — It is to be observed that in this case also the indirect pronoun may precede the first verb : Me quiero divertir. / ivish to amicse myself ; nos vamos a banar, we are going to take a bath, etc. 5 1 In compound tenses, the indirect pronoun is placed before the auxiliary : Me he cortado, I have ctit myself. Se han burlado de V., They have made fun of you. El se ha comprado una casa, He has bought himself a house. 6f Eeflective verbs, when used with plural persons, also ex- press in Spanish a reciprocal or mutual action : Se vieron, pero no se hablaron, They saw each other, hut they did not speak to each other. 238 LESSON 53. Se han escrito muchas cartas, They have written many letters to each other. Ti The s of the first person plural, and the d of the second person, are dropped in the Imperative of Reflective verbs : Amemonos instead of am^mosnos. Let us love each other. Amaos instead of amados, Love each other. 8. Accidentally reflective verbs have often a different meaning from that of the primitive verb, as for instance : Burl arse de uno, To make fan of some one. Burlar las esperanzas de uno, To destroy the hopes of some one. Dormirse, 3. to fall asleep. Dormir, 3. to sleep. Desmayarse, 1. to faint. Desmayar, 1. to lose courage. Caerse, 2. to fall. Caer en una falta, to commit a fault. 9t There are many Spanish verbs which may be nsed either reflectively or not, without altering their meaning : Fiarse or fiar de alguno, To trust somebody. Chancearse or cliancear con alguno, To joke with some one. Reirse or reir de alguno, To laugh at some one. Se ha muerto or Ha muerto, He Itas died. Leccion LIII. Lesson LIII. REFLECTIVE VERBS {Continued). Irse, 3. to go away. Yo me voy, / am, going away. Tu te vas, TJiou art going away. iX se va. He is going away. Ella se va, She is going away. Nosotros nos vamos. We are going away. Vosotros OS vais. You are going away. Ellos (m.) se van, | rpj^^ ^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^y^ Ellas (/ ) se van, ) V. {sing.) se va, | you are going away. V. V. {pi.) se van, ) EEFLECTIVE VERBS (CONTINUED) 289 0, J Keflective Verbs referring Cortarse la mano, Yo me corto la mano, Tu te cortas la mano, El se corta la mano, Ella se corta la mano, Nosotros nos cortamos la mano, Vosotros OS cortais la mano, Ellos {m.) se cortan la mano, Ellas (/.) se cortan la mano, V. (sivg.) se corta la mano, V. V. ipl.) se cortan la mano, Ponerse el sombrero, Yo me pongo el sombrero, Tu te pones el sombrero. El se pone el sombrero, Ella se pone el sombrero, Nosotros nos ponemos el sombrero, Vosotros OS poneis el sombrero, Ellos (m.) se ponen el sombrero, Ellas (/.) se ponen el sombrero, V. {sing.) se pone el sombrero, V. V. (pi.) se ponen el sombrero. Ponerselo, Yo me lo pongo, Tu te lo pones, El se lo pone, Ella se lo pone, Kosotros nos lo ponemos, Vosotros OS lo poneis, Ellos (m. ) se lo ponen, Ellas (/.) se lo ponen, V. (sing,) se lo pone, V. V. {pi. ) se lo ponen. J to parts of the Body. To cut one's hand. I cut my hand. Thou cuttest thy hand. He cuts his hand. She cuts her hand. We cut our hand. You cut your hand. They cut their hand. You cut your fuind. To put on one's hat. I put on my hat. Thou imttest on thy hat. He puts on his hat. She puts on lier hat. We put on our hat. You put on your Imt. They put on their hats. You put on your hat. To put it on. I put it on. Thou 2iuttest it on. He puts it 071. She puts it 07b. We put it 071. You put it on. Tliey put it on. You put it 071. Compound Tenses. Yo me he cortado la mano, / have cut my hand. Tu te has cortado la mano. Thou hast cut thy Jiand. El se ha cortado la mano, He has cut his hand. Ella se ha cortado la mano. Slie has cut her hand. 19 290 LESSON 53. Nosotros nos hemos cortado la mano, Vosotros OS habeis cortado la mano, Ellos (m.) se han cortado la mano, Ellas (/.) se lian cortado la mano, V. (sing.) se ha cortado la mano, V. V. (pi. ) se han cortado la mano, Yo me he puesto el sombrero, etc. Yo me lo he puesto, etc. ,.i JFe have cut our hand. You have cut your hand. They have cut their hand. You have cut your hand. I have put on my hat. etc. I have put it mi. etc. Ejemplos. Mateo se ensucio los dedos. Nos hemos quemado la mano. i Se ha quitado V. los zapatos ? No me los he quitado. i Se pondra Y. el sombrero nuevo ? Me pondre el viejo. i Quien le corta a V. las unas ? Mi madre me las corta. Cuando se va Y. ? Me voy ahora. Examples. Matthew soiled his fingers. We have burned our hand. Have you taken off j^our shoes ? I have not taken them off. Will you put on your i)ew hat ? I will put on the old one. Who cuts your nails ? My mother cuts them for me. When are you going away ? I am going away now. Vocabulario. El dedo, thefnger. El guante, the glove. La bota, the hoot. La cama, tlie bed. La camisa, the shirt. La cara, the face. La casaca, the coat. La media, the stocking. La pierna, the leg. La una, the nail, Adios, good by. Vocabulary, Afuera, out. Hinchado, swollen. Pues, ivell. Afeitar, 1. to shave. Lavar, 1. to wash. Marcharse, 1. to depart. Ponerse, 2. to put on. Quitarse, 1. to take off. Seguir, 3. to continue. Sentar, 1. to beconie. Exercise 105. 1. Vayase V. de aqui, Y. hace deniasiado ruido. 2. Me ire en iin momento. 3. i Se ha lavado Y. las manos ? 4. Me he lavado las KEFLECTIYE VERBS (CONTINUED). 291 manos y la cara. 5. [ Cuando se marcha su hermauo de V. ? 6. Se marchara esta noche a las ocho. 7. i Porque no se corta V. las unas ? 8. Me las corto todas las semanas. 9. Los hombres quiereii irse. 10. Pues, que se vayaii. 11. [ Porque no se quita V. las nicdias antes de acostarse 1 12. Yo me las quito en la cama. 13. Quitese V. el sombrero cuando V. entra en el cuarto. 14. Yo siempre me lo quito. 15. Vamonos, ja, es tarde. 16. No puedo irme ahora ; tengo todavia demasiado que hacer. 17. No puedo ponerme los zapatos, tengo los pies hinchados. 18. Ese muchacho se va a cortar los dedos si sigue jugando con el cuchillo. 19. Pongase V. otra camisa, la que V. tiene no esta limpia. 20. El pobre Juan se rompio la pierna, cuando cay6 de su caballo. 21. [ Cuantas veces se afeita V. ? 22. Me afeito todos los dias. . 23. [ Porque no se quita V. las botas ? 24. No puedo quitarmelas. 25. ^dios, amigo, me voy. Exercise 106. 1. Why do you go away so soon ? 2. I have to go away, it is already late. 3. Johnny is a bad boy, he would not take off his hat in Mrs. Riera's house. 4. Wash that child's face and take him out. 5. I cannot write, I must first warm my hands. 6. Do not go away yet, I need you. 7. When can I go away 1 8. You may go away in half an hour. 9. Would you go away if you could remain longer ? 10. I would not go away if I had not so much to do. II. Wash your hands and come with me. 12. Do not take off your hat, you have to go out yet. 13. I cannot put on these gloves, they are too small for me. 14. Poor Mr. Castro broke his arm the other day. 15. Which coat will you put on ? 16. I will put my blue coat on. 17. Let us go away, my father is waiting for us. 18. Which of your brothers is going away next week 1 19. They are both going away. 20. Take off that hat, it does not become you. 21. Good by, sir, we are going away. 22. If you fall down, you will break your head. 23. I have burned my hand, and I cannot" work to-day. 24. He put on his hat and coat, and went away without saying a word. 25. Felipe will not put on his shoes ; he says that he has sore feet. 26. Our friends are going away to-morrow. 27. Why do you not go with them ? 28. You know very well that I am obliged to remain in town ? 292 LESSON 54. Gram&tica. Grammar. 1 • The reflective pronoun is used in Spanish when the ohject of the verb is a part of the body, and in such cases the article takes the place of the possessive adjective before the noun : Yo me corto el dedo, / cut my finger. El se lava la cara, He washes his face. 2. The verbs ponerse, 2. to put on, and quitarse, 1. to tahe off, follow the same rule as above when referring to articles of clothing and others when destined for parts of the body : Me pongo el sombrero, I put on my hat. Me quito los guantes, / take off my gloves. leccion LIT. lesson LIT. PERIPHRASTIC VERBS. Hacerse, Haber de, ^ Meterse, Tener de. Ponerse, Haber menester de. ' must, shall. Volverse, Tener menester de, Llegar a ser. ' to become. Deber de. Veiiir a ser, Iree hacieudo, Placer, 2. a Venir a ser, Gustar,!. V to like, to please. Venir a parar, , Agradar, 1. J Conjugation. Hacerse, 2. meterse, 2. ponerse, 2. volverse, 2. to become. Present Indicative. / become. Yo me hago, Tu te haccs, El se hace, Ella se liace, Nosoti'os nos hacemos, Vosotros OS haceis. thou becmnest. he becomes, she becomes, we become, you becmne. PERIPHRA.STIC VERBS. 293 Ellos (m.) se hacen, Ellas (/.) se hacen, V. {sing.) se hace, V. V. {pi.) se hacen. ,1 they become, you become. Preterite Indefinite. Me he hecho, Te has hecho, El se ha hecho, Ella se ha hecho, Nosotros nos hemos hecho, Vosotros OS habeis hecho, Ellos (m.) se han hecho, Ellas (/.) se han hecho, V. {sing.) se ha hecho, ) V. V. {pi.) se han hecho, ) I have become, thou hast become, he has become, she has become, we have become. y(m have become. they have becoine. you have become. Yo llego a ser, Yo vengo a ser, etc. Llegar, 1. venir a ser. Present Indicative. / become, etc. He llegado a ser, He venido a ser. Preterite Indefinite. I have become. Irse haciendo. Present Yo me voy haciendo, Tu te vas haciendo, El se va haciendo, Ella se va haciendo, Nosotros nos vanios haciendo, Vosotros OS vais haciendo, Ellos (w.) se van haciendo, Ellas (/.) se van haciendo, V. {sing.) se va haciendo, V. V. (pi.) se van haciendo, Indicative. / am becoming, thou art becoming, he is becoming, she is becoming. . we are becoming, you are becoming. they are becoming, you are becoming. 294 LESSON 54. Preterite Indefinite. Me lie ido haciendo, / have become. Te has ido haciendo, thou hast hecotne. Se ha ido haciendo, he or she has become. Nos hemos ido haciendo, we have become. Os habeis ido haciendo, you have become. Se han ido haciendo, they have become. V. (sing. ) se ha ido haciendo, ) , , -17 -\r / 7 \ -u '^ X. ' \ ( 2/ow have become. V. V. {pi.) se han ido haciendo, ) Haber, 2. tener menester de, haber de, deber de. Present Indicative. - Yo he menester de salir, / 7nust go out. etc. etc. Preterite Indefinite. He habido menester de salir, / have been obliged to go out. etc. etc. Gustar, 1. placer, 2. agradar, 1. to like, to please. Present Indicative (affirmatively). Me gusta or gustan, / like or like to. Te gusta or gustan, thou likest or likest to. Le gusta or gustan, he or she likes or likes to. Nos gusta or gustan, we like or like to. Os gusta or gustan, you like or like to. Les gusta or gustan, they like or like to. A V. le gusta or gustan (sing.), | ^^^ ^.^^ ^^. ^.^^ ^^_ A V. V. les gusta or gustan {pi.), * Present Indicative (interrogatively). I Me gusta {or gustan) a mi ? do I like (or do I like to) ? i Te gusta {or gustan) a ti ? dost thou like (or like to)? I Le gusta {or gustan) a el ? does he like (or like to) ? i Le gusta {or gustan) a ella ? does she like (or like to) ? PERIPHRASTIC VERBS. 295 I Nos gusta (or gustan) a nosotros ? i Os gusta (or gustan) a vosotros ? I Les gusta (or gustan) a ellos (m.) ? i Les gusta (or gustan) a ellas (/.) ? i Le gusta (or gustan) a V. (sing.) ? j Les gusta (or gustan) a V. V. (^Z.) ? c?o M7e Zfc^e (or like to) ? do you like (or like to) ? do they like (or like to) ? do you like (or like to) ? Vocabulario. El clialeco, tJie vest. £1 precio, tJie price. El prisionero, the prisoTier. El sastre, the tailor. La Uuvia, the rain. Los padres, the parents. Debil, loeak. De repente, suddenly. Despacio, sloidy. Honrado, honest. Loco, insane. OrguUoso, proud. Vocabulary. Otra cosa, something else. Sobre, about. Afusilar, 1. to shoot. Concluirse, 3. to end. Construir, 3. to build, Correr, 2. to run. Echarse, 1. to begin. Gritar, 1. to scream. Llamar, 1. to call. Odiar, 1. to hate. Bespetar, 1. to respect. Seguir, 3. to continue-. Exercise 107. 1. Mi hermano se ha hecho negociante. 2. Eete hombre no sabe nada, y se ha meticlo a medico. 3. Por sus talentos llego aquel oficial a ser general. 4. El tiempo se ha puesto tan malo, cjue no henios podido marcharnos. 5. Juan se puso tan malo, que creianios que se iba a morir. 6. Yo no se en que vendra a parar esta disputa. 7. Me es preciso salir manana muy temprano. 8. Si el enfermo sigue malo, habra que llamar al medico. 9. El hijo debe y ha de respetar a sus padres. 10. El general mando afusilar a los prisioneros. 11. Sobre eso, hay mucho que decir. 12. El muchacho se echo a correr despues de haber robado las manzanas. 13. [ Le gusta d V. la cerveza? 14. No me gusta mucho. 15. j Que se hard de nosotros si no recibimos dinero ! 16. Hemos menester de salir antes de las tres. 17. Nuestro amigo Felipe trabaja mucho, y se va haciendo rico. 18. Estando en la calle, se puso a gritar. 19. Muchos de mis amigos se han hecho ricos en America. 20. No me gustan estos libros, y asi no los leo. 21. Se dice que el padre de Enrique se ha vuelto loco. 22. Aquel hombre se volvio tan 'orgulloso que era odiado de todos. 23. Tendremos que pagarle a este hombre el precio que pide. 296 LESSON 54. 24. Mejor qniero ser pobre que robar. 25. El ano que vieiie me hare construir una casa mas grande. 26. No me agrada la conducta de este hombre. 27. Vamos mas despacio, a mi no me gusta andar tan ligero. 28. i A que ha venido a parar aquello ? 29. Todavia no se sabe. 30. No nos place que V. V. hagan eso. 31. Deje V. entrar a este hombre. Exercise 108. 1. My brother would have become a general if the war had not ended. 2. What will become of those two men ? 3. A bad prince seldom becomes a good king. 4. Being in the street, he became very- sick. 5. The poor man became so weak that he could not walk. 6. John is getting richer every day. 7. I do not like this man, I don't believe he is honest. 8. You will have to give him all the money he asks. 9. The thief began to run when he saw us. 10. What will become of those poor children ? 11. You will get sick if you are not more prudent. 12. When iron is exposed to rain it becomes rusty. 13. What w^ould you like to eat ? 14. I should like to eat some chicken. 15. I believe that man has become insane. 16. He has become a physician after having studied several years in Paris. 17. You will have to speak to him, if he comes again. 18. I am having a new vest .made by my tailor. 19. If you don't like this wine, I will give you something else. 20. The weather has suddenly become very cold. 21. I don't know what will become of that man. 22. Napoleon the First became great by his victories. 23. I have to stay at home until my brother returns. 24. He began to laugh when I told him that. 25. Are we going to read or to write ? 26. You are to read first. 27. If I call you, come immediately, and don't keep me waiting (make me wait). 28. Next year we are going to have a house built. 29. Henry has become rich in a few years. 30. My sister says that she does not like her new house. Gram^tica. Grammar. 1 • There are verbs besides the auxiliary verbs already men- tioned which may be called periphrastic verbs, because they are used not only to form the compound tenses of other verbs, but also to circumscribe the sentence. The verbs haber, 2. and tener, 2. followed by the preposition de, belong to this category, PERIPHRASTIC VERBS. 297 and so do certain active and neuter verbs taken reflectively or fol- lowed by the preposition a, as will be seen by the list above. 2. The verb to become, when expressing a change of condi- tion or profession by the subject, is rendered in Spanish by hacerse, 2. ponerse, 2. and meterse, 2. : Se ha hecho \ Se ha puesto > a medico, He has become a physician. Se ha metidoj 3* When the change of condition is not performed by the subject, but is a consequence of its merits, llegar a ser, venir a ser, or ser hecho are then used : Por sus talentos llego a ser (vino a ser By his talents he became physician or fue hecho) medico de camara, of the court. Note. — Irse haciendo is used to express a progressing action. 4, To become or to get is translated by ponerse, 2. to ex- press a change in health, and by the same verb and by vol- verse, 2. or hacerse, 2. if we express a change in the physical or moral condition of a person, animal, or thing : Se ha puesto enfermo, He has become sick. Se volvio loco, He became insane. 5, To result is best translated by ser, salir de, or venir a parar : Yo no se en que vendra a parar (que I don't know what the result of this saldra or que sera) de esta disputa, dispute will be. 6* To commence, when governing an Infinitive and ex- pressing a motion, or the feeling of joy and sadness, is ren- dered by empezar, 1. ponerse, 2. and echarse, 1. with the preposition a : Empezo a correr, He began to run. Se puso a reir, He began to laugh. Se echo a llorar, He began to cry. 298 LESSON 65. Leccion LV. Lesson LV. IMPERSONAL VERBS. Llover, 2. to rain. Llueve, Llovia, Llovio, Llovera, Lloveria, Que llueva, Que lloviese or lloviera. Ha llovido, Habia llovido, Hubo llovido, Habra llovido, Habria llovido. Que haya llovido, Que hubiese | j]^^,j^^^ Que hubiera ) Habierido llovido, Helar, 1. to freeze; Granizar, 1. to hail ; Deshelar, 1. to thaw ; Nevar, 1. to snow ; Tronar, 1. to thunder ; Lloviznar, 1. to drizzle ; Relampaguear, 1. to lighten; Ventear, 1. to blow ; Amaneoer,2. K^^^. Alborear, 1. ) Anochecer, 2. to grow dark ; It rains. It was raining. It did rain. It will rain. It should or would rain. That it may rain. That it might rain. It has rained. It had been raining. It had rained. It will have rained. It should or would have rained. That it may have rained. That it might have rained. Having rained. hiela, it freezes. graniza, it hails. deshiela, it thaws. nieva, it snows. truena, it thunders. llovizna, it drizzles. relampaguea, it lightens. ventea, it blows. ^^^^^'^^ \ it damis. alborea, ) anochece, it grows dark. Hacer, 2. and Haber, 2. impersonally. i Que tiempo hace ? • How is the weather ? Hace buen tiempo, \ j^ .^ ^^^ weather. Hace hermoso tiempo, Hace mal tiempo, Hace calor, Hace frio, It is bad weather. It is warm. It is cold. IMPERSONAL VERBS. 299 Hace viento, Hace sol, ( Hay sol, ) Hay luna, Hace lodo. Hay polvo, Hace dia, Hace noche, Acaecer, 2, Acontecer, 2. Suceder, 2. etc. It is windy. The sun shines. The moon shines. It is muddy. It is diisty. It is daylight. It is night. Importar, 1. to he important, to happen, Parecer, 2. to appear, to seem. Convenir, 3. to be proper. etc. Vocabulario. El invierno, the lointer. El lodo, the mud. El puerto, the port. El quitasol, the sunshade. El sobretodo, the overcoat. El trineo, the sleigh. El trueno, the thunder. La carreta, the cart. La estacion, h La luna, the moon. La milla, the mile. Vocabulary. La sociedad, the society. La ventana, the window. Algo, rather. A menudo, often. Comedido, ^oZi^e. Humedo, damp. Oscuro, dark. Preciso, necessary. Singular, si7igidar. Alegrarse, 1. to rejoice. Vestirse, 3. to dress. Exercise 109. 1 . [ Que hermoso tiempo hace hoy, no es verdad ? 2. Si, hace un tiempo de primavera. 3. [ Hace calor en su pais de V. ? 4. No hace tanto calor como aqui. 5. Hoy llueve demasiado, los muchachos no podran salir. 6. Esta noche habra luna, podremos dar un paseo en el parque. 7. [ Si sigue la lluvia, habra mucho lodo en las calles. 8. [ Que tiempo hard manana ? Y. puede estar seguro que hard mal tiempo. 9. Hay mucho sol ; tome V. su quitasol. 10. Ayer hizo bastante frio. 11. No hizo demasiado frio. 12. [ Que fue lo que sucedio? 13. Sucedio que nadie tenia dinero, cuando fue preciso pagar. 14. Si hace frio, pongase Y. el sobretodo. 15. Nunca hace demasiado frio para mi. 16. Ni para ml tampoco. 17. Ha nevado muy d menudo este invierno. 18. Abra Y. la ventana, y vea Y. que tiempo hace. 19. Esta helando. 20. Kelampagueo muchisimo 300 LESSON 55. anoche. 21. Conviene ser comedido en la sociedad. 22. Importa que salgamos temprano maiiana. 23. Acaece muchas veces que llueve y hiela al inismo tiernpo. 24. Es verdad que su hermano me ha dicho esto, pero yo no lo creo. 25. Yo amaneci en Toledo y anocheci en Madrid. 26. Me acaecieron muchas cosas en el viaje. 27. Anochece muy temprano ahora. 28. i Estii tronando ; oye V. el trueno ? 29. No es el trueno, es una carreta que esta pasando en la calle. 30. Si hace buen viento, llegaremos maiiana temprano al puerto. Exercise 110. 1. It is important to know who was the last person who entered the room. 2. A singular thing has occurred. 3. It seems as if you had nothing to say. 4. As soon as it dawns we will dress and leave the house. 5. If I had known that it was so cold, I should not have gone out. 6. It was so hot here last summer that we all went to the country. 7. It hailed last night, and I thought that it would also hail to-day. 8. It thundered and lightened the whole day, but it did not rain. 9. Did it snow this morning 1 10. No, but it will either snow or rain in a moment. 11. It dawns very early in this season. 12. I wish it would snow every day, that we might go in a sleigh. 13. How many miles are there from here to B. ? 14. It is too late to go there to-day. 15. Dear friend, how glad I am to see you again. 16. It is too damp to-day to go out. 17. It is very dark here, open the windows. 18. It is not daylight yet. 19. It was very fine weather yesterday. 20. It was rather cold. 21. Was it cold when you were in the country ? 22. It was colder there than last year at the same time. 23. I think that it will be very warm this summer. 24. Do you know what happened to my brother ? 25. Yes, John told me what happened to him. 26. It is very muddy, put on your other shoes. 27. If it rains, I will lend you my umbrella. 28. It was raining, but it does not rain now. 29. It is very windy. 30. They say that it is just as warm in the country as in the city. Gram^tica. Grammar. 1, Impersonal verbs can only be used in the Infinitive or in the third person singular without any pronoun : Llueve, it rains ; graniza, it hails. GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 301 2» Impersonal verbs are either essentially impersonal^ that is, cannot be used otherwise, as Hover, 2. to rain ; nevar, 1. to snow ; etc., or they are accidentally impersonal, that is, they may be formed from any active or neuter verb, 3* The verbs amanecer, 1. to daivn, and anochecer, 2. to grow darky when used as neuter verbs, may be conjugated with all persons. We may therefore say : Amanecimos en Toledo, y anocheci- mos en Madrid, It was daylight when we reached To- ledo, and night vjhen we reached Madrid. 4, The impersonal verbs acaecer, 2. acontecer, 2. convenir, 3. importar, 1. parecer, 2. suceder, 2. admit a subject and agree with the same when accompanied by the pronouns me, te, le, etc. : Me acaecieron muchas cosas, Many things happened to me. Le sucedleron varias desgracias, Several misfortunes happeiied to him. Leccion LYI. Lesson LVI. GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. Verbs requiring Prepcsitioiis after them. Ejemplos. V. abusa de nuestra amistad. El se acerca de (a) la ventana. Yo me aeiierdo de el. Me alegro de ver a V. El se aleja de nosotros. El se inelina al vicio. Yo adhiero a mi opinion. El esta acostumbrado a la limpieza. Ha sido condenado d la prision. El pais abunda en hierro. El ha caido e7i en*or. Yo confio 671 V. . Examples. You abuse our friendship. He approaches the window. I remember him. I am glad to see you. He goes away from us. He inclines towards vice. I adhere to my opinion. He is accustomed to cleanliness. He has been sentenced to prison. The country is abundant in iron. He has fallen into a mistake. I trust to you. 302 LESSON 56. Hemos convenido en esto. Yo no creo en eso. Se caso cmi mi liermana. Cuniplo con mi obligacion. Me he escusado coii el. Me molesta con sus visitas. El calla por miedo. Me doy por vencido. Estoy po7' el. Pecamos por orguUo. We have agreed to that. I do not believe in that. He married my sister. I do my duty. I have apologized to him. He annoys me with his visits. He is silent through fear. I consider myself as conquered. I abide by him. We sin through pride. Vocabulario. El avaro, the miser. El beneficio, the benefit. El consejo, the advice. El pleito, the lawsuit. El reo, the culprit. La costa, the expense. La fiebre, the fever. La friolera, the trifle. La lagrima, the tear. La sentencia, the judgiiient. La yerba, the grass. Acostumbrado, accustoyned. Agradecido, thank f\d. Bordado, trimmed. Acer car se, 1. to approach. Vocabulary. Adherir, 3. to adhere. Alejarse, 1. to leave. Apartar, 1. to remove. Apelar, 1. to appeal. Censurar, 1. to censure. Colmar, 1. to overwhelm. Condenar, 1 . to condemn. Bedicar, 1. to devote. Besconfiar, 1. to distrust. Embarcar, 1. to engage. Entender, 2. to understand. Formalizarse, 1. to get veoced. Habituarse, 1- to accustom one's self. Interesarse, 1. to take interest; Jactarse, 1. to boast. Exercise 111. 1. Si V. adhiere d mi opinion, adherire yo d la snya. 2. El reo ha sido condenado a muerte. 3. Acuerdese V. de mi. 4. El rey colmo d su ministro de beneficios. 5. Este hombre padece de fiebres. 6. Censuran d este rico de avaro. 7. Con mis consejos le he apartado de malas compafLias. 8. Mi hermano ha sido condenado en las costas del pleito. 9. No se acerque V. de la ventana, pues hace frio. 10. Estoy acostumbrado a estos trabajos. 11. V. no tiene razon de acusarme de esto. 12. Estoy agradecido d los beneficios que he recibido. 13. Me aleje de aquella tierra con las lagrimas en los ojos. 14. Me alegro de verle d V. bueno. 15. El negociante ha apelado de GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 303 la sentencia. 16. El trage de la reina estaba bordacio de oro. 17. V. no deberia builarse de este hombre. 18. Yo no me burlo de nadie. 19. He cambiado mi caballo por otro. 20. Nos hemos cansado del viaje. 21. El se casara con aquella senora tan rica. 22. Aquel joven dedica todo su tienipo al estudio. 23. Desconfio de este hombre sin conocerle. 24. Temo que Y. se embarque en malos negocios. 25. No entendemos nada de eso. 26. Y. Y. se ban formalizado por una frio- lera. 27. No tiene Y. razon de gloriarae de esa accion. 28. No hemos podido habituarnos a ese pais. 29. Nos hemos interesado en este joven, pero el nos ha enganado. 30. El pobre hombre se man- tenia de frutas y de yerbas. Exercise 11 2. 1. If you make fun of me, 1 will tell it to your father. 2. Has the soldier been sentenced to death ? 3. He has been sentenced to (the) prison. 4. He boasts of a thing of which he ought to be ashamed. 5. Our teacher takes great interest in our studies. 6. Do you remem- ber my brother ? 7. I remember him very well, but I don't remem- ber your cousin. 8. I am doing something now to which I am not accustomed. 9. Why do you not come near the fire ? 10. I am not cold, I am very well here. 11. I am very glad to know that you have not lost your money in that business. 12. We have exchanged our coffee for tea. 13. I do not understand anything about this mat- ter. 14. You are wrong to distrust that man, he is your friend. 15. He accuses me of having deceived him, but he does not tell the truth. 16. I adhere to what I have said. 17. If you engage in that business you will lose all your money. 18. That young man sup- ports his family with his work. 19. Remember what I told you w hen you see your brother. 20. We are thankful for the benefits we have received. 21. Do not go away from the window. 22. He is very glad to see that his brother studies so much. 23. If you appeal from the judgment, you will be condemned a second time. 24. I have become tired of that house. 25. Do you think that Mr. Mar- tinez will marry Miss Kuiz ? 26. I think he will marry her next month. Gram&tica. Grammar. 1. Many verbs which sometimes in English are not followed by any preposition, govern in Spanish either the genitive, the 304 LESSON 57. dative, or the ablative, with the prepositions de, a, COn, por, para, sobre, etc. Some of these verbs may even, without changing their meaning, govern different prepositions, as : Instruir a alguno dc, en otsohre algo, To inform some one of something. Other verbs change their meaning according to the preposition which follows them : Creo en el, / believe in him. Me creo de esta cosa, / am convinced of that thing. 2. Most reflective verbs, and those which express the move- ments of the soul or mind, want, fulness, separation, accusation, blame, etc., generally govern the preposition de. Observation. — It would be difficult to give definite rules for the govern- ment of the other prepositions. The Grammar of the Spanish Academy con- tains a long list of verbs with their corresponding prepositions. We have omitted the same, as we consider that the student will have to depend princi- pally on practice and reading to master these as v/ell as other difficulties. Leccion LYII. Lesson LVII. GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. Ejemplos. Examples. Este hombre es digno de su posicion. This man is worthy of his position. Estoy deseoso de verle. I am anxious to see him. Mi hermano es alto de cuerpo. My brother is tall in size. Aquella sehora es palida de color. That lady has a pale complexion. Nuestra casa esta cercana de la Our house is near the city. ciudad. Estoy cierto de su venida. I am sure of his coming. Este vino es agrio al gusto. This wine is sour to the taste. El es amable a todos. He is amiable towards everybody. Esto es benefico a la salud. This is good for the health. El es fiel a sus amigos. He is faithful to his friends. El esta triste por la muerte de su He is sad about the death of his hermano. brother. Estoy alegre cou la llegada de mi I am glad at the arrival of my hermano. brother. GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 305 Vocabulario. El compaiiero, the companion. El heroe, the Jiero. El pesar, the grief. El poder, the poicer. El principio, the principle. El temor, the fear. La alabanza, the praise. La botella, the bottle. La costumbre, the manner. La mina, the mine. La naranja, the orange. La razon, the reason. La ruina, the ruin. La siiplica, tlie entreaty. Aceptable, acceptable. Ansioso, eager. Codicioso, greedy. Conforme, conforrmxMy. Vocabulary. Despreciado, despised. Digno, worthy. Encendido, red. Exento, exempted. Favorable, favorable. Incapaz, incapable. Indigno, unworthy. Inmdvil, immovable. Lleno, full. Maduro, ripe. Penoso, hard, painfid. Foderoso, powerful. Fropenso, inclined. Fropicio, propitious. Sorprendido, surprised. Descascarar, 1. to peel. Obrar, 1. to act. Exercise 113. 1. Este hombre es muy codicioso de dinero. 2. V. esta lleno de soberbia, y V. no tiene motivo para ello. 3. Mi hermano ha sido exento del servicio militar. 4. Es una cosa facil de hacer, y sin embargo V. la hace muy mal. 5. Los habitantes de aquella isla son puros de costumbres. 6. Es penoso de ver a ese hombre correr a la ruina. 7. Hemos obrado conforme a la razon. 8. Don Pedro es un hombre despreciado de todos y indigno del empleo que ocupa. 9. Esta fruta no es buena para comer. 10. V. es incapaz de comprender nuestras ideas. 11. Estoy oontento con lo que tengo, y no deseo nada mas. 12. La proposicion que V. nos hace es aceptable para todos. 13. La pobre mujer se quedo inmovil de temor. 14. La accion de ese hombre es digna de alabanza. 15. La vida humana esta Uena de pesares. 16. El heroe esta siempre ansioso de gloria ; y, el avaro, codicioso de dinero. 17. Este muchacho es muy bonito de cara. 18. Esta lengua es facil de aprender. 19. Aquel pais es rico en granos, pero pobre en minas. 20. Estoy cierto de mi asercion. 21. El hombre verdaderamente liberal es fiel a sus principios. 22. La libertad es j)ropicia a las ciencias y a las artes. 23. ^ Porque esta V. tan encendido de cara ? 24. Porque acabo de correr, y tengo mucho calor. 25. La naranja madura es facil de descascarar. 20 306 ' LESSON 57. Exercise 114. 1. That fruit is not good to eat, it is not ripe yet. 2. If you act in (de) that way you will be despised by everybody. 3. You ought to be satisfied with what you have. 4. I am anxious to see your brother, when does he arrive I 5. He will be here to-morrow. 6. That action is unworthy of an honest man. 7. The mighty are inclined to abuse their power. 8. It is easy to say that, but it is not so easy to do as you think. 9. I am certain of what I say. 10. The wreath er is very favorable for our journey. II. That bottle is full of wine. 12. That country is very rich in gold mines. 13. We are most anxious to know the truth. 14. I knew that you were incapable of acting thus. 15. That child is beloved by all his companions. 16. They have acted according to (the) reason. 17. Life is full of misery. 18. I am tired of the conduct of this man. 19. We are not accustomed to see so many people in our small town. 20. I am surprised at what that man has told us. 21. He is deaf to all our entreaties. 22. Those men are poor in means, but rich in credit. 23. They are very sad about the death of their father. 24. Your father's proposition is ac- ceptable to everybody. 25. The poor servant was all his life faithful to his master. Gram^tiea. Grammar. 1, Many adjectives have in Spanish a meaning by them- selves, while others require a complement to their meaning, as dignO) worthy ; propenso, inclined ; comparable, comparable ; etc. : Es una accion digna {of what ?) de It is an action worthy of praise. elogio, Los poderosos son propensos {to The mighty are inclined to abuse what?) a abusar de su poder, their power. 2. An adjective may govern a noun, an Infinitive, or a sen- tence in the Subjunctive mood : Fiel a sus amigos, Faithful to his friends, Diestro en saltar, Skilful in jumping. El es indigno de que le compaclezcan, He is unworthy of being pitied. 3« Those adjectives which express worthiness ^ unworthinesSy facility, difficulty, fulness, want, scarcity, eagerness, anxiety, de- GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 307 5^Vv, exception, moral or physical qualities, moral or physical sepa- ration, distance, proximity, certainty, uncertainty, danger, etc., generally govern the preposition de : Digno de recompensa, Worthy of reward. Indigno de perdon, Unworthy of pardon. Facil de hacer, Easy to do. Penoso de hacer, Difficidt to do. Lleno de soberhia, Full of pride, Escaso de conceptos. Poor in ideas. Deseoso de trabajar, Desirous of working. Codicioso de diiiero, Eager for money. Gordo de talle, Stout in body. Blando de corazoii, Soft in heart. Inseparable de sus aniigos, Inseparable from his friends. Cercano de la eiudad, Near the city. Lejano de la eiudad, Far from the city. Cierto de su venida, Certairi of his arrival. Seguro de peligro, Sure of danger. etc. etc. 4t Adjectives expressing the feelings of the soul or mind take the prepositions de, por, or COn : Inmovil de tomor, Immovable with fear. Triste por su muerte. Sad at his death. Alegre con su llegada, Pleased at his arrival. Note. — When the adjective precedes a verb in the Infinitive mood, the preposition de may always be used : Contento de ver, Glad to see you. 5« In most other cases the adjectives require the same prepo- sitions as in English. 6« Past Participles used as adjectives may govern de or por : Es un hombre despreciado de (por) He is a man despised by all. todos, 7t There are also adjectives which vary in meaning, accord- ing to the preposition which follows them : Esta fruta es buena para comer, This fruit is good to eat. Esta, naranja es buena de descascarar. This orange is easy to peel. 308 LESSON 58. Leccion LYIII. Lesson LVIII. THE ADVERB. Adverbs of Place. Alii, there. Aqui, aca, iiere. Alii, there. Alia, ymider. Cerca (de), near, Lejos (de), far, Donde, where, Adonde, whereto. Dedonde, whcrefrom. Adentro, within, etc. Dentro (de), in. Fuera (de), out. Arriba, up. Abajo, down. Adelante, fm^ward. Atras, hack. Delante (de), before.^ Detras (de), behind. Encima (de), upon, etc. Adverbs of Time. Hoy, to-day. Pronto, soon. Manana, to-morrow. Siempre, always. Ahora, now. Nunca, Luego, afterwards. Jamas, Tarde, late. Ya, already. Temprano, early. Mientras, whilst. Presto, quick. Aiin, yet, still, etc. etc. Adverbs of Manner. Bieri, well. Eecio, loud. Mai, badly. Despacio, slowly. Asi, so, thus. Depriesa, quickly, Bajo, low. Alto, loud, etc. etc. Adverbs of Quantity. Mucho, much. Miiy, very. Poco, little. Tfin, so, as. Sobrado, \ Tan to, so much, as much. Harto, > enough. Cuanto, how miich. Bastante, ) Demasiado, too rmcch. etc. etc. THE ADVERB. 309 Adverbs of Comparison. Mas, trior e. Mejor, better. Menos, less. Peor, worse. etc. etc. ♦ Adverbs of Order. Primeramente, first. Sucesivamente, successively, Ultimamente, lastly. Antes (de), before. Despues (de), after. Adverbs of Affirmation. Si, yes. Verdaderamente, verily. Ciertamente, certainly. Indudableniente, icndoubtedly. etc. etc. Adverbs of Negation. No, 710. Nada, nothing, not anything. Tampoco, neither, not eitJier. De ninguna manera, nowise. etc. etc. Tal vez, Quiza, Qiiizas, etc. Adverbs of Uncertainty. Acaso, perhaps. Por ventura, Por fortuna, etc. Adverbial Expressions. i perhaps (in interro- I gati&ns). Sobre poco mas 6 menos, A lo menos, A diesti-a y siniestra, A duras penas. De a qui para alli, ^ De aca para alia, I A qui y alli, f Aca y alia, aculla, j Abotit, more or less. At least. Right and left. With great trouble. Here and there. Formation of Adverbs vrith mente (ly). Facil, facil mente, Constante, constantemente, Triste, tristemente, Alegre, alegremente, Elegante, elegantemente, Sabio, sabiamente. JEasy, easily. Constant, constantly. Sad, sadly. Joyful, joyfully. Elegant, elegantly. Wise, wisely. 310 LESSON 58. Delicado, delicadamente, Claro, claraniente, Verdadero, verdaderamente. Delicate, delicately. Clear, clearly. True, truly. Vocabulario, £1 baston, the cane. La desgracia, the misfortune. La fuerza, the strength. La groseria, the rudeness. La tarde, the afternoon. Acaso, perhaps. Afuera, without. Amargo, Utter. BajOy low. Callado, silent. Giego, blind. Claro, clear. Conciso, concise. Cortes, polite. Vocabulary. Cruel, cruel. Despues, after, afterward. Probable, probable. Tal vez, perhaps. Acompanar, 1. to accompany. Arrepentirse, 3, to repent. Conseguir, 3. to obtain. Escuchar, 1. to listen to, Faltar, 1. to fail, Oir, 3. to hear. Provenir, 3. to result. Referir, 3. to relate. Eesponder, 2. to answer. Exercise 115. 1. I Como me ha enganado este honibre ! 2. Hemos sieinpre sabido nuestra leccion desde que vamos a la escuela. 3. He venido aca tem- prano para ver a su hermano de V. 4. Ciceron hablo sabia y elo- cuentemente. 5. Cesar escribio clara, concisa y elegantemeiite. 6. Yo le hable cortesmente y el me respondio con groseria. 7. Los mucha- chos entraron calladitamente, pues la madre estaba mviy mala. 8. Jamas vi tal cosa. 9. Si V. qiiiere, iremos manana al teatro. 10. Le referire a V. la historia, si ya no la sabe V. 11. Yo creo (j^ue V. podra conseguir facilmente el dinero que V. necesita. 12. Esta casa debe haber costado mucho dinero. 13. Vengo de afuera, y be visto una cosa muy curiosa. 14. Aqui mataron a un hombre, segun he oido. 15. Primero vino su hermano de V. y despues los otros amigos. 16. [ Acaso vendra su padre hoy? 17. Vendra tal vez esta noche d las diez. 18. El anda de aqui para alii sin saber donde sen- tarse. 19. V. ha sido muy imprudente, y de ahi proviene su desgra- cia. 20. [A que hora vendrd el medico? 21. Ya viene. 22. Lo hare si ya no me faltan las fuerzas. 23. No ire alia, pues estoy mejor donde estoy. 24. j Que tristisimamente llora esta mujer ! 25. Hable V. claro, si V. quiere que yo le comprenda. 26. Nunca volvere a ver a mi querido amigo. THE ADVERB. 311 Exercise 116. 1. If yoii do not pay him, you will repent it bitterly. 2. These two friends are constantly together. 3. You must act prudently if you do not wish to lose your money. 4. Your friend has treated his sister very cruelly. 5. Your exercise is not well done ; you have written it badly. 6. You would have acted more wisely if you had not answered that man. 7. I could not listen politely to all he said about you. 8. I have blindly followed your instructions. 9. Speak low, my friend, there is somebody in the other room. 10. How do you do to-day? 11. I am pretty well, thank you. 12. When will your sister arrive ? 13. She will probably arrive this afternoon. 14. Look for my cane, I wish to go out now. 15. Shall you accom- pany your friends to Paris? 16. I shall perhaps accompany them. 17. If you come to-morrow, do not come too late. 18. I shall not be able to come before nine o'clock. 19. Our house is already finished. 20. They walk the whole day here and there without doing anything. 21. Do not speak so loud, I have the headache. 22. I was near him when he was wounded. 23. He was before me, and my brother was behind me. 24. Come quick, I have something to tell you. 25. This author writes very well. 26. We walked very slowly and arrived too late. Gram^tica. Grammar. 1. Place of the Adverb. 1. The Adverb is generally placed in Spanish after the verb. In compound tenses it is placed after the participle, and never between the same and the auxiliary : El discipulo ha siempre estudiado The scholar has always studied his su leccion, lesson. Although, according to the rules of syntax, we may deviate from this rule, the student would do well to adhere to the same, and thus avoid the mistakes which may result from any deviation. 2. A few adverbs must always stand before the verb, as no, etc., and the adverbs of exclamation : cuanto, cuan, como, etc. : i Como me ha enganado ! Hov) he has deceived me ! The following abverbs also precede the verb : apenas, hardly ; CUando, xohen; luego que, as soon as; asi que, so soon as; 312 LESSON 58. mientras que, whilst; dbnde, where; de donde, whence, and a few others. 2. Formation of Adverbs. 1. Adverbs are formed from adjectives in two different ways : Adjectives having the same termination for both genders add mente (corresponding to the Englisli termination ly) to form the adverb : Facil, facilmente, Easy, easily. Dulce, dulcemente, Sweet, sweetly. FeHz, feUzmente, Happy, happily. Igual, igualmente, Equal, equally. 2. Adjectives having a different form for the masculine and feminine add mente to the feminine form : Sabio, sabianiente, Wise, wisely. Claro, claraiiiente, Clear, clearly. Honrado, honradamente, Honest, honestly. Rico, ricamente, Rich, richly. 3. Superlatives may be formed from all adverbs ending in mente : Tristisimamonte, Most sadly. Dulcisimainente, Most sweetly. 4. When several adverbs follow each other in the same sen- tence, it is sufficient to add the termination mente to the last adverb, while all the preceding adverbs take the form of the feminine of the adjective : El habla sabia y elocuentemente, He speaks wisely and eloquently. El escribe clara, concisa y elegan- He writes clearly, concisely , and temente, elegantly. The same rule is to be observed for the superlative. 5. When different adverbs in mente occur in the same sen- tence without modifying the same verb, it is preferable, for the sake of euphony, to replace one of the adverbs by a noun con- nected with the preposition Con : Hable cortesmente y el respondio / spoke courteously and he an- con groseria, swered rudely (with nideness). THE PREPOSITION. 313 6. Adverbs ending in mente govern the same prepositions as the adjectives from which they are formed : Anteriormente a, etc. Anterior to, etc. 7. Adverbs cannot be formed from all adjectives. Such are : verde, green; azul, blue; enfermo, ill; poco, little; mucho, much, etc. 8. A few adverbs may be used diminutively or augmenta- tively, but only in a familiar way : Se entro calladitamente y la tomo He entered very quietly and took suavitam elite por la mano, her very gently hy the hand. 9. Certain adjectives may be used in Spanish as adverbs, and remain then invariable. Such are the adjectives : claro, clear, clearly; OSCUro, obscure, obscurely ; derecho, straight; torcido, twisted ; fuerte, strong, strongly, etc. 10. The adverb ya, which is generally rendered by already, is sometimes rendered by indeed, since, now, etc. : Ya ha llegado, He has already arrived. Ya de dia, ya de iioche, Now in daytime, now at night. Ya que V. lo sabe, Since you know it. Ya se arrepeiitira V. , You will indeed repent it. Leccion LIX. Lesson LIX. THE PREPOSITION. A, to, at. Hacia, towards, to. Ante, before. Hasta, as far as, until, till, ei Con, with. Para, for, in order to, to. Contra, against. Por, hy, through, for. De, of, from. Segun, according to, as. Besde, from, since. Sin, without. En, in. Sobre, on, upon, about, above, Entre, between, ammig. Tras, behind, besides. 314 LESSON 59. Prepositions and Prepositional Plirases requiring de after them. Ademas, besides. Alrededor, around. Antes, before (ref. to time). A pesar, notwithstanding. Cerca, near. Debajo, under. Delante, before. Dentro, in. Despues, after. Detras, behind. Encima, on, tcpon. Enfrente, opposite. Fuera, out. Por medio, by means, Prepositions followed by d. En cuanto, as far. Junto, next. Ejemplos. Vendre a las ocho. Comparecio ante el juez. Estoy con mi padre. Estamos contra V. Se liabla de V. Saldre en el mes de Agosto. Eran entre quinze a veinte hombres. Mire V. hdcia el norte. Voy hdsta mi casa. Trabajo para ganar. Va a Madrid por un ano. Lo digo segwi me lo han dicbo. Vive sin trabajar. El libro esta sobre la mesa. Voy tras V. Vendre despues de las tres. El esta detras de mi. El perro esta debajo de la mesa. Examples. I will come at eigbt o'clock. He appeared before the judge. 1 am with my father. We are against you. They speak of you. 1 shall leave in the month of August. There were between fifteen and twenty men. Look towards the north. I am going as far as my house. I work to earn. He goes to Madrid for a year. I tell it as they told me. He lives without working. The book is on the table. I go behind you. I will come after three o'clock. He is behind me. The dog is under the table. Vocabulario. El empleo, the employment, situation. El grito, the outcry. El marinero, the sailor. El numero, the number. El principiante, the begimner. Vocabulary, El real, the shilling. El reo, the culprit. El sueno, tlie dream. El verso, the verse. La bondad, the kindness. THE PREPOSITION. 315 La cadena, the chain. La caridad, the charity. La comida, the dinner. La gota, the drop. La insolencia, the insolence. La mascara, the mask. La prueba, the proof. La vara, the yard. Abundante, abundant. Borracho, intoxicated. Cor to, short. Culpado, guilty. Derecho, right. Sentado, seated. Gojear, 1. to limpy to be lame. Comparecer, 2. to appear. Contar, 1. to count. Costar, 1. to cost. Dirigir, 3. to direct. Disputar, 1. to dispute. Esceder, 2. to eocceed. Mover, 2 to move, to turn. Far arse, 1. to stand. Freg^ntar, 1. to inquire. Suministrar, 1, to offer. Exercise 117. 1. Esta carta va dirigida a mi hermano. 2. Andamos de calle d calle sin saber donde vamos. 3. Este paiio se vende a veinte reales la vara. 4. He tornado el dinero a tres por ciento. 5. El vino se per- dio gota a gota. 6. El reo comparecio ante el juez, y fue condenado a la carcel por veinte aiios. 7. Con enseiiar tambien se aprende. 8. La vida del honibre con ser tan corta, nos suministra abundantes prnebas de que no es un sueiio. 9. Esta casa esta cerca de la de mi hermano. 10. Este vino es de diez anos. 11. Mi amigo cojea del pie derecho. 12. Nos vestimos de marineros para ir al baile de mascaras. 13. Yo hare esto para V., pero no de balde. 14. Yo iria de buena gana al campo con V. 15. Tengo un empleo y gano desde ayer. 16. Nadie le escedia a este hombre en bondad. 17. Entre otras cosas he visto un cuadro muy hermoso en la casa del medico. 18. Quintana cuenta con razon a Herrera entre (or en) el numero de los primeros autores espaiioles. 19. Este hombre hasta tuvo la insolencia de venir bor- racho a mi casa. 20. Para principiante, no ha hecho V. mal este trabajo. 21. La caridad es sobre todas las virtudes. 22. Se disputa sobre el sentido de este verso. 23. Moviose la conversacion sobre vinos f ran- ceses. 24. Tras ser culpado, es el que mas levanta el grito. 25. Este reloj me cuesta cien pesos sin la cadena. 26. Los hombres estaban sentados al rededor de la mesa. Exercise 118. 1. That lady comes from Europe. 2. She used to live at our house before the death of her husband. 3. What were you doing under the 316 LESSON 59, table? 4. I was looking for my pen. 5. We can do nothing without money. 6. Will you go as far as the church for me ? 7. I will accompany you as far as that street. 8. You speak without knowing what you say. 9. Here are some apples for you. 10. My sister lives far from us. 11. Do you know the lady who lives opposite your house] 12. Yes, she is an English lady. 13. Why do those boys walk behind us i 14. They are going to the school next to our house. 15. My brother will come first, and I will go afterwards. 16. My father is in his room and is writing to my mother. 17. Do nothing without consulting me. 18. Come and (a) see us this evening with your friends. 19. Do not stand before me, I cannot see anything. 20. His sons were seated around the table. 21. Those two ladies live opposite the church. 22. Let us go as far as the park. 23. The dog is under the table. 24. There is a garden behind the house, and a church behind the garden. 25. I was seated next to my brother, and my sister next to him. 26. Here is money for your din- ner. 27. I received these goods by railroad. 28. Has anybody in- quired for me ? 29. There came a man who inquired for you, and who went away when he heard that you were not at home. 30. We must stay here until to-morrow. Gram^tica. Grammar. 1* The preposition a, which has the same meaning in Span- ish as the English prepositions to and at, is also used to express : 1. The way in which something is done : A pie, On foot. 2. The manner, usage, or form of a thing : A la moda, In the fashion. 3. The motive or aim of an action : I A que proposito, To what end ? 4. The instrument used to perform an action : Le eche a palos, / drove him away with a stick. 5. Superiority or advantage : Le gane a correr, / heat him running. THE PREPOSITION. 317 6. Amusement or entertainment : Juega a las cartas, He plays cards. 7. Repetition of an interrupted but continued action : Gota a gota, Drop by drop. 8. To form a great number of adverbial locutions : A la verdad, Truly. A lo menos, At least. 2. The preposition ante, before, means in the presence of : Ante el juez, Before the judge. It often takes the place of antes que or antes de, and indi- cates the preference of one thing or action over another : Ante todo or antes de todo, Before everything. 3. The preposition con, with, may also mean although or by when accompanied by the Infinitive : Con ensehar tambien se aprende, By teaching one also learns. La Vida del hombre, con ser tan The life of man, although short, corta, etc. etc. Con is also used to form certain locutions : Con que V. ha llegado, So you have arrived. 4* The preposition de, which is generally rendered by of or from, is also used : 1. To express the time at which a thing happens : De dia, In daytime. 2. The proper time to do a thing : Es tiempo de dormir, It is tinu to sleep. 3. Abundance or scarcity : Abundante de trigo, Abundant in grain. 4. When standing between an adjective and an Infinitive, and when rendered in English by the preposition to : Dificil de alcanzar, Difficult to reach. 5. Between two nouns referring to the same object : El bribon del criado, That rogue of a, servant. S18 LESSON 59. 6. In exclamations of sorrow and pity : j Pobre de mi padre ! My poor father ! 7. The age: El vino era de dos afios, The wine was two years old. 8. To designate the part affected in referring to a physical or moral infirmity : Cojea del pie derecho, He is laine in the right foot, 9. The way of dressing : Vistidse de marinero, He dressed as a sailor. Estaba de Into, He was in mourning. 10. When the word pedazo, piece, or another noun is under- stood : Probe del asado, I tasted (a piece of) the roast meat. Dame de vestir, Give ine (clothes) to dress. 11. To form many adverhial locutions : De balde, for nothing ; de veras, truly. De modo que, so that ; de buena gana, willingly. The preposition de may finally stand sometimes for por or con ; Lo hizo de {or por) miedo, He did it out of fear. Lo hize de {or con) buen corazon, / did it with a good heart, 5$ The preposition en, m, is also used : 1. Eefore the gerund : En diciendo eso, Saying that. 2. To express a continued and repeated act : De rato en rato, From inoment to mojnent. This preposition always governs the ablative. 6t The preposition para, for, to (in order to\ also expresses an act ready to be performed : Estoy para partir, / am about leaving. 7» The preposition por, for, by, though, also expresses : 1. The means, etc. : Casarse por procurador, To marry by proxy. DEFECTIVE VERBS. 319 2. The motive, etc. : Lo hace por fuerza, He does it hy force,. 3. The price, etc. : Por poco dinero, For little trvoney, 4. Equality, etc. : Uno vale por dos, Otu is worth tivo. 5. What happens in favor of a person or thing : Empeiiarse por el, To occupy one's self for him, 6. What is done in place of a person or thing : Trabajo por el, I work in his place, 7. Exchange : Le doy mi sombrero por el suyo, I give you my hat for yours, 8. The estimation in which a person or thing is held : Esta tenido por bueno. He is considered as a good man. Leccion LX. Lesson LX, DEFECTIVE VERBS, \st Conjugation, Antojarse, to occur to the mind (only used in the third person). Pesar, to repent (only used in the third person singular). 2d Conjugation. Facer, to graze. Placer, to please. Baer, to rub off. Boer, to gnaw. Beponer, to reply. Soler, to be accustomed. Taner, to play. Yacer, to lie. 3d Conjugation. Abolir, to abolish. Asir, to seize. Arrecirse, to be benumbed with cold. Erguir, to erect. 320 LESSON 60. Gram^tica. Grammar. 1, Pacer, 2. to graze ; raer, 2. to rub off; and roer, 2. to gnaw ; are not used in the first person singular of the Fresente de indicativo nor of the suhjuntivo, unless we except the verb roer, which, according to some grammarians, makes in these tenses roa, roas, roa, and according to others roya, royas, roya. 2. Reponer, 2. in the sense of to reply, is only used in the Preterito definido of the Indicative : repuse, repusiste, repuso, etc. 3t Soler, 2. is generally only found in the following tenses and persons : Suelo, / am accustomed to; sueles, suele, solemos, soleis, suelen. Solia, / ivas accustomed to; solias, solia, soliamos, soliais, solian. The other tenses are used very seldom, the first Tmperfecto de suhjuntivo, soliera, and the second Condicioncd, soldria, never occur. 4. Taiiir, 3. to play, has no first person singular, as it had formerly, namely tango, derived from the Latin. 3« Yacer, 2. to lie, is conjugated thus : Gerundio : Yaciendo. Indicativo presente : Yazgo, yace. Imperfecto : Yacia, etc. FuTURO : Yacere, etc. Imperfecto subjuntivo : Yaciera, etc. CoNDicioNAL : Yaceria, etc. Presents : Yazga or yazca. FuTURO DE SUBJUNTIVO : Yaclere. Imperativo : Yaz tu, yaced vost)tros. 6t Salve and vale are only used in the second person singu- lar of the Imperative of the Latin verbs salveo, valeo, the for- mer meaning / greet thee and the second fare thee well. These expressions are, however, considered nowadays as obsolete. AGREEMENT OrpHE^yj|^^fg|jH^ THE SUBJECT. 321 Leccion LXI. Lesson LXI. AGREEMENT OF THE VERB WITH ITS SUBJECT. Vocabulario. El creador, the creator. El movimiento, the movement. El padrino, the godfather. El raton, the mouse. El sol, the sun. La causa, the caitse, the case. La especie, the species. La fiesta, the feast. La grandeza, the greatness. La humanidai, the humanity. La marcha, the march. La mayor parte, the most. La mitad, the half. La navegacion, navigation. La necesidad, necessity. La obra, the work. Vocabulary. La planta, the plant. Cesar, Ccesar. Pompeyo, Pompey. Distinto, distinct. Supremo, supreme. Aguardar, 1. to expect, to aioait. Auunciar, 1. to announce. Arruinar, 1. to ruin. Conversar, 1. to converse. Decidir, 3. to decide. Divertir, 3. to amuse. Escapar, 1. to escape. Instruir, 3. to instruct. Interesar, 1. to interest. Juzgar, 1. to judge. Sentir, 3. to feel. Exercise 121. 1. Pedro, Juan y yo hemos estado aqui esta manana. 2. El padre y el hijo han salido esta manana. 3. Ni el teatro ni la musica me divierten. 4. El ejercito de Francia e Inglaterra estaban en marcha. 5. El estudiar y conversar con los sabios instruye al hombre. 6. Dar y saber dar son dos cosas muy distintas. 7. La justicia, la religion y la humanidad quieren que V. obre de otro modo. 8. Los cielos y la tierra, el sol y las estrellas, todo nos anuncia la grandeza del supremo creador. 9. La mitad de los soldados se ha ido. 10. Es la obra y no la persona que interesa la posteridad. 11. Juzgar y sentir no son la misma cosa. 12. Seran V. V., senores, quienes decidiran en esta causa. 13. Son trenta pesos que V. me debe. 14. El mimero de las especies de animales es mas grande, segun dicen, qne el niimero de las especies de plantas. 15. Su padre de V. 6 su tio sera el padrino de mi hermanito. 16. El padre de Juan es uno de los que han sido arruinados por la ultima guerra. 17. Ni V. ni el lo saben. 18. De mis conocidos no todos serian mis amigos. 19. La agricultura, las 21 322 LESSON 61. artes, el comercio y la navegacion, todo estd perdido en aquel pobre pais. 20. La mayor parte de mis amigos esta esta noche en el teatro. Exercise 122. 1. My brother and I will leave to-morrow for the country. 2. Have not most of your friends left for Paris ? 3. Most of them intend to remain in town this summer. 4. Neither Caesar nor Pompey was to be an emperor. 5. John and Henry are very good friends. 6. Great, rich, poor, little, no one escapes death. 7. Fear or necessity are the cause of all the movements of the mouse. 8. One half of the chil- dren of that school are Germans. 9. It is we who are responsible for your conduct. 10. Your brother and I will go to the same school next year. 11. I am sure that it is you who have said that. 12. A great number of strangers were present at that feast. 13. He and I are brothers. 14. Neither you nor your friend will arrive in time. 15. It was your father and not your mother who was here. 16. He or she will have the book. 17. This gentleman and I have travelled together. 18. It is not the son but the daughter who has died. 19. There are three gentlemen at the door. 20. It is they we are expecting. 21. Charles and I are poor, but Peter and his brother are rich. Gram^tiea. Grammar. 1, When the subject is composed of two or more nouns joined by a conjunction, the verb is put in the plural : El padre y el hijo han estado aqui, The father mid the smi have been here. 2. "When the subjects are connected by ni, neither, or by d, or, the verb must also be put in the plural. Usage and euphony allow, however, the use of the singular, and we can say : Ni la miisica ni el teatro le divier- Neither micsic nor the theatre amtcse ten or divierte, him. This sentence may also have the subjects at the end of the sentence : "So le divierte ni la mtisioa ni el teatro. 3« The verb must likewise be in the plural when one subject alone is expressed and the other or others are understood : El ejercito de Valencia y Murcia The armies of Valencia and Mur- estaban en niarcha, cia were on their anarch. AGREEMENT OF THE VERB WITH THE SUBJECT. 323 4i If the subjects are not of the same Person, the verbs agree with the person which has the priority. The first Person has the priority of the second, and the second of the third : V. y yo lo sabemos, Vote and I know it. Y. y el lo saben, You and he know it. 5% The verb is put in the singular when the subject is com- posed of two infinitives : El estudiar y coiiversar con los St^idying and conversing with wise sabios instruye al honibre, men instruct inan. 6« When a verb has several subjects not connected by any conjunction, it is put in the singular, unless the sentence begins with the verb. In this case the verb is put in the plural : La jnsticia, la religion, la humani- Justice, religio7i, and huma^iity dad, lo reclama, or Lo reclaman demand it, la justicia, la religion y la hu- manidad, 7. When a word occurs in the sentence which embraces all the others, the verb must agree with this word : Los cielos y la tierra, el sol y las The heavens and the earth, the sun estrellas, todo nos anuncia la and the stars, all announce the grandeza de Dios. greatness of God to us. 8t When the verb has for its subject a general collective noun, it agrees with the latter : El ejercito esta Men organizado. The army is well organized. If the collective is partitive, the verb may either agree with the same, or with the noun which follows it, and which is governed by the preposition de : La mitad de los soldados se lia ido One half of the soldiers have gone or se ban ido, away. 324 LESSON 62. Leccion LXII. Lesson LXII. CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. Conjunctions. The Conjunctions most generally used are : Y, and. Ni . . . ni , neither . . . nor. 6, or. Ya...ya, now... now. Sea... sea, either... or. Pero, hut. Sin embargo, however. No obstante, notwithstanding. A menos que, unless. Si, if^ wMther^ so. Con tal que, provided. Para que, in order that. Porque, why. Porque, because. Ya que, since. Bespecto, regarding. Por eonsiguiente, consequently/. Por eso, therefore. Sobre, thereupon. Algo, somewhat. Pues, ^ince. Mien tr as, ivhilst. Conforme, as. Antes que, he/ore, Aun, ever. Por miedo, for fear. Ah, ah ! Ah, ah ! Ah, que alegria ! Ay que gozo ! Bueno ! Good 1 What a joy I Interjections. Of Joy. Gracias a Dios ! Thank God ! Bendito sea Dios ! ) God he Alabado sea Dios ! ) praised / Vaya, vaya ! Well, now ! Of Sadness. Ah, ay ! Jh, ay ! Dios mio ! Good heavens ! kj qu^ pena ! What a pain ! Valgame Dios ! May God help me ! Aydemi! Woe to me! Virgen santisima! Holy Virgin! Aydemi! Poor me! Ave Maria! Godforhid! Of Approbation and Surprise. Muy bien ! Very well ! Bien hecho ! Well done ! Me alegro mucho ! lam very glad ! Grandemente ! Splendid ! Escelente ! Excellent ! Esunpasmo! \seatdiful! £s una maravilla ! ) Caspita ! Chispas ! Cascaras \ x r, ■, , , . } Zounds ! Caracoles ! Fuego ! I Ascuas ! >' Bravo ! Bravo ! INTERJECTIONS. 325 Esta muy bien ! It is very well ! Es milagro ! Wonderful I Guapo ! Magnificent ! Viva, viva ! Hurrah^ hurrah ! Oiga ! calle ! You dont say so ! Hola! Hallo! Mire V. ! Do you see ! Caramba ! Plague ! Otra vez ! Another time ! Encore! Toma! Indeed! (Ironically.) Of Contempt, Blame, and Disgust. Dios mio ! Good heavens ! Eso no vale nada ! That is good for nothing ! Eso es bueno ! That is good indeed! Vaya, vaya! Well, now! Que asco ! How disgusting ! Grande hazana ! A great feat ! Guapa cosa ! A fine thing ! Que vergUenza ! Wluit a shame ! Quita alia ! Get away ! Oxte! Shame! Calle, que es bueno I ) That is very Vaya en gracia ! ) fine ! (Iron. ) Of Anger, f Voto a ! si me enfado ! DonH make me mad ! Voto a chapiro ! / tell you, sir ! iThe plague take you ! Diantre ! Hang it (J Anda enhoramala ! Vaya V. a pasear ! Ascuas ! That 's too had ! Get aivay ! Of Exhortation and Encouragement. VsLja., vaya I Bravely ! Vamos, vamos ! Come on ! Alerta ! Wide awake ! Ea, venga alguien ! Somebody here! Ea pues ! Well, now ! Ea, animo ! Courage ! Basta, basta ! Enough ! Quedo, quedo ! Gently ! Guar da, guar da ! Look out! £ un ladito ! Step aside ! Cuidado ! Take care ! Fuera, fuera ! Out with him ! Fuego, fuego ! Fire ! Ay, que me matan ! Murder ! C6gele, cogele ! Hold him ! Acabose ! It is all over ! Calla, calla ! Be silent ! Que callen ! Quiet ! Of Silence. Silencio ! Silence ! Chito, Chiton! Hush! 326 TABLE OF TlBULA DE LAS TERMINACIONES DE LAS TEES CONJUGACIONES EEGULAEES EN LOS TIEMPOS SIMPLES. i < o o o Present Infinitive. Gerund. Past Participle. Present Indicative. Imperfect Indicative. Preterite. am-|^ am-o am-aba am-as am-abas am-aste 1..AR AM-AB am-ando am -ado ani-d^ am-amoa ani-aia am-an am-aba am-dbamos am-aban am-o am-dmos ani-asteis am-iron com-o com-ia com-i com-es com-ias com-iste 2. ER COM-ER com-lendo com-ldo com-e COm-MBOS com-eis com-ia com-iamos com-lals , com-io com-ifios com-lsteis com-en com-lan com-Wron recib-o recib-ia recib-i • recib-e» recib-ias recib-lste 8. IR RECIB-IR recib-lendo recib-ldo recib-e recib-imos recib-ls recib-Mi recib-Ia recib-lamos i-ecib-iais recib-iau recib-i^iran recib-an recib-an recib-ieran -irian -iesen recib-ieren -ft r^ 328 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL TlBULA ALFABETICA DE LOS PEmCIPALES VERBOS IREEGULARES 6 DEFECTIVOS. NoTA. — El numero colocado despues del Presente ^el Infinitive de cada verbo indica la Conjugacion a la que perteuece este verbo. Present Infinitive. Gerund. i Present Indicative. Imperfect Indicative. Preterite. Abrir, 3. to open. Regular in all the other tenses. abierto Absolver, 2. to ahsolce. conjugated like Mover. absuelto Abstraer, 2. to abstract. conjugated like Traer. Acertar, 1. to hit the aim. conjugated like Acrecentar. Acordar, 1. to agree. acordando acordado acuerdo acuerdas acuerda acordamos acordais acuerdan acordaba acordabas acordaba acordabamos acordabais acordaban acorde acordaste acordo acordamos acordasteis acordaron Acostar, 1. to lay down. conjugated like Acordar. ■ Acrecentar, 1. to increase. acrecentando acrecentado acreciento acrecientas acrecienta acrecen tamos acrecentais acrecientan acrecentaba acrecentabas acrecentaba acrecentaba- mos acrecentabais acrecentaban acrecente acrecentaste acrecento acrecentamos acrecentas- teis acrecentdron Adestrar, 1. to guide. conjugated like Acrecentar. Adherir, 3. to adhere. conjugated .like Asentlr. lEREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 329 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OP THE PRINCIPAL lEREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. Note. — The number put after the Present Infiniti\'e of each verb indicates the Conjugation to which that verb belongs. PUTUEE. Imperative. Present Subjunctive Imperfect Subjunctive. TERMINATION 1. 2. .S. Future Subjunctive. acordare acordaras acordara acordaremos acordareis acordaran acuerda acuerdes acuerde acordemos acordad acuerden acuerde acuerdes acuerde acordemos acordeis acuerden acord-ara -aria -ase acord-aras -arias -ases acord-ara -aria -ase acord-aramos -ariamos -asemos acord-arais -ariais -aseis acord-aran -arian -asen acordare acordares acordare acordaremos acordareis acordaren acrecentare acrecentaras acrecentara acrecentare- mos acrecentareis acrecentaran acrecienta acrecientes acre^ientj^ acrecentemos acrecentad acrecienten acreciente acrecientes acreciente acrecentemos acrecenteis acrecienten acrecent-ara -aria -ase acrecent-aras -arias -ases acrecent-ara -aria -ase acrecent-aramos -ariamos -dsemos acrecent-arais -ariais -aseis acrecent-aran -arian -asen acrecentare acrecentares acrecentare acrecentaremos acrecentareis acreceutaren 330 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL Present iNriNITIVE. Gerund. i Present Indicative. Imperfect Indicative. Preterite. Adquirir, 3. to acquire. adquiriendo adquirido adquiero adquieres adquiere adquirimos adquiris adquieren adquiria adquirias adquiria adquiriamos adquiriais adquirian adquiri adquiriste adquirio adquirimos adquiristeis adquirieron Aduoir, 3. to convey. See Condncir. Advertir, 3. to advise. See Asentir. Agorar, 1. to divine. See Acordar. Alentar, 1. to encouragp. See Acrecentar. Almorzar, 1. to breakfast. See Acordar. Andar, 1. to walk. andando andado an do andas anda andamos andais andan andaba andabas andaba andabamos andabais andaban anduve auduviste anduvo anduvimos anduvisteis anduvieron Apacentar, 1. to graze. See Acrecentar. Apostar, 1. to bet. See Acordar. Aprobar, 1. to approve. See Acordar. Apretar, 1. to tighten. See Acrecentar. Arguir, 3. to argue. See Instrulr. Arrecirse, 3. to be benumbed. See Pedir. Arrendar, 1. to rent. See Acrecentar. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 331 Future. Imperative. Present Subjunctive Imperfect Subjunctive. TERMINATION 1. 3. 3. Future Subjunctive. adquirire adquiriras adquirira adquiriremos adquirireis adquiriran adquiera adquiere adquiera adquiramos adquirid adquieran adquiera adquieras adquiera adquiramos adquirais adquieran adquir-iera -iria -lese adquir-ieras -iriaa -ieaes adquir-iera -iria -iese adquir-ieramos -iriamos -iesemos adquir-ierais -iriais -ieseis adquir-ieran -irian -iesen adquiriere adquirieres adquiriere adquirieremos adquiriereis adquirieren ' andare andaras andara andaremos andareis andaran ande anda ande andemos audad anden ande audes ande andemos andeis anden and-uviera -aria -uviese and-uvieras -arias -uvieses and-uviera -aria -uviese and-uvieramos -ariamos -uviesemos and-uvierais -ariais -uvieseis and-uvieran -arian -uviesen anduviere auduvieres anduviere anduvieremos anduviereis anduvieren - - 332 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL Present Infinitive. Gerund. < Present Indicative. Imperfect Indicative. Preterite. Arrepentirse, 3. to repent. See Asentir. Ascender, 2. to ascend. See Atender. Asentar, 1. to establish. See Acrecentaj. Asentir, 3. to acquiesce. asintiendo asentido asiento asientes asiente asentinios asentis asienten asentia asentias asentia asentianios asentiais asentian asenti ast'iitiste aseutio asentimos asiiitisteis asiutierou Aserrar, 1. to saw. See Acrecentar. Asestar, 1. to aim. See Acrecentar. Asir, 3. to seize. This verb is used only in a metaphorical sense. asiendo asido asgo ases ase asimos asis asen asia asias asia asiamos asiais asian asi asiste asio asimos asisteis asieron Asolar, 1. to devastate. See Acordar. Atender, 2. to mind. atendiendo atendido atiendo atiendes atiende,*^ atendemos atendeis atenden atekdia atendias atendia atendiamos atendiais atendian ateudi atendiste atendio atendimos atendisteis atendieron Atentar, 1. to attempt. See Aterrar, 1. to prostrate. See Acrecentar. Atestar, 1. to crowd. See Acrecentar. Atraer, 2. to attract. See Traer. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 333 Future. Imperative. Present Subjunctive Imperfect Subjunctive. termination 1. 2. 3. Future Subjunctive. asentire asentiras asenlira asentiremos asentireis asentiran asiente asienta asiente asientemos asentid asieuten asiente asientes asiente asentemos asenteis asienten asint-iera asent-iria asint-iese asint-ieras -irias -ieses asint-iera -iria -iese asint-ieramos -iiiamos -iesemos asint-ierais -iriais -ieseis asint-ieran -irian -iesen asintiere asintieres asintiere asintieremos asintiereis asintieien asire asiras asira asire mos asire is asiran asga asgase asga asgamos asid asgan asga asgas asga asgamos asgais asgan asiera asiria asiese asieras asirias asieses asiera asiria asiese asieramos asiriamos asiesemos asierais asiriais asieseis asieran asirian asiesen asiere asieres asiere asieremos asiereis asieren atendere atenderas atenderd atendere mos atendereis atenderaa atienda atiende atienda atendamos atended atiendan atienda atiendas atienda atendamos atendais atiendan atend-iera -eria -iese atend-ieras -erias -ieses atend-iera -eria -iese atend-ieramos -eriamos -iesemos atend-ierais -eriais -ieseis atend-ieran -erian -iesen atendiere atendieres atendiere atendierenios atendiereis atendieren 334 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL Present Present Imperfect Gebund. < 1 Preterite. Infinitive. ^ u ^ Indicative. Indicative. Atravesar, 1. See to cross over. Acrecentar. Aventar, 1. See to fan. Acrecentar. Avergonzar, 1. See to shame. Acordar. Bendecir, 3. to bless. bendiciendo bendito bendigo bendeeia bendije bendecido bendices bendeciaa bendijiste bendice bendeeia bendijo bendeciraos bendeciamos bendijimos bendecis bendeciais bendijisteis bendicen bendecian bendije ron Caber, 2. cabiendo cabido quepo cabia cupe to be contained. cabes cabias cupiste cabe cabia ■cupo cabemos cabiamos cupiraos cabeis cabiais eupisteis caben cabian cupieron Caer, 2. cayendo caido caigfl^ caia cai to/all. caes caias caiste cae caia cayo ' caemos caiamos caimos caeis caiais caisteis caen caian cay e ron Galentar, 1. See to warm. Acrecentar. Cegar, 1. See to blind. Acrecentar. Cenir, 3. See to gird. Pedir. Cerner, 2. See to sift.. Atender. Cerrar, 1. See to close, to shut. Acrecentar. Cimentar, 1. See ' to ground. Acrecentar. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 335 Future. Imperative. Present Subjunctive Imperfect Subjunctive, termination 1. 2. 8. Future Subjunctive. bendecire bendeciras bendecira bendeciremos bendecireis bendeciran bendiga bendice bendiga bendigamos bendecid bendigan bendiga bendigas bendiga bendigamos bendigais bendigan bend- bend- bend- -ijera -eciria -ijese -ijeras -ecirias -ijeses -ijera -eciria -ijese -ijeramos -eciriamos -ijesemos -ijerais -eciriais -ijeseis -ijeran -ecirian -ijesen bendijere bendijeres bendijere bendijeremos bendijereis bendijeren cab re cabras cabra cabremos cabreis cabran quepa cabe quepa quepamos cabed quepan quepa quepas quepa quepamos quepais quepan cupiera cabria cupiese cupieras cabrias cupieses cupiera cabria cupiese cupieramos cabriamos cupiesemos cupierais cabriais cupieseis cupiei-an cabrian cupiesen cupiere cupieres cupiere cupieremos cupiereis cupieren Caere caeras caera caeremos Caere is caeran caiga cae caiga caigamos caed caigan caiga caigas caiga caigamos caigais caigan , cayera caeria cayese cayeras caerias cayeses cayera caeria cayese cayeramos caeriamos cayesemos cayerais caeriais cayeseis cay e ran caerian cayesen cayere cayeres cayere cayeremos cayereis cayeren 336 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PKINCIPAL Present Infinitive. Gerund. »5 O < Ph Present Indicative. Imperfect Indicative. Preterite. Cocer, 2. to boil. cociendo cocido cuezo cueces cuece cocemos coceis cuecen cocia cocias cocia cociamos cociais cocian coci cociste coci6 cocimos cocisteis cocieron Colar, 1. to strain. See Acordar. Colegir, 3. to collect. See Pedir. - Colgar, 1. to hang. See Acordar. Comedirse, 3. to govern one's self. See Pedir. Comenzar, 1. to commence. See Acrecentar. Competir, 3. to compete. See Pedir. Concebir, 3. to conceive. See Pedir. Concernir, 3. to concern. See Asentir. Concertar, 1. to concert. See Acrecentar. Concordar, 1. to agree. See Acordar. Condescender, 2. to condescend. Atender. Condolerse, 2. to condole. See Mover. Conducir, 3. to conduct. conduciendo conducido conduzco conduces conduce conducimos conducis conducen conducia conducias conducia conduciamos conduciais conducian conduje condujiste condujo condujinios condujisteis condujcron IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 337 Future. Imperative. Present Subjunctive Imperfect Subjunctive. termination 1. 2. 3. Future Subjunctive. cocere coceras cjrera cocei-emos cocere is coceran cueza cuece cueza cozanios coced cuezan cueza cuezas cueza cozaraos cozais cuezan cociera coceria cociese cocieras cocerias cocieses cociera coceria cociese cocieramos coceriamos cociesemos cocierais coceriais cocieseis cocieran cocerian cociesen cociere cocieres cociere cocieremos cociereis cocieren conducire conduciras conducira conduciremos conducireis conduciran conduzca conduce conduzca conduzcamos conducid conduzcan conduzca conduzcas conduzca^ conduzcamos conduzcais conduzcan condu-jera -ciria -jese condu-jeras -cirias -jeses condu-jera -ciria -jese condu-jeranios -ciriamos -jesemos condu-jerais -ciriais -jeseis condu-jeran -cirian -jesen condujere condujeres condujere condujerenios condujereis condujeren 22 338 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PKINCIPAL Present Infinitive. Gerund. i Present Indicative. Imperfect Indicative. Preterite. Conferir, 3. to confer. See ABentir. Confesar, 1. to confess. See Acrecentar. conociendo Conocer, 2. to know, to be ac- quainted with. conocido 8 8 8 8 8 8 conocia conocias conocia conociamos conocia is conocian conoci conociste conocio conociraos conocisteis conocieron Conseguir, 3. to obtain. See Pedir. Consentir, 3. to consent. See Asentir. Consolar, 1. to comfort. See Acordar. ConstreMr, 3. to constrain. See Pedir. Contar, 1. to count. See Acordar. Contener, 2. to contain. See Tener. Contender, 2. to contend. See Atender. Contradecir, 3. to contradict. See Decir. Controvertir, 3. to controvert. See Asentir. Contraer, 2. to contract. Traer. Convertir, 3. to convert. See Asentir. Corregir, 3. to correct. See Pedir. Cubrir, 3. to cover. cubierto Rej^ular in all other tenses. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 339 Future. Imperative. Present Subjunctive Imperfect Subjunctive, termination 1. 2. 3. Future Subjunctive. conocere conoceras conocei-a conocereraos conocere is conoceran conozca conoce conozca conozcamos conozcais conozcan conozca conozcas conozca conozcamos conozcais conozcan conoc-iera -eria -iese conoc-ieras -erias -ieses conoc-iera -eria -iese conoc-ieraraos -eriamos -iesemos conoc-ierais -eriais -ieseis conoc-ieran -erian -iesen conociere conocieres conociere conocieremos conociereis conocieren 340 ALPUABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL Present Infinitive. Gerund. Past Participle. Present [ndicative. Impereect Indicative. Preterite. Dar, 1. to give. dando dado doy da3 da damos dais dan daba dabas daba dabamos dabais daban di diste dio dimos disteis dieron Decaer, 2. to decay. See Ca«r. Decentar, 1. to commence with. See Acrecentar. Decir, 3. to telly to say. dicieiido dicho digo dices dice decimos decis dicen decia decias decia deciamos deciais decian dije dijiste dijo dijimos dijisteis dijeron Deducir, to deduct. See Conducir. Defender^ 2. to defend. See Atender. Deferir, 3. to defer. See Asentir. DegoUar, 1. to behead. See Acordar. Demoler, 2. to demolish. See Mover. Demostrar, 1. to demonstrate. See Acordax. Denegar, 1. to deny. See Acrecentar. Denostar, 1. to abuse. See Acordar. Derrengar, 1. to hate. See Acrecentar. See Pedir. Derretir, 3. to melt. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 341 Future. Imperative. Present Subjunctive Imperfect Subjunctive. TERMINATION I. 2. 3. Future Subjunctive. dare daras dara daremos dare is daran de da des demos dad den de des de demos deis den diera daria diese dieras darias dieses diera daria diese dieramos darianios diesemos dierais dariais dieseis dieran darian diesen diere dieres diere dieremos diereis dieren dire diras dira diremos direis diran diga di diga digamos decid digan diga digas diga digamos digais digan dijera diria dijese dijeras dirias dijeses dijera diria dijese dijeramos diriamos dijesemos dijerais diriais dijeseis dijeran dirian dijesen dijere dijeres dijere dijeremos dijereis dijeren 342 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PKINCIPAL Peesent Iniinitive. Gerund. < Pi PllESElVT Indicative. Imperfect Indicative. Preterite. Desavenir, 3. to disagree. See Venir. Descender, 2. to descend. See Atender. DescoUar, 1. to exceed. See Acordax. Descordar, 1. to uncord an instru- ment. See Acordar. Descomedirse, 3. to be rude. See Fedir. Describir, 3. to describe. descrito Regular in all the oth- er tenses. Desflocar, 1. to remove flakes. See Acordar. Deshacer, 2. to undo. See Hacer. Deshelar, 1. to thaw. See Acrecentar. Desleir, 3. to dilute. See Veir. Besolar, 1. to desolate. See Acordar. DesoUar, 1. toflay. See Acordar. Desovar, 1. to spawn. See Acordar. Despedir, 3. to dismiss. See Fedir. Despernar, 1. to break or cut off one's legs. See Despertar, 1. to awake. See Acrecentar. Desterrar, 1. to banish. See Acrecentar. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 343 Future. Impeeative. Pbesent Subjunctive Impeefect Subjunctive. TERMINATION 1. 3. 3. Future Subjunctive. 344 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL Present Infinitive. Gerund. i % 1 < Present Indicative. Imperfect Indicative. Preterite. Besplegar, 1^ to unfold. See Acrecentax. Desvergonzarse, 2. to act impudently. See Acordar. Bezmar, 1. to tithe. See Acrecentar. Diferir, 3. to dday. See Asentir. Digerir, 3. to digest. See Asentir. Discernir, 3. to discern. See Asentir. Discordar, 1. to disagree. See Acordar. Disolver, 2. to dissolve. See Mover. Divertir, 3. to amuse. See Asentir. Doler, 2. to ache. See Mover. Dormir, 3. to sleep. durmiendo dormido duermo duermes duerme dormimos dormis duermen dormia dormias dormia dormiamos dormiais doi-mian dornii dormiste durmio dormimos dormisteis durmieron Elegir, 3. to elect. See Pedir. Embestir, 3. to attack, to assail. See Pedir. Empedrar, 1. to pave. See Empezar, 1. to begin. See Acrecentar. Emporoar, 1. to dirt. See IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 345 Future. Imperative. Present subjunctivk Ialperfect Subjunctive. TERMINATION 1. 2. 3. Future Subjunctive. • % dormire dormiras dormira dormiremos dormireis dormiran duerma ' duerme duerma dormamos Hirmid duerman duerma duermas duerma dbrmaraos dormais duerman dofm-iera -iria -iese dorra-ieras -irias -ieses dorm-iera -iria -iese dorm-ieramos -iamos -iesemos dorm-ierais -iais -ieseis dorm-ieran -ian -iesen dormiere dormieres dormiere d6Tmieremos dormiereis doi-mieren 346 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL Present Infinitive. Gerund. < Present Indicative. Imperfect Indicative. Preterite. Encender, 2. to light. See Atender. Encensar, 1. to perfume {with in- cense). See Acrecentar. Encerrar, 1. to shut in, to enclose. See Acrecentar. Encomendar, 1. to recommend. See Acrecentar. Encontrar, 1. to meet. See Acordar. Encordar, 1. to put strings and cords (to an in- strument). See Acordar. Engreirse, 3. to adorn one's self. See Keir. Engrosar, 1. to fatten. See Acordar. Enmendar, 1. to correct. See # Enrodar, 1. to break on the wheel. See Acordar. Ensangrentar, 1. to stain with blood. See Acrecentar. Entender, 2. to understand. See Atender. Enterrar, 1. to bury. See Acrecentar. Envestir, 3. to invest. See Pedir. Erguir, 3. to hold up the head. irguiendo erguido yergo yergues yergue erguimos erguis yerguen erguia erguias erguia erguiamos erguiais erguian ergui erguiste irgui6 erguimos erguisteis irgui^ron IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 347 Future. Imperative. Present Subjunctive iMPERrECT Subjunctive. TERMINATION 1. 2. 3. Future Subjunctive. erguire erguiras erguira erguiremos erguire is erguiran yerga yergue yerga irgamos erguid yergan yerga yergas yerga irgamos irgais yergan irgu- ergu- irgu- -iera -iria -iese -ieras -irias -ieses -iera -iria -iese -ieramos -riamos -iesemos -ierais -riais -ieseis -ieran -rian -iesen irguiere irguieres irguiere irguieremos irguiereis irguieren 348 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL Peesent Infinitive. Gerund. i PL, Present Indicative. Imperfect Indicative. Preterite. Errar, 1. to err. errando errado yeri-o yerras yerra erramos errais yerran erraba errabas erraba errabaraos errabais erraban erre erraste erro erramos errasteis erraron Escarmentar, 1. to correct. See Acrecentar. Escocer, 2. to irritate. See Cocer. Escribir, 3. to write. Regular in all the other tenses. escrito Esforzar, 1. to strengthen. See Acordar. Estar, 1. to he. (See Auxiliary Verbs, p. 152). Excluir, 3. to exclude. See Instroir. Estrenir, 3. to bind. See Pedir. Extender, 2. to extend. See Atender. Ezpedir, 3. to expedite. See Pedir. Forzar, 1. to force. See Acordar. Fregar, 1. to cleanse. See Acrecentar. Freir, 3. tofry. See Reir. frito irr. part. Gemir, 3. to groan. See Pedir. Gobernar, 1. to govern. See Acrecentar. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 349 FUTUKE. Imperative. Present Subjunctive Imperfect Subjunctive. TERMINATION 1. 2. 3. Future Subjunctive. errare erraras errara erraremos errare is erraran yerre yerra yerre errenios errad yerran yerre yerres yerre errenios erreis yerren errara erraria errase erraras errarias errases errara erraria errase erraraiuos errarianios errase mos errarais errariais erraseis erraran errarian errasen eriare errares errare erraremos errareis erraren 350 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL Present Infinitive. Gekund. Peesent Indicative. Imperfect Indicative. Preterite. Haber, 2. to have. (See Auxiliary Verbs, p. 136.) Hacer, 2. to make, to do. haciendo liecho liago haces hace f haceraos haceis hacen hacia hacias hacia haciamos haciais hacian hice hiciste hizo hicimos hicisteis hicieron Heder, 2. to stink. See Atender. Helar, 1. to freeze. See Acrecentar. Henchir, 3. to stuff. See Pedir. Hender, 2. to split. See Atender. Henir, 3. to knead. See Pedir. Herir, 3. to wound. See Asentir. Herrar, 1. to shoe. See Acrecentar. Hervir, 3. to boil. See Asentir. Holgar, 1. to rest. See Acordar. Hollar, 1. to depress. See Acordar. Impedir, 3. to impede. See Pedir. Imprimir, 3. to print. See Inrtmir. impreso irr. part. Re{?ular in all the other tenses. Incensar, 1. to incense. See Acrecentar. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 351 Future. Imperative. Present Subjunctive iMPERrECT Subjunctive. TERMINATION 1. 2. 3. Future Subjunctive. hare haras hara haremos hare is haran haga haz haga hagamos haced hagaa haga hagas haga hagamos hagais hagatt Iiiciera haria hiciese hicieras harias hicieses hiciera haria hiciese hicieramos hariamos hiciesemos hicierais hariais hicieseis hicieran harian hiciesen liiciere hicieres hiciere liicieremos hiciereis hicieren 352 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL Present i Present Imperfect Gerund. % 2 Preterite. Infinitive. ^ 5 Indicative. Indicative. Incluir, 3. See to include. Instruir. Inducir, 3. See to induce. Conducir. Inferir, 3. See to infer. Asentir. Inquirir, 3. See to inquire. Instruir, 3. Adquirir. instruyendo instruido instruyo instruia instrui to instruct. instruyes instruias instruiste instruye instruia instruyo instruimos instruiamos instruimos instruis instruiais instruisteis instruyen instmian instruyeron Introducir, 3. See to introduce. Conducir. Invernar, 1. See to winter. Acrecentar. Invertir, 3. See to invert. Asentir. Investir, 3. See to invest. Pedir. Ingerir, 3. See to intermeddle. Asentir. Ir, 3. yendo ido voy i])a fui toga. vas ibas fuiste va iba fue vamos ibamos fuimos vais ibais fuisteis van iban fueron Jugar, 1. jugando jugado juego jugaba jugue to play. juegas jugabas jugaste juega jugaba .lugo jugamos jugabamos jugamos jugais jugabais jngasteis juegan jugaban jugaron Llover, 2. See to rain. Mover. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 353 Future. Imperative. Present Subjunctive Imperfect Subjunctive, termination 1. 2. 3. Future Subjunctive. instruire instruiras instruira instruiremos instruireis instruiran instruya instruye instruya instruyamos instruid instruyan instruya mstruyas instruya instruyamos instruyais instruyan instru-yera -iria -yese instru-yeras -irias -yeses instru-yera -iria -yese instru-yeramos -iriamos -yesemos instru-yerais -iriais -yeseis instru-yeran -irian -yesen instruyere instruyeres instruyere instruyeremos instruye reis instruyeren ire iras ira iremos ireis iran vaya ve vaya vayamos id vayan vaya vayas vaya vayamos . vayam«S2|/> vayan fuera iria fucse fueras irias fueses fuera iria fuese fueramos iriamos fuesemos fuerais iriais fueseis fueran irian fuesen fuere fueres fuere fueremos fuereis fueren jugar6 jugards jugara jugaremos jugareis jugaran juega juege juega juguemos jugad juegen juege juegues iuege juguemos jugueis jueguen jugara jugaria jugase jugaras jugarias jugases jugara jugaria jugase jugaramos jugariamos jugasemos jugarais jugariais jugaseis jugaran jugarian jugasen jugare * jugares jugare jugaremos jugareis jugaren 23 354 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PKINCIPAL Present Infinitive. Geeund. i < Present Indicative. Imperfect Indicative. Preterite. Maldecir, 3. to detract. See Hendecir. Manifestar, 1. to manifest. See Acrecentar. Mantener, 2. to support. See Tener. Medir, 1. to measure. See Pedir. Mentar, 1. to mention. See Acrecentar. Mentir, 3. to lie. See Asentir. Merendar, 1. to take a collation. See Acrecentar. Moler, 1. to grind. See Mover. Morder, 3. to bite. See Mover. Morir, 3. to die. niuriendo muerto muero mueres muere morimos moris mueren mona morias moria moriamos moriais morian mori moriste murio morimos moristeis murieron Mostrar, 1. to show. See Acordar. Mover, 2. to move. moviendo movido muevo mueves mueve raoveraos moveis mueven movia movias movia moviamos moviais movian movi moviste movio movimos movisteis movieron Negar, 1. to deny. See Acrecentar. Nevar, 1. to snow. See Acrecentar. IRREGULAR OK DEFECTIVE VERBS. 355 Future. IMPEKATIVE. Present Subjunctive Imperfect Subjunctive. termination 1. 2. 3. Future Subjunctive. morire moriras morira moriremos morireis moriran muera m.uere muera muramos morid mueran muera mueras muera muramos murais mueran nmr- mor- mur- -iera -iria -iese -ieras -irias -ieses -iera -iria -iese -ieramos -iriamos -iesemos -ierais -iriais -ieseis -ieran -irian -iesen muriere murieres muriere murieremos muriereis murieren movere moveras movera moveremos movereis moveran mueva mueve mueva movamos moved muevan mueva muevas mueva movamos movais muevan mov-iera -eria -iese mov-ieras -erias -ieses mov-iera -eria -iese mov-ieramos -eriamos -iesemos niov-ierais -eriais -ieseis mov-ieran -erian -iesen moviere movieres moviere movie remos moviereis movieren 356 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PKINCIPAL H Present e< Present Imperfect Gerund. OT O Preterite. Infinitive. Indicative. Indicative. Oir, 3. oyettdo oido oigo oia Ol' to hear. oyes oias oiste oye oia oyo oiinos oiamos omios ois oiais oisteis oven oian oye ion Oler, 2. oliendo olido huelo olia oil to smell. hueles olias oliste huele olia olio olemos oliaraos olimos oleis oliais olisteis liuelen oliau olieron Pedir, 3. pidiendo pedido pido pedia pedi to ask for. pides pedias pediste pide pedia pi^o pedimos pediamos pedimos pedis pediais pedisteis piden pedian pidieron Pensar, 1. See to think. Acrecentar. Perder, 2. See to lose. Atender. Pervertir, 3. See to pervert. Asentir. Placer,! 2. me places me placia2 me plugo 2 imp., to please. te place te placia te pi ago le place le placia le plugo nos place nos placia nos plugo OS place OS placia OS plugo les place les placia les plugo Plegar, 1. See to plait or fold. Acrecentar. Poblar, 1. See to people. Acordar. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 357 Future. Imperative. Present Imperfect Subju nctive. Future Subjunctive Subjunctive. 1. TERMINATION 2. 3. oire oiga oiga oyera oiria oyese oyere oiras oye oigas oyeras oinas oyeses oyeres oira oiga oiga oyera oiria oyese oyere oireraos oiganios oigamos oyerainos oinamos oyesemos oyerenios oireis oid oigais oyerais oiriais oyeseis oyereis oiian oigan oigan oyeran oinan oyesen oyeren olere huela huela oliera oleria olicse oliere olei-as huele huelas olieras olerias olieses olieres olera liuela huela oliera oleria oliese oliere olere mos olanios olamos olieramos oleriamos oliesemos olierenios olereis oled olais olierais oleria is olieseis oliereis oler^n liuelan huelan olieran olerian olieseu olieren pedire pida pida pidiera pediria pidiese pidiere pediras pide pidas pidieras pedirias pidieses pidieres pediia pida pida pidiera pediria pidiese pidiere pediremos pidamos pidamos pidieramos pediriamos pidiesemos pidieremos pedireis pedid pidais pidierais pediriais pidieseis pidiereis pediran pidan pidan pidieran pediriau pidiesen pidieren plejrue or pluga 3 plegue plugiera pluguiese pluguiere 1 This verb mnv also be used as a r egular verb in the future of the Indicative: yo plncere^ tn placerds, etc. 2 In the plural, me placet 3 Martinez de la Rosa us , etc., me plac es also plazga 'an, etc., me phignieron, etc. and plazca. 358 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PKINCIPAL Present Infinitive. Gerund. < Present Indicative. Imperfect Indicative. Preterite. Poder, 2. to be able. pudiendo podido puedo puedes puede poderaos podeis pueden podia podias podia podiamos podiais podian pude pudiste pudo pudimos pudisteis pudieron Podrir, 3. to rot. pudriendo podrido pudro pudres pudre podrinios podris pudren podria podrias podria poJriamos podriais podrian podri podriste pudrio podrinios podristeis pudrieron Poner, 2. to put. poniendo puesto pongo pones pone ponemos poneis ponen ponia ponias ponia poniamos poniais ponian puse pusiste pusQ pusimos pusisteis pusieron Preferir, 3. lo prefer. See Asentir. Prescribir, 3. to prescribe. prescrito irr. part. Regular in all the other tenses. Probar, 1. to try. See Acordar. Producir, 3. to produce. See Condncir. Proferir, 3. to vr offer. See Asentir. Proscribir, 3. to proscribe. proscrito irr. part. Regular in all the other tenses. Quebrar, 1. to break. See Acrecentar. IRREGULAR OK DEFECTIVE VERBS. 359 Future. Imperative. Present Subjunctive Imperfect Subjunctive. TERMINATION 1. 2. 3. Future Subjunctive. podre podi-as podra podremos podreis podran pueda puedas pueda podamos podais puedan pud- pod- pud- -iera -ria -iese -ieras -rias -ieses -iera -ria -iese -ierainos -riamos -iesemos -ierais -riais -ieseis -ieran -rian -iesen pudiere pudieres pudiere pudieremos pudiereis pudieren podrire podnrds pod lira podrirenios podrire is podriran pudra pudre pudra pudramos podrid pudran pudra pudras pudra pudramos pudrais pudran pud- pod- pud- -riera -riria -riese -rieras -ririas -rieses -riera -riria -riese -rieramos -ririamos -riesemos -rierais -ririais -rieseis -rieran -ririan -riesen pudriere pudrieres pudriere pudrieremos pudriereis pudrieren pondre pondras pondra pondremos pondreis pondran ponga pon ponga pongamos poned pongan ponga pongas ponga pongamos pongais pongan pus- pon- pus- -iera -dria -iese -ieras -drias -ieses -iei-a -dria -iese -ieramos -driamos -iesemos -ierais -driais -ieseis -ieran -drian -iesen pusiere pusieres pusiere pusieremos pusiereis pusieren 360 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL Present Inyinitive. Gerund. Present Indicative. iMPHRrECT Indicative. Preterite. Querer, 2. to will. queriendo querido quiero quieres queria qu arias quise quisiste quiere queria qu'so querenios quereis quenamos queriais quisiraos quisisteis quiereu querian quisieron Raer, 2. See to scrape. Caer. Recomendar, 1. to recommend. See Acrecentar. Recordar, 1. See to re mini. Acordar. Rdcostar, 1. See to recline. Acordar. Raducir, 3. See to reduce. Conducir. Referir, 3. See to refer. Asentir. Regar, 1. to water. See Acrecentar. Regir, 3. to rule. See Pedir. Rsgoldar, 1. to belch. See Acordar. Reir, 3. to laugh. riendo or riyendo reido rio ries reia reias rei reiste rie reia rio reimos reiamos reimos reis reiais reisteis rien reian rieron Remendar, 1. See to mend. Acrecentar. Rendir, 3. to surrender. See Pedir. Renovar, 1. See to renew. Acordar. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 361 Flture. Imperative. Present Subjunctive Imperfect Subjunctive. termination 1. 2. 3. Future Subjunctive. querre • querras querra querremos querreis queriau quiera quieras quiera queramos querais quieran quis- quer- quis- -iera -ria -iese -ieras -rias -ieses -iera -ria -iese -ieramos -riaraos -iesemos -ierais -riais -ieseis -ieran -rian -iesen quisiere quisieres quisiere quisieremos quisiereis quisieren reire reiras reira reiremos reireis reiran ria rie ria riamos reid rian ria rias ria riamos riais rian riera reiria riese rieras reirias rieses riera reiria riese rieramos reiriaraos rieseraos rierais reiriais rieseis rieran reirian riesen riere rieres riere rieremos riereis rieren 362 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PKINCIPAL Present Infinitive. Gerund. i CO O Present Indicative. Imperfect Indicative. Preterite. Renir, 3. to wrangle. See Pedlr. Bspetir, 3. to repeat. See Pedir. Bequebrar, 1. to court. See Acrecentax. Bequerir, 3. to notify. See Asentir. — "' Bescontrar, 1. to compensate. See Acordar. Besollar, 1. to respire. See Acordar. Beventar, 1. to burst. See Acrecentar. Bevolcar, 1. to wallow. See Acordar. Bodar, 1. to roll. See Acordar. Boer, 2. to gnaw. See Caer. Bogar, 1. to entreat. See Acordar. Saber, 2. to know. sabieudo sabido se sabes sabe sabemos sabeis saben sabia sabias sabia sabiamos sabiais sabian supe supiste supo supimos supisteis supieron SaUr, 3. to grant. saliendo salido salgo sales sale salimos sails salen salia salias salia saliamos saliais salian sail saliste salio V salimos salisteis salieron Satisfacer, 2. to satisfy. See Hacer. But cliang:- ing the h to/. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS.. 363 Future. Imperative. Present Subjunctive iMPERrECT Subjunctive. TERMINATION 1. 2. 3. Future Subjunctive. sabre sabras sabra sabremos sabreis sabran HIIII o sepa sepas sepa sepamos sepais sepan supiera sabria supiese supieras sabrias supieses supiera sabria supiese supieramos sabriamos supiesemos supierais sabriais supieseis supieran sabrian supiesen supiere supieres supiere supiereraos supiereis supieren saldre saldras saldra saklremos saldr^is saldran saiga sal saiga salgamos salid salgan saiga saigas saiga salgamos salgais salgan saliera saldria saliese salieras saldrias salieses saliera saldria saliese salieramos saldriamos saliesemos salierais saldriais salieseis salieran saldrian saliesen saliere salieres saliere salieremos saliereis salieren satisface or satisfaz (2d pers. sing.). 364 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL Present iNriNITIVE. Gekund. Present Indicative. Imperfect Indicative. Preterite. Segar, 1. to reap. See Acrecentar. Seguir, 3. to follow . See Pedir. Sembrar, 1. to sow. See Acrecentar. Sentar, 1. to become. See Acrecentar. Sentir, 3. to feel. See Asentir. Ser, 2. to be. (See Auxiliary Verbs, p. 136.) Servir, 3. to serve. See Pedir. Serrar, 1. to saw. See Acrecentar. Soldar, 1. to solder. See Acordar. Soler, 2. to be accustomed. Solver, 2. to solve. See Mover. suelto irr. part. Soltar, 1. to loosen. See Acordar. suelto irr. part. Sonar, 1. to sound. See Acordar. Sonar, 1. to dream. See Acordar. Sosegar, 1. to appease. See Acrecentar. Soterrar, 1. to bury. See Acrecentar. Sugerir, 3. to suggest. See Asentir. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 365 Future. Imperative. Present Subjunctive Imperfect Subjunctive. termination 1. 2. 3. Future Subjunctive. 366 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL Present Infinitive. Gerund. i I i Present Indicative. Imperfect Indicative. Preterite. Temblar, 1. to tremble. See Acrecentar. Tender, 2. to expand. See Atender. Tener, 2. to have. (See Auxiliary Verbs, p. 139.) Tenir, 3. to dye. See Pedir. Tentar, 1. to touch. See Acrecentar. Torcer, 2. to twist. Tostar, 1. to toast. See Cocer. See Acordar, Traducir, 3. to translate. See Conducir. Traer» 2. to bring. trayeiido «( ti-l^ido traigo traes trae traemos traeis traen traia traias traia traiamos traiais traian traje ti-ajiste trajo trajimos trajisteis trajeron Trascender, 2. to transcend. See Atender. Trascordarse, 1. to forget. See Acordar. Trasegar, 1. to overact. See Acrecentar. Trbnar, 1. to thunder. See Acordar. Tropezar, 1. to stumble. See Acrecentar. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 367 Future. Imperative. Present Subjunctive Imperfect Subjunctive, termination 1. • 3. 3. Future Subjunctive. # traere traeras traera traeremos traereis traeiaii traiga trae traiga traigamos traed traigan traiga traigas traiga traigamos tragais traigan trajera traeria trajese trajeras traerias trajeses trajera traeria trajese trajeramos traeriamos trajesenios trajerais traeriais trajeseis trajeran traerian trajesen trajere trajeres trajere trajeremos trajereis trajeren " 368 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PKINCIPAL Present Infinitive. Gerund. i Present Indicative. Imperfect Indicative. Preterite. & Valer, 2. valiendo valido valgo valia vail to be worth. vales V alias valiste vale valia valio valemos valiamos valismos valeis valiais valisteis vaien valian valieron Venir, 3. to come. viniendo venido vengo venia vine vienes venias viniste viene venia vino venimos veniamos venimos venis veniais venisteis vienen venian vinieiffjh Ver, 2. vieudo visto veo veia vi to see. ves veias viste ve veia vio vemos veiamos vimos % veis veiais visteis ven veian vieron Verter, 2. See to spill. Atender. Vestir, 3. See to dress. Pedir. Volcar, 1. See to overset. Acordar. Volar, 1. See to fly. Acordar. Volver, 2. to return. Regular in all the other tenses. vuelto Yacer, 2. /o /i> down. (See Defective Verbs, p. 319.) Zaherir, 3. to censure. See Asentir. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 369 FU'IURE. Imperative. Present Subjunctive Imperfect Subjunctive. termination 1. 2. 3. Future Subjunctive. valdre ( valga valga \aliera valdria valiese valiere valdvas vale valgas valieras valdiias vali.s3s valieres valdra valga valga valiera valdria valiese valiere valdremos valgamos valgamos valieramos valdriamos valiesemos valieremos valdreis valid valgais valierais valdriais valieseis valiereis valdran valgan valgan valieran valdrian valiesen valieren vin- ven- vin- vendre venga venga -lera -dria -iese viniere vendras ven vengas -leras -drias -ieses vinieres vendra venga venga -iera -dria -iese viniere vendienios venganios vengaiuos -ieramos -driamos -iesemos vinieremos veudreis venid vengais -ierais -driais -ieseis viniereis vendran vengan vengan -ieran -drian -iesen vinieren vere vea vea viera veria ' viese viere veras ve veas viei'as verias V ieses ..vieres vera vea vea viera vena viese viere veremos veamos veamos vieramos verianios viesemos vieremos vereis ved veais vierais vermis vieseis viereis veran vean vean vieran verian viesen vieren . 24 FORMACION DE LA LENGUA CASTEL- LANA. La lengua castellana consta de palabras fenicias, griegas, goticas, arabes, y de otras lenguas de las que por dominacion o por comercio habi- taroii o frecueiitaron estas partes. Pero principalmente abunda de pala- bras latinas eateras 6 adulteradas. Los Romanos estuvieron en Espana 600 anos a lo menos, aunque no se cuenten, si no desde el de 216 antes de Cristo en que vinieron la primera vez con ejercito, hasta el 416 despues de Cristo en que fue la entrada de los Godos ; y si esta cuenta se hace hasta el ano 623 de Cristo, en que los Ro- manos acabaron de perder lo que tenian en Espana, saldra que estu- vieron mas de 800 afios. En este tiempo introdujeron aqui su lengua vulgar, que era la latina, como lo hicieron en todas las demas provincias que conquistaron. Con la decadencia del imperio ro- mano y venida de los Godos se fue adulterando la lengua latina 6 romana porque como los vencidos necesitaban acomodarse a la lengua de los ven- cedores, y estos deseaban y procuraban aprender la de los vencidos, con- tribuyeron unos y otros a estragar la lengua latina. Los Godos hallaron dificultad en la declinacion de los nombres latinos, y FORMATION OF THE SPANISH LAN- GUAGE. The Castilian (Spanish) language is composed of words derived from the Phoenician, Greek, Gothic, and Arabic, and also from the languages of other nations which inhabited or visited Spain, intent on conquest or commerce. It abounds principally, however, in Latin words, either pure or adulterated. The Romans occupied Spain for at least 600 years, if we date their occupation from the year 216 b. c, when their first army appeared there, until 416 A. D., when the Goths in- vaded the country. But if we ex- tend our calculation to the year 623 A. D., when the Romans finally lost what they still possessed in Spain, the time of their occupation exceeds 800 years. They introduced their language in the country, namely, the Latin lan- guage, as they did in aU the other provinces which they conquered. The Latin or Roman language be- came adulterated at the fall of the Roman empire and at the time of the invasion of the Goths, as the con- quered nation had to adapt itself to the language of the conquerors, while the latter desired and endeavored to learn the language of the conquered. These reasons contributed to the al- teration of the Latin language. The Goths found difficulty in the declension of the Latin nouns, and FORMATION OF THE SPANISH LANGUAGE. 371 la dejarou enteramente supliendo los casos con preposiciones. En los ver- bos siguieron en parte las coujuga- ciones latinas, pero dejaron del todo la voz pasiva, y usaron para suplirla, de los participios pasivos con el verbo sustantivo se)\ Esta lengua latina, asi adulterada, se empezo a Uamar romance por su derivacion de la romana 6 latina, para distinguir la de la gotica. Con la irrupcion de los Arabes el alio 714 padecio tambien alteracion el romance ; pero como los Espaiioles empezaron desde luego a sacudir el nuevo yugo, a pro2)orcion de las ven- tajas que iban consiguiendo, iba tam- bien la lengua cobrando fuerza y cul- tura. El rey Don Alonso el Sabio mando que cesase el uso de escribir en latin los privilegios, donaciones reales y escrituras publicas. Entre varias obras que compuso, o hizo componer en romance, merece singular aprecio y elogio la de las Leyes de las Parti- das, en la cual la lengua ostento toda la riqueza y majestad que habia adqui- rido hasta entonces, y en que Uevo grandes ventajas, no solo a otras obras antei-iores y conteraporaneas, sino aun a muchas posteriores. Siguieron su ejemplo D. Juan Manuel, hijo del infante D. Manuel, y el rey D. Alonso el XI. El primero compuso el libro del Conde Lucanor, el segundo el de monteAa, ambas dig- namente estimados. Escribieronse tambien las Cronicas abandoned it, supplying the cases with prepositions. They partly fol- lowed the Latin conjugations of the verbs, but entirely rejected the pas- sive voice, which they replaced by passive participles accompanied by the substantive verb ser. The Latin language, thus adulter- ated, began then to be called the Ro- mance, from its derivation from the Roman, and in order to distinguish it from the Gothic. The Romance underwent some al- teration after the irruption of the Arabs in the year 714, but as the Spaniards soon began to shake off the new yoke, their language acquired strength and culture, the latter keep- ing pace with the advantages obtained in warfare. King Don Alonzo the Wise or- dered that the Latin language should not be used any longer for charters, royal grants, and public deeds. Among different works which he composed himself or superintended in the Romance language, special mention and praise is due to the Laws of Castile, in which the rich- ness and majesty which the language had acquired are shown to greater advantage than in any previous or contemporaneous, or even in many subsequent works. D. Juan Manuel, son of the infante D. Manuel, and king D. Alonzo XI. followed his example. The former wrote a work called Count Lucanor^ and the latter a treatise on Hunting ; both works are greatly esteemed. At that time were also written the 372 FORMATION OF THE SPANISH LANGUAGE. del Santo Ret/ Don Fernando, de Hon Alonso el Sdbio, de Don Sancho el IV., de Don Fernando el IF., y de Don Alonso el XI. Pedro Lopez de Ayala, ya con estilo mas adornado, escribio las Cronlcas del rey Don Pedro, de Don Enrique II., y de Don Juan el I. Alvar Garcia de Santa Maria, y Feruan Perez de Guzman, compusieron la de Don Juan el II. Juan de Mena, la obra de las Tresctentas, y la Corona- cion. El BachiUer Fernan Gomez de Ciudad Real, el Centon epistolario, que contiene unas admirables cartas sobre los principales sucesos del reina- do de D. Juan el II. D. Alonso Tostado, Obispo de Avila, publico varias obras en castellano ; Hernando del Pulgar, su celebre Cronlca de los reyes catolicos, y algo mas adelante, el doctor Francisco de Villalobos, en sus Problemas, y otros tratados que compuso en romance, dio a conocer la gracia y primor de que la lengua castellana es capaz. La publication de estas y otras obras semejantes, y la particular aten- cion con que se dedicaron a cultivar la lengua castellana muchos escritores insignes que ban florecido desde el rein ado de los Reyes Catolicos, la fueron puliendo y perfeccionando, hasta ponerla en el estado en que boy se balla. Chronicles of the Holy King D. Fer- nando, of D. Alonzo the Wise, of i). Sancho IV., of D. Fernando IV., and of D. Alotizo XL Pedro Lopez de Ayala, in a more ornate style wrote the Chronicles of king D. Pedro, of D. Enrique II., and of D. Juan I. Alvar Garcia de Santa Maria and Fernan Perez de Guzman composed the Chronicles of D. Juan II. ; Juan de Mena, a work on the Three Hundred and on The Coronation. Fernan Gomez de Ciudad Real wrote the Epistola Cento, which contains admirable let- ters on the principal events of the reign of D. Juan II. D. Alonzo Tostado, Bishop of Avila, published several works in the Castilian lan- guage ; also Hernando del Pul- gar his celebrated Chronicle of the Catholic Monarchs, and somewhat later, Dr. Francisco de Villalobos, in his Problems and other treatises which he composed in the Romance language, showed the grace and ele- gance of which the Castilian language is susceptible. The publication of these and other works, and the special attention paid to the cultivation of the Castilian language by many eminent writers who have flourished since the reigns of the Catholic Monarchs, have pol- ished and perfected the language to the point at which it has arrived in our day. GENERAL VOCABULARY mCLUDIXG ALL THE WORDS CONTAINED IN THE PRECEDING VOCABUURIES. abajo, dovm stairs. abanico, m. fan. abierto, opened. abogado, m. laimjer. aborrecer, 2. to hate. abrir, 3. to open. abundante, abundant. a caballo, on horseback. acabar, 1. to finish. a casa, to the house. acaso, perhaps. accidente, m. accident. accion, f. action. aceite, m. oil. aceptable, acceptable. acercarse, 1. to approach. acompailar, 1. to accom- pany. aconsejar, 1. to advise. acontecer, 2. to hapjien. acordarse, 1. to remem- ber. acostarse, \. to go to bed. acostumbrado, accus- tomed. acostumbrar, 1. to accus- tom. a credit© , on credit. acusar, 1. to accuse. I. Spanish-English. adelantar, 1. to be fast. adberir, 3. to adhere. adios, good bij. admitido, admitted. afable, affable. afeitar, 1. to shave. afuera, out, without. afusilar, 1. to shoot. agradable, agreeable. agradecido, thankful. agrio, sour. agua, f. water. aguardar, 1. to expect, to luait. ahora, now. ahi, there. aire, ni. air. alabanza, f, praise. alabar, 1. to praise. albanil, m. mason. al contrario, on tlie con trary. aldea, f. village. alegrarse, 1. to rejoice. alegre, lively. alejarse, 1. to leave. Aleman, m. German. Alemania, f. Germany. algo, something, any thing, rather. algodon, m. cotton. alguien, somebody, any- body. alguna parte, some- ivhere, anywhere. algunas veces, some- times. alguno, some, any, some one, any one, somebody, anybody. alii, there. almacen, m. store. almirante, m. admiral. almorzar, 1. to breakfast. almuerzo, ra. breakfast. alojamiento, m. lodging. a lo menos, at least. al punto que, as soon as. alquilar, 1. to Jet. alto, high, tall, loud. amado, loved. amar, 1. to love. amargo, bitter. I ama V. % do you love ? a menos que, unless. a menudo, often. Americano, m. Ameri- can. amigo, \n. friend. amistad, f. friendship. 374 GENERAL VOCABULARY. amistoso, friendly. amo, Hove, amo, ra. master. amor, m. love. andar, 1. to walk. animal, m. animal. anoche, last night. ansioso, eager. antes de, before. anunciar, 1. to announce. anadir, 3. to add. ano, m. year. apartar, 1. to remove. apelar, 1. to appeal. apenas, hardly^ no soon- er. a pi^, on foot. apoderarse, 1. to take possession. apostar, 1. to bet. aprender, 1. to learn. aprendido, learned. aprobar, 1. to approve. aquello, that, that thing. aqui, here. aqui tiene V., here is. Arabe, m. Arab. arbol, m. tree. arce, m. maple. armario, m. closet. arreglar, 1. to arrange. arrepentirse, 3. torepent. arriba, up stairs. arruinar, 1. to ruin. articulo, m. article. asegnrar, 1, to assure. asi, thus, so, therefore. asi que, so that, as soon as. asolar, 1. to devastate. asunto, m. matter, busi- ness. atacar, 1. to attack. atencion, f. attention. atento, attentive. atrasar, 1. to delay. atravesar, 1. to cross over. aun, even, yet. aunque, although. ansente, absent. autor, m. author. autorizar,!. to authorize. autorizacion, f. authori- zation. avaro, m. miser. aventura, f. adventure, ayer, yesterday. ayudar, 1. to help. azucar, m. sugar. azul, blue. B. bagatela, f. trifle. bailar, 1. to dance. baile, m. ball. bailo, I dance. bajar, 1. to cotne dozen. bajo, low, under. banco, m. bank. banquero, m. banker. banarse, 1. to bathe. h&T&to, cheap. barco, m. vessel. bastante, enough. baston, m. walking-stick, cane. bastonazo, ni. blow (with a stick). batalla, f. battle. baul, m. trunk. bebo, I drink. bendecir, 3. to bless. beneficio, m. benefit. benefice, benevolent. biblioteca, f. library. bien, good, well. billar, m. billiards. bianco, white. boca, f. mouth. bocoy, m. hogshead. bodega, f. cellar. boUo, ni. cake. bondad, f. kindness. bonito, pretty. bordado, trimmed. borracho, intoxicated. bosque, ni. wood. beta, f. boot. botella, f. bottle. boticario, m. druggist. bo ton, m. button. buenas nocbes, good night. bueno, good, well. buenos dias, good morn- ing, good day. buey, m. ox. bnque, m. ship, vessel. burlarse, 1. to laugh at. buscar, 1. to look for. caballeria, f. cavalry. caballeriza, f. stable. caballero, m. gentleynan. caballo, rn. horse. cada, each. cadena, f. chain. caer, 2. to fall. SPANISH-ENGLISH. 375 caerse, 2. to fall, cafe, ni. coffee. caja, f. safe, box. cajon, m. drawer. calentar, 1. to warm. caliente, war^m. callado, silent. calle, f. street. callejuela, f. Ia7ie» cama, f. bed. cambiar, 1. to exchange. camino, m. road. camisa, f. shirt. campo, m. country. cancion, f. song. cans ado, tired. canta, sings. cantar, 1. to sing, cantatriz, f. singer. canto, m. singing. caua, f. cane. caoba, f. mahogany. capital, f. capital. cap! tan, m. captain. capitulo, m. chapter. cara, f. face. carbon, m. coal. carcel, f. prison. caridard, f. charity. Carlos, Charles. came, f. m^at. came (f. ) de vaca, f. beef. camicero, in. butcher. carpintero, m. carpenter. cartero, m. j^ostman. caro, dear. Carolina, Caroline, carreta, f. cart. carta, f. letter. casa, f. house. casaca, f. coat. casar, 1. to Tnarry. casarse, 1. to marry. castigar, 1. to punish. causa, f. cause, case. oazador, m. hunter. celebre, celebrated. cena, f. supper. censurar, 1. to censure. centavo, m. cent. cerca, near. cerca de, nearly. cereza, f. cherry. cerrado, closed, shut. cerrar, 1. to shut. cerveza, f. beer. Cesar, Ccesar, ciego, blind. cielo, m. heaven, ciencia, science, cierto, certain. ciudad, f. city, claro, clear, clase, f. class. clavel, m. pink. clima, m. climate, cocina, f. kitchen. cocinera, f. cook. cocinero, m. cook. coche, m. coach. codicioso, greedy. cojear, 1. to limp, to bal- ance. colegio, m. college, odlera, m. cholera, colmar, 1. to overwhelm. colocacion, f. situation. Colon, Columbus. Colorado, red. comedia, f. comedy. oomedido, polite. comedoT,m, dining-room. comemos, we dine. i come V. ? do you dine ? comer, 2. to dine, to eat, comerciante, m. mer- chant. comido, eaten. comida, f. eating, dinner, como, about, how. companero, m. compan- ion. comparecer, 2. to appear, complacer, 2, to please, componer, 2. to compare, comportamiento, m. be- havior. comportarse, 1. to be- have. comprado, bought. icompra V. 1 do you buy ? comprender, 2. to under- stand. compro, / buy. comun, ordinary, low, con, with. concepto, m. opiiiimi, concierto, m. concert, conciso, concise. concluir, 3. to conclude, to finish. concluirse, 3. to end. conde, m. count. condenar, 1. to condemn. condesa, f. countess. condiscipulo, m. fellow- scholar. condncir, 3. to conduct, to take. conducta, f. conduct. confesar, 1. to confess. confer me, conformably. 376 GENERAL VOCABULARY. congreso, m. congress. conjuracion, f. con- spiracy. conmigo, ivith me. conocer, 2. to know. i conoce N.'\ do you know are you acquainted with ? conocido, m. acquaint- ance. conocido, knoivn. conozco, 1 know, I am acquainted with. conseguir, 3. to obtain. consejo, m. advice. consistir, 3.- to consist. consolar, 1. to console^ to comfort. construir, 3. to construct, to build. consul tado, consulted. consultar, 1. to consult. con tal que, provided. contar, 1. to count. contener, 2. to contain. contento, pleased^ satis- fied. contestar, 1. to ansiver. contiene, contains. continuar, 1. to continue. contornos, m. pL the suburbs. contrario, contrary. convencer, 2. to convince. convenir, 3. to be prop- er. conversar, 1. to con- verse. convidar, 1. to invite. copiar, 1. to copy. coronel, m. col&nel. correo, m. post^ mailj post-ofiice. correr, 2. to run. cortado, cut. cortaplumas, m. pen- knife. cortar, 1. to cut. cortes, p^olite. cor to, short. cosa, f. thing, matter of importance. costa, f. expense. costar, 1. to cost. cos tumble, f. manner. creador, m. creator. credito, m. credit. creer, 2. to believe. creo, / believe. criada, f. servant-girl. criado, m. servant. crimen, m. crime. cruel, cruel. cruz, f. cross. cuaderno, m. copy-book. cuadro, m. picture. cuando, when. cuanto, how much. cuarto, m. room. cuatro, foitr. cuenta, f. account. cuento, m. tale. cuchillo, m. knife. culpado, guilty. CH. chaleco, m. vest. champana, f. cham- jKtgne. cMquito, little. D. da, gives. dado, given. danza, f. dancing. dar, 1. to give. dar (1.) un paseo, to take a walk. de, of debo, I owe. debe, owes. deber, 2. to oive, must. debil, weak. decidir, 3. to decide. decir, 3. to telly to say. dedicar, 1. to devote. dedo, m. finger. de este modo, in this way. defender, 2. to defend. dejar, 1. to leave. delante, before. demasiado, too, too much, too many. deme V., give me. demolido, pulled down. dentro de, within. dependiente, m. clerk. I de quien ? luhose ? derecho, right. de repente, suddenly. derribar, 1. to upset. derrotar, 1. to defeat. dervis, m. dervis. descansar, 1. to rest. descascarar, 1. to peel. desconfiar, 1. to distrust. descubrir, 3. to discover. desde, since. desde que, since. desea, wishes. SPANISH-ENGLISH. 377 deseamos, we loish. desear, 1. to desire. desgracia, f. misfor- tune. desgraciado, unfortu- nate. desmayarse, 1. to faint. desobedecer, 2. to diso bey. desobediente, disobedi- ent. despacio, sJowhj. despertarse, 1. to awake. despreciado, despised. despues, aflerwards^ then, after. despues de, after. despues que, after. dsstruir, 3. to destroy/. desuso, m. desuetude. deuda, f. debt. de v., f/ive. devolver, 2. to return, give back. dia, m. day. dia festive, hoHday. dibujar, 1. to draw. dibujo, m. drawing. dice, says^ teJls. dicha, 1". luck. dicho, said. dicboso, happy. diente, m. tooth. diferente, different. dificil, difficult. dificultad, f. difficulty. diga v., say, tell. digno, worthy. diner 0, ni. man iard. especie, f. species. especulacion, f. specula tion. espejo, m. mirror. esperar, 1. to expect, to wait, to hope. esperanza, f. hope. estacion, f. season. establecer,2. to establish, estado, m. state, condi tion. estar, 1. to be. estatua, f. statue. esto, this, this thing. estrangero, m. stranger. estrella, f. star. estudiado, studied. estudiamos, we study. estudiante, m. student. i estudian V. V. ? do you study ? estudiar, 1. to estudio, m. sticdy. estudioso, studious. eterno, eternal. Europa, Europe. examinar, 1, to examine. excepto, except. exento, exempted. experiencia, f. experi- ence. explicar, 1. to explain. extinguidor, m. extin- guisher. r. fabricante, m. manufac- turer. fabricar, 1. to manufac- ture. facil, ea^y. faltar, 1. to fail. familia, f. family. favor, m. favor. favorable, favorable. favorecer, 2. to favor. fe, f. faUh. Felipe, Philip. feliz, happy. femenil, effeminate. feo, togly, homely. Fernando, Ferdinand. ferro carril, ni. railroad. fiebre, f. fever. fiel, faithful. fiesta, f. feast, holy day, filial, filial. fin, m. end. flor, f. flower. fonda, f. hotel. formalizarse, 1. to get for mar, 1. to form. fortaleza, f. fortress. fortuna, f. fortune. Frances, in. Frenchman. Francia, f. France. fresa, f. strawberry. fresco, cool. frio, cold. friolera, f. trifle, fruta, f. fruit. fuego, m. fire. fuerte, strong, fuerza, f. strength. funcion, f. ceremmiy. fusil, m. gun. Galileo, Galileo. gallina, f. fowl, chicken. gana, earns. ganar, 1. to earn. gas, m. gas. gasta, spends. gas tar, 1. to spend. gasto, m. expoise. gener almente ^generally. generoso, generous. gente, f. people. gloriosamente, glori- ously. gobernar, 1. to manage, to govern. gobierno,m. government. gota, f. drop. gracias, thank you. grande, rn. grandee. grandeza, f. greatness. Griego, Greek. gritar, 1. to cry, to scream. SPANISH-ENGLISH. 379 grito, m. outcry. groserla, rudeiuss. guante, m. glove. guardar, 1. to keep. guerra, f. war. Guillermo, William, i le gusta a V. 1 do you like ? me gusta, / like, I am fond of. gusto, m. pleasure. H. habil, skilful. habitante,m. inhabitant. habituar se ,\.to accustom one's self. habla, speaks. hablado, spoken. hablan, they speak. i habla V. 1 )do you i hablan V. V. ? i speak ? hablo, I speak. hacer, 2. to make, to do. i hace V. ? do you do ? hacienda, f. estate. hallado, found. hallar, 1. to find. haragan, lazy. hasta, till, until, as far as. hasta que, until. hay, there is. hecho, done. helar, 1. to freeze. heredar, 1. to inherit. heredero, m. licir. herido, wounded. hermana, f. sister. hermano, m. brother. hermoso, handsome, fine. heroe, m. hero. hierro, m. iron. hija, f. daughter. hijo, m. son. hinchado, swollen. historia, f. history. hombre, m. man. honrado, hoiust. hora, f. hour, time. hormiga, f. ant. hotel, m. hotel. hoy, to-day. huevo, m. egg. humanidad,f. humanity. humedo, damp. huracan, m. hurricane. idioma, m. language. iglesia, f. church. ignorancia, f. ignorance. ignorante, ignorant. impaciente, impatient. importante, imj)ortant. imposible, impossible. imprenta, f. press, im- pinnt. incapaz, incapable. incendio, m. conflagra- tion. indiferente, indifferent. indigno, unworthy. indomable, indomitable. inducir, 3. to induce. industrioso, industrious. infeliz, unhappy. ingenio, m. genius. Inglaterra, England. Ingles, m. Englishman. inmovil, immovable. inocencia, f. innocence. inocente, innocent. insolencia, f. insolence. ins tan te, m. instant. instruir, 3. to instruct. instrumento, m. instru- ment. inteligente, intelligent. intencion, f. intention. interesante, interesting. interesar, 1. to interest. interesarse, 1. to take interest. iniitil, useless. invierno, m. winter. invitacion, f. invitatim. invocar, 1. to invoke. ir, 3. logo. irse, 3. to go away. Isabel, Isabella. isla, f. island. Italia, f. Italy. J. jactarse, 1. to boast. jamas, ever, never. jamon, m. ham. jardin, m. garden. jardinero, m. gar denier. joven, young. joyero, in. jeweller. Juan, John. jugar, 1. to play. Julio, Julius. Junio, m. June. junto, together. juventad, f. ijouth. juzgar, 1. to judge. 380 GENERAL VOCABULARY. L. labrador, m. fanner. lado, m. side. ladron, m. tliicf. lagrima, f. tear. lampara, f. larivg. largo, long. Latin, Latin. lavandera, f. washer- woman. lapiz, m. pencil. lavar, 1. to wash. leccion, f. lesson. leche, f. milk. leer, 2. to read. legua, f. league. legumbre, f. vegetable. leido, read. lejos, far. lengua, f. language. lena, f. wood. leon, m. lion. levantarse, 1. to rise. ley, f. law. liberal, liberal. liberalidad, f. liberality. libertad, f. liberty. libra, f. pound. libro, m. book. licencia, f. license. licenciar, 1. to disband. ligero, quick. limonada, f, lemonade. limpio, clean. lista, f. list. lis to, ready. loco, insane. lodo, m. mud. Londres, London. luego que, as soon as. lugar, m. place, Luisa, Louisa. luna, f. moon. luz, f. light. LL. llamar, 1. to call. llamarse, 1. to be called. Have, f. key. llega, arrives. llegar, 1. to arrive. llegado, arrived. Ueno, fall. llevar, 1. to take. llora, weeps. llorar, 1. to cry, to weep. Hover, 2. to rain. lluvia, f. rain. M. madre, f. mother. madrina, f. godmother. maduro, ri;;c. maestro, ni. teacher. magnifico, splendid. malo, bad, ill, unwell. mandar, 1. to send, to order. mande V., send. mano, f. hand. mantener, 2. to support. manzana, f. apple. manana, f. 7norning. manana, to-morrow. marcba, f. inarch. marchar, 1. to go, to march. marcharse, 1. to depart. marido, m. husband. mariner 0, m. sailor. mas, more. mascara, f. mask. matar, 1. to kill. maxima, f. maxim. la mayor parte, the most. media, f. stocking. medico, m. j)hysician. medio, m. means, way. medir, 3. to measure. memoria, f. memory. menester, necessar'y. mentira, f. falsehood. mercader, m. merchant. mercancias, f. pi. goods. merecer, 2. to deserve. merito, m. merit. mes, rn. month. mesa, f. table. mi, my. militar, military. milla, f. mile. mina, mine. minuto, m. minute. mirar, 1. to look at. miser ia, f. misery. mismo, same, very, self. mi tad, f. half. modo, m. way. moles tar, 1. to trouble. memento, m. moment. montar, 1. to mount. monte, m. mountain. monumento, m. monu- ment. morder, 2. to bite. morir, 3. to die. More, m. Moor. mostrar, 1. to show. SPANISH-ENGLISH. 381 motivo, m. viotive. mover, 2. to move, to turn. movimiento, m. 7nove- ment. muchacha, f. girl. mucliaclio, m. boi/. muchas gracias, / (or we) thank you. mucho, mucha, much. muchos, muchas, 7)iany. mucho tiempo, longtime. muerte, f, death. muerto, died. mujer, f. tuoman, wife. mundo, m. ivorld. muiieca, f. doll. murid, died. muro, m. wall. musica, f. music. may, very. N. nacer, 2. to he horn. nacion, f. nation. nada, nothing, not any- thing. nadie, nobody, not any- body, no one. naranja, f. orange. natural, natural. navegacion, f. naviga- tion. necesidad, f. necessity. necesita, needs. i necesita V. 1 do you nerd ? necesitar, 1, to need. necesito, I need. necesario, necessary. negocio, m. business. negro, black. ni, neither, nor. nieve, f. soioiv. ninguno, not any, none, no. nino, m. child. no, no. noche, f. night. no... mas, no... more. nombre, m. name, norte, m. north. nosotros, ive, us. noticia, f. news. novela, f. novel. nuevo, new. nuez, f. nut. niimero, m. number. nunca, never. obedecer, 2. to obey. obediente, obedient. objeto, 111. ohject. obligar, 1. to oblige, to compel. obra, f. work. obrar, 1. to act. obrero", in. workman. obtener, 2. to obtain. ocasion, f. occasion. ociosidad, f. idleness. ocupado, busy. ocupar, 1. to occupy. odiar, ] . to hate. ofender, 2. to offend. oficial, m. officer. ofrecer, 2. to offer. oir, 3. to hear. \ ojala ! would to Ood ! ojo, m. eye. olor, m.- smell. olvidar, 1. to forget. onza, f. ounce. opinion, f. opinion. orguUoso, proud. oro, m. gold. osar, 1. to dare. oscuro, dark. oso, m. bear. otra cosa, something else. otro, other, anotJier. P. paciencia, f. patience. padecer, 2. to suffer. padre, ni. father. padres, m. pi. parents. padrino, ni. godfather. pagar, 1. to pay. pagina, f. page. pais, in. country. pajaro, ni. bird. palabra, f. loord. palacio, m. palace. pan, in. bread. panadero, m. baker. paiio, m. cloth. panuelo, m. handker- chief. papel, m. paper. paquete, m. package. para, for. parado, standing. paraguas, m. icmbrella. pararse, 1. to stand. parecen, seem. 382 GENERAL VOCABULARY. par que, m. park. parte, f. part. partir, 3. to leave. pasado, past^ last. pasado mailana, the day after to-morrow. pasar, 1. to pass. pasearse, 1. to take a walk. paseo, m. walk. paternal, paternal. patio, m. yard. patria, f. country. pavo, m. turkey. paz, f. ycace. pedazo, m. iiiece. pedir, 3. to ask for. Pedro, Peter. pegar, l. to strike. pelea, f. fight. pelear, 1. to fight. peligroso, dangerous. pelo, m. hair. penoso, hard, painful. pensar, 1. to think, to intend. pequeHo, small, little. per a, f. pear. perder, 2. to lose. perdida, f. loss. perdido, lost. perdonar, 1. to forgive. periodico, m. newspaper. permitir, 3. to allow. pero, hut. perro, m. dog. persona, f. person. pertenece, belongs. pesar, m. grief. pescuezo, m. neck. peso, 111. dollar. picaro, m. rogue. pide, asks for. pie, 1)1. foot. i piensa V. ? do you in- tend ? pierna, f. leg. pieza, f. piece. pin tar, 1. to depict. pintura, f. painting. pio, pious. pizarra, f. slate. planta, f. plant. plata, f. silver. pleito, m. lawsuit. plomo, in. lead. poblar, 1. to people. pobre, p)oor. poco, adv. little. pocos, few. poder, m. ptowcr. poderoso, poir^crful. podrir, 3. to rot. polio, m. chicken. Pompeyo, Vompey. ponerse, 2. to jjut 07i. populacto, m. mob. por, through, by. por cierto, certainly. por desgracia, ^infortu- nately. porfiado, obstinate. por mas... que, however. por precision, by neces- sity. porque, beca,use. iporqu^? v:hy? por supuesto, of course. posada, f. inn. posesion, f. ^possession. posible, possible. posteridad, 'posferity. I pozo, m. well. practicar, 1. to practise. precepto, in. precept. precio, ni. price. precise, necessary. preferir, 3. to prefer. pregunta, f. question. preguntar, 1. to inquire, to ask. preparar, 1. to prepare. prerogativa, f. p)reroga- tive. prescribir,3. to prescribe. presentar, 1. to present, to introduce. pre star, 1, to lend. presumido, conceited. pretender, 2. to pretend. prima, f. cousin. primavera, f. s-pring. primero, first. prime, m. cousin. principe, m. prince. principiante, ni. begin- ner. principio, m. principle. prisionero, m. prisoner. privilegio, m. jn'ivilcge. probable, probable. probablemente, proba- bly. probar, 1. to prove. procesion, f. procession. profesor, m. professor. profundo, deep. prometer, 2. to j^romise. pronto, soon, quickly. pronunciar, 1. to pro- nounce. prepense, inclined. propicio, propitious. SPANISH-ENGLISH. 383 propiedad, f. j^foperty. proponer, 2. to propose. provenir, 3. to come from (to originate), to re- sult. proximo, next. prueba, f. proof. l puede V. 1 can you ? puedo, I can. publico, public. pueblo, m. town, vil- lage. puente, m. bridge. puerta, f. door. puerto, m, port. pues, as, iccll, for. puesto, put. pulpero, m. grocer. puialada, f. stab (with* a poniard). Q. que, ivhich, what. que, icJien. quedarse, 1. to remain. quejarse, 1. to complain. quemar, 1. to burn. querer, 2. to grant. queso, in. cheese. quien, ivho, ichom. quiere, icishcs. i quiere V. ? will you have ? do you wish ? quieran, ivish. quioro, / loish, I icill have. quieto, quiet. qui tar se, 1. to take of. quitasol, ni. sunshade. B. raro, rare. raton, m. moicse. razon, f. reason. real, m. shilling. recibido, received. recibir, 3. to receive. recomendar, 1. to recom- mend. recompensa, f. recom- pense. reconooer, 2. to know. referir, 3. to relate. refresco, m. refreshment. regimiento, m. regiment. reina, f. queen.' reinar, 1. to reign. reino, m. kingdom. reir, 3. to laugh. rendirso, 3. to surren- der. ^ reo, m. culprit. reparar, 1. to coTiipen- scde. rapetir, 3. to repeat. representar, 1. to play. reprimir, 3. to reprress. residir, 3. to reside. resolver, 2. to resolve. respetar, 1. to respect. responder, 2. to answer. restablecer, 2. to re-es- tablish. retrato, m. picture. rey, in. ling. ricachon, m. a very rich man. rico, rich. lie, laughs. rienda, f. bridle. rincon, m. corner. rio, m. river. robar, 1. to steal. Romano, m. Roinan. Bomulo, Romulus. ropa, f. clothes. rosa, f. rose. rubio, fair, blond. ruido, m. noise. ruina, f. ruiii. Eusia, Russia. Euso, Russian, S. sabana, f. slwet. saba, knows. I saba V. T do you know ? sabiamente, wisely. sabio, wise. sable, m. saber. sacar, 1. to draio. saco, m. bn.g. sagrado, sacred. sale, goes out, com.es out, leaves. i sale V. 1 do you go out ? salida, f. exit. salir, 3. to leave, to go out. salir de, to leave. sal tar, 1. to jump. salubre, healthy. sastre, m. tailor. satisfecbo, satisfied. seda, f. silk. en 8egTii6La.,immed lately. seguir, 3. to continue, to follow. segun, according to. 384 GENERAL VOCABULARY. seguro, sure. semana, f. iveek. la semana que viene,7ie£c^ loeek. sembrar, 1 . to sow. sentado, seated. sentar, 1, to become. sentarse, 1. to sit down. sentencia, f. inaxwi, judgment. sentir, 3. tofeel^ to regret. senas, f. pL direction. seilor, sir, Mr. seilora, madam, Mrs. ser, to be. servicio, m. service. servido, served. si, if. si, yes. siempre, always. lo siento, I am sorry for it. sig^en, follow. silla, f. cliair, saddle. sin, witlwut. sin embargo, however. singular, singular. sino, but. soberbio, haughty. sobre, on, iipon, about. sobretodo, m. overcoat. sociedad, f. society. socorro, m. assistance. sol, m. sun. solamente, only. soler, 2. to be in the habit. solo, alone. sombrerero, m. liatter. sombrero, m. hat. someter, 2. to subdue. son, are. sonar, 1. to dream. sopa, f. soup. sordo, deaf. sorprendido, surprised. su, his, her. sublevar, 1. to revolt. sucio, dirty. sueiio, m. dream. suerte, f. fate. sufocar, 1. to suffocate. suministrar, 1. to offer. suplica, f. entreaty. suplicar, 1. to entreat. suponer, 2. to suppose. supremo, supreme. suspender, 2. to suspend. T. tal, such as. talento, m. talent. tal vez, perhaps. tambien, too, also. tampoco, not either, neither. tan, so. tan pronto como, as soon as. tarde, f. afternoon. tarde, late. Tartaria, f. Tartary. t^, m. tea. teatro, m. theater. Telemaco, Telemachus. temblar, 1. to tremble. temer, 2. to fear. temor, m. fear. temprano, early. tener, 2. to hold, to have. teologal, theological. teoretico, theoretical. terremoto, earthquake. tia, f. aunt. tio, m. uncle. tiempo, m. time. en tiempo pasado, for- merly. tie n da, f. shop. tiene, has. tienen, have. tierra, f. earth. tigre, m. tiger. tijeras, f. pi, scissors. timido, timid. tintero, m. inkstand. tocar, 1 . to play on. todavia, yet. t*do, all, everything. todo el mundo, every- body. tomar, 1. to take. tomo, m. volume. tonto, foolish, silly. torre, f. tower. trabaja, works. trabajar, 1. to work. trabajo, m. work. traducion, f. translation. traducir, 3. to translate. traer, 2. to bring. traido, brought. traiga V., bring. traje, ni. dress. trasparente, transpar- ent. tratar, 1. to treat. tres, three. trineo, m. sleigh. tripulacion, f. crew. triste, sad. SPANISH-ENGLISH. 385 tmeno, m. thunder. turbulento, boisterous. ultimo, last. unos pocos, afeio. una, f. nail. urbanidad, f. urbanity. litil, useful. V. va, goes. vaca, f. cow. vacio, empty. valiente, brave. valer, 2. to be icorth. valor, m. courage. vapor, ni. steam, steamer. vara, f. yard. varios, as, several. vaso, m. glass (to drink in). i va V. ? are you going ? ve, sees. veneer, 2. to co7iquer. vende, sells. vender, 2. to sell. i vende V. 1 do you sell ? vendido, sold. vendo, I sell. veneno, ni. poison. veo, I see. venir, 3. to come. ventajoso, profitable. ventana, f. ivindow. ver, 2. to see. verdad, f. truth. verde, green. verso, m. verse. vestido, m. dress. vestidos, m. pi. clotlies. vestir, 3. to dress. vestirse, 3. to dress. i ve V. ? do you see ? vez, f. time. viajar, 1, to travel. viaje, m. journey. victoria, f. victory. vida, f. life. vidrio, m. glass. viejo, old. viene, comes. viento, m. wind. vigilante, watchful. vino, m. xvine. virtud, f. virtue. visitar, 1. to visit. vis to, seen. vive, lives. vivir, 3. to live. volar, 1. tofiy. volver, 2. to turn, to re- turn. volver a bacer, 2. to do again. voy, / am going. vuelva v., return, Y. y, and. ya, already. ya no, no longer. yerba, f. grass. yo se, I know. Z. zapatero, m. shoemaker. zapato, m. shoe. 25 386 GENERAL VOCABULARY. II. English-Spanish. A. absent, ausente. about, sohre, como. abundant, abundante. acceptable, aceptabU. accident, accidente, m. to accompany, acom- 2)cmar, 1. according to, segun, account, cueiita, f. to accuse, acusar, 1. to accustom, acostum- hri7Z«?% ra. bird, pdjaro, m. to bite, mordcr, 2. bitter, nmarrjx black, ?ic7?'o. to bless, benclccir, Z blind, ciego. blond, rubio. blow (with a stick), fe^s- tonazo, 111. blue, a::;ziZ. to boast, jactarse^ 1. boisterous, turbulento. book, Zt&?-o, m. boot, 6oto, f. to be born, nacer, 2. bottle, botella, f. bought, comprado. box, ci?;a, f. boy, muchachoj m. brave, valiente. bread, ^^a?^ m. breakfast, almuerzo, m. to breakfast, almorzar^ 1. bridge, puente^ m. bridle, rienda, f. to bring, ^r, 3. emperor, emperador, m. to employ, emplear, 1. employment, empleo, in. empty, vacio. end, j^??,, m. to end, concluirse, 3. enemy, enemigo, m. to engage, embarcar, 1. England, Inglatcrra, f. Englishman, /^iryZcs', m. enormous, eiiorme. enough, bastante. to enrich, enriquecer, 2. to enter, entrar, 1. to entreat, silplicar, 1. entreaty, suplica, f. to escape, escapar, 1. to establish, establccer, 2. estate, hacienda, f. eternal, eierno. Europe, Europa, f. even, aw^i. ever, jamas. everybody, ^oc?o eZ w^m- everything, jfo^o. example, ejempio, m. to examine, examinar,!. to exceed, esceder, 2. excellent, escelente. except, excepto. to exchange, cambiar, 1. to excuse, escusar, 1. exempted, exento. exit, salida, f. to expect, esperar, 1. aguardar, 1. expense, costo, f. gastOy m. experience, experiencia, f. to explain, explicar, 1. extinguisher, extingui- dor, m. eye, ojo, m. 390 GENERAL VOCABULARY. F. fac8, cara^ f. to f ail, /altar, 1. to faint, desmayarsey 1. fair, rubio, faith, fe, f. faithful, fiel. to fall, caer, 2. cacrse, 2. to fall asleep, dorinirse, 3. family, familiaf f. fan, abanicOj in. far, Zyos. farmer, lahrador, m. falsehood, mcntira, f. to be fast, adelantar, 1. ■ fate, suerte, f. father, 2>cidre, m. favor, favor, m. to favor, favorccer, 2. favorable, favoi-aUe. fear, temor, m. to fear, ^(37?icr, 2. feast, fiesta. to feel, seiitir, 3. fellow-scholar, condiscl- 2ml 0, m. Ferdinand, Fernando. feYeT,fiehre, f. few, pocos. a few, ««to5 ^oco5. fight, pelea, f. to fight, pelear, 1. filial, /ZmZ. to find, hallar, 1. encon- trar, 1. fine, hermoso. finger, c?ec?o, m. to finish, concluir, 3. acahar, 1. txe, fuego, m. first, primero. fiower, /or, f. to fly, volar, 1. to follow, seguir, 3. follow, siguen. I am fond of, me gusta. foolish, ^071^0. foot, jt?ie, in. on foot, a ^ie. for, ji;ara, jt?t r?c, dejar, 1. alejarse, 1. partir, 3. leaves, .9aZe. leg, pierna, f. lemonade, limonada, f. to lend, prestar, 1. lesson, Icccion, f. to let, alquilar, 1. letter, car^n^, f. liberal, liheral. liberality, liberalid^d, f. liberty, lihertad, f. library, hiblioteca, f. license, licencia, f. life, i;zV/r^ f. light, Zw^, f. ' to light, encendcr, 2. do you like 1 ^' Ze ^itsto a r. ? I like, ??ie ^?«5^a. to limp, cojeavy 1. lion, /co?t, m. list, /25to, f. to listen to, escuchavy 1. little, pcqueTiOy chiqidto. little, 2)ocOy adv. to live, vivivy 3. lively, alegre. lives, vive. to lock up, enccrraTy 1. lodging, alojamientOy m. London, Londres. long, largo. long time, m?«cAo tiempo. to look at, inirary 1. to look for, buscar, 1. to lose, pe7-der, 2. loss, perdida, f. lost, pierdido. loud, aZ^o. Louisa, Luisa. love, ci'?/?or, in. to love, amaVy 1. do you love ? ^" ama F. .? I love, ai/io. loved, amado. low, fea/o, comun. luck, c?ic/ia, f. madam, scnora. mahogany, cr/oJa, f. mail, corrcOy m. to make, 7?accr, 2. to make a mistake, equivocarsey 1. ENGLISH- SPANISH. 393 manner, costumbre^ f. manufacturer, fabri- cante. man, hombre, m. to manage, (jobcrnar, 1 to manufacture, fabri- car, 1. many, mucJios, muchas. maple, arce, m. march, marcha, f. to march, 7)iarc/iar, 1. to marry, casar^ 1. ca- sarse, 1. mask, mclscara, f. mason, albahil^ m. mastsr, amo, m. matter, asunto, m. matter of importance, cosn, f. maxim, maxima, f. sen- tencia, f. means, medio, m. to measure, medir, 3. meat, came, f. to meet, encontrar, 1. memory, memoHa, f, merchant, comerciante, m. mercoidcr, in. merit, merito, m. mil 3, milla, f. military, militar. milk, /ec/ie, f. mine, mina, f, minute, minuto, m. mirror, espejo, m. miser, avaro, m. misery, miseria, f. misfortune, desgracia, f. mistake, equivocacion, 1". mob, jjopula.cho, m. moment, momento, m. money, diner o, m. month, mc5, m. monument, monumento, ra. moon, Zitwa, f. Moor, moro, m. more, m:<5. morning, manana, f. the most, Za m/xyor parte. mother, madre, f. motive, motivo, m. to mount, montar, 1. mountain, 7;io?i^e, m. mouse, r^iJo?^, m. mouth, 6ocn^, f. to move, mover, 2. movement, movimiento, m. Mr., ASij/Tor, Mrs., Sehora. much, mitcho, mucha. mud, ^^(?, m. music, musica, f. must, c^cZ)cr, 2. my, mi. N. nail, w;ia, f. name, nombre, m. nation, nacion, f. natural, natural navigation, navegacion, f. near, ^erca. nearly, r;crcf7 f?c. necessary, predso, me- nester, necesario. necessity, necesid^d, f. by necessity, ^or ^^rc- neck, pescuezo, m. to need, necesitar, 1. do you need "? ^' necesita v.? I need, necesita. needs, necesita. neither, tampoco, ni. never, nunca, jamas. new, nuevo. news, noticia, f. newspaper, j^eriodico, m. next, proximo. next week, Za semanot que viene. night, noche, f. no, no, ninguno. nobody, nadie. noise, ruido, m. no longer, ya no. no... more, no... mas. none, ninguno. no one, nadie. nor, ni. north, norte, m. no sooner, apmas. not any, ninguno. not anybody, 9i^f?zc. not anything, nada. not either, tampoco, nothing, nada. novel, novela, f. now, ahora. number, numero, m. nut, nuez, f. obedient, obedienfe. to obey, obedeccr, 2. object, ohjeto, m. to oblige, obligar, 1. 394 GENERAL VOCABULARY. obstinate, porjiado. to obtain, obtciier, 2. cmiscguir^ 3. occasion, ocasimi, f. to occupy, ocupar^ 1. of, de. to offand, ofendcr, 2. to offer, ofrecer, 2. 5z^- ininistrary 1. officer, ojicialf m. office, escritoriOf m. often, a menudo. oil, aceite, m. old, nejo. on, 5o6rc. only, solamente, to open, a^rir, 3. opened, abierto. opinion, ojunioiif f. co?i- cc^^^o, m. orange, naranja, f. to order, inandar, 1. ordinary, coimtiu other, o^ro. ounce, wi;:;«, f. out, nfuera, outcry, grito, m. overcoat, sobretodo, m. to overwhelm, colmar,!. to owe, deber, 2. I owe, debo. owes, debe. owner, diteno, m. ox, buey, m. package, pnquete, m. page, pdf/ina, f. painful, penoso. painting, pintura, f. palace, palacio^ m. paper, papel, m. parents, padres, m. pi. park, parque, m. part, parte, f. to pass, pasar, 1. past, pasado, paternal, paternal. patience, pacicncia, f. patient (sick person), enfermo, m. to pay, pagar, 1. peace, j!;«;2, f. ' pear,^7crrt, f. to peol, descascarar, 1. pencil, Za/?22;, m. penknife, corta2)lumas, m. people, (7c?i?'e, f. to people, ptoblar, 1. perhaps, acaso, ^aZ i-^^;. person, persona, f. Peter, Pc^^ro. Philip, Felipe. physician, medico, m. picture, 7xtrato, m. cwa piece, pieza, f. pedazo, m. pink, clavel, m. pious, joio. place, hi gar ^ m. plant, planta., f. to play, jicgar, 1. reprc- senfar, 1. to play on, jfocr«r, 1 . to please, complacer, 2. pleased, contento. pleasure, r/zesi^o, m. poison, veneno, m. polite, corses, comedido, Pompey, Pompeyo. poor, pobre. port, piterto, m. possession, 'posesion, f. possible, posible. post, correo, m. posterity, posteritad, f. postman, cartero, m. post-office, correo, m, pound, Zi6ra, f. power, poder, m. powerful, p)ode7'oso. to practise, practicar, 1. praise, alabanza, f. to praise, alabar, 1. precept, prcceptto, m. to prefer, preferir, 3. to prepare, preparar, 1. prerogative, preroga- tiva, f. to prescribe, prcscribir, 3. to present, presentar, 1. press, inijjrenta, f. to pretend, jyretender, 2. pretty, bonito. price, 2jrecio, m. prince, jirincijje, m. principle, jjrincijno, m. prison, carcel, f. prisoner, prisionero, m. privilege, privilcgio, m. probable, p^robable. •proh&'blY, probableme^ite. procession, jirocesion, f. professor, profcsor, profitable, vcntajoso. to promise, prometer, 2. to pronounce, pronun- ciar, 1. ENGLISH-SPANISH. 395 proof, prucha, f. to be proper, convenir. 3. property, jpropUdad. f. propitious, iiro-picio. to propose, j^^oponer, 2. proud, orgidloso. to prove, 2J^'obarj 1. providsd, con tal que. public, publico. pulled down, demolido. to punish, castigar^ 1. pupil, discipulo, ni. to put on, poncrsc, 2. put, pues'o. a. queen, reiua, f. question, pregunta, f. quick, ligero. quiokly, ^yronio. quiet, quieto. railroad, ferro carril, m. rain, lluvia, f. to rain, llovci\ 2. rare, raro. rath3r, algo. to read, leer, 2. rDad, leidc. ready, listo. reason, 7'azon, f. to reseiva, recibir, 3. received, rccihldo. to recommend, recom^n- dar, 1. recompense, recompensaf f. red, Colorado, encendido. to re-establish, restable- cer, 2. refreshment, refresco, m. regiment, regimiento,m. to regret, sentir, 3. to reign, rei7iar, 1. to rejoice, alcgrarsc, 1. to relate, referir, 3. to remain, quedarse, 1. to remember, ac'ordarse, 1. to remove, ctpartar, 1. to repeat, repetir, 3. to repent, arrepentirse^ 3. to repress, rcprimir, 3. to reside, residir, 3. to resolve, resolver, 2. to rest, descansar, 1. to respect, respctar, 1. to result, provcnir, 3. to return, wZrer, 2. £^c- volver, 2. return, vuelva V. to revolt, suhlevar, 1. rich, ?^ico. a very rich man, Wm- c^o??., m. right, derecho. ripe, rnaduro. to rise, levantarsc, 1. river, rw, ra. road, camino, m. rogue, pizaro, m. Roman, Romano, m. Romulus, Rdmulo. room, cuarto, m. rose, r(;sa, f. to rot, podrir, 3. rudeness, groseria, f. ruin, ruina, f. to ruin, arruinar, 1. to run, correr, 2. Russia, Rusia. Russian, ii^o. S. saber, sa&Ze, m. sacred, sagrado. sad, iris'^e. saddle, ^i7Z«, f. safe, c»;'a^, f. said, cZtcAo. sailor, marinero, m. same, mismo. satisfied, satisfecho, con- tento. to say, c?2a>, 3. cay, c?/j.'* F. says, eZicc. scholar, discipuh, m. school, escuela, f. science, ciencia, f. Scipio, Escip>wn. to scream, gritar, 1. season, cstacion, f. seated, scntado. scissors, tijeras, f. pi. to see, t^er, 2. do you see ? ^- ije F. i* I see, rco. seem, parecen. seen, vw^o. sees, re. to select, escoger, 2. self, mismo. to sell, vender, 2. 396 GENERAL VOCABULABY. do you sell ? i vende F. ? I sell, vcndo. sells, vcnde. to send, mandar, 1. en- viar, 1. send, mande V. sent, cnviado. servant, criado, m. servant-girl, crvida, f. served, scrvido. service, servicio, m. several, varios, m. va- riaSj f. to shave, afeitar, 1. sheet, sdhana, f. shilling, real, m. ship, biiqiiej m. shirt, camisa, f. shoe, zapato, m. shoamaker, zaiKdero, m. to shoot, afasilar, 1. shop, tienda, f. short, cor^o. to show, mostrar, 1. to shut, cerrar, 1. shut, cerrado. sick, enfernio. side, Zao?o, m. silent, callado. silk, 5cc?a, f. silly, ^wi^Jo. silver, ;j>Za^rt^, f. since, c?<^6'ecie, f. speculation, especula- cion, f. to spend, gastar, 1. spends, gasta. splendid, iriagnifico. spoken, Imblado. spot, Ingar, m. spring, primavera, f. squadron, escuadra, f. stab (with a poniard), jnmalada, f. stable, caballeriza, f. to stand, par arse., 1. standing, parado. star, estrella, f. state, estado, m. statue, estdtua, f. to steal, robar, 1. steam, vapor, m. steamer, vapor, ni. stocking, media,, f. store, almacen, m. stranger, estrangero, m. strawberry, //Tsa, f. street, ca/Zc, f. strength, fuerza, f. to strike, ^;6r/ar, 1. strong, fuerte. student, estudiante, m. studied, estudiado. studious, estudioso. study, estudio, 'm. to study, estudiar, 1. do you study 1 ^estudian V. V. r we study, estudiamos. to subdue, someter, 2. suburbs, contornos, m. ENGLISH-SPANISH. 397 such as, tal. suddenly, de rcpente. to suffer, padccer, 2. to suffocate, safocavy 1, sugar, aziicar, m. sun, sol, m. sunshade, quUasol, m. supper, cena, f. to support, mantener, 2. to suppose, suponcr, 2. supreme, supremo. sure, seguro. surprised, sorprendido. to surrender, rendirse, 3. to suspend, suspender^ 2. sweet, didce. swollen, hinchado. T. table, mesa, f. tailor, sastre, m. to take, tomar, 1. llevar, 1. conditcir, 3. to take a walk, «iar «7i paseo, pasearse, 1 . to take interest, intere- sarse, 1. to take off, quitarse, 1. to take possession, «2?o- dcrarse, 1. tale, cuento, in. talent, talento, m. tall, aZ^o. Tartary, Tartaria, f. tea, /e, m. teacher, maestro^ m. teaches, ensefia. tear, Idgrimxt, f. Telemachus, Telemaco. to tall, c?ec/r, 3. tell, r%.7- F. tells, f/icc. thankful, agradecido. thank you, gracias. I (or we) thank you, tibmihas gracias. that, aquello, eso. that thing, aqitello. theatre, teatro, m. then, despues. theological, teologal. theoretical, teoretico. there, a/u'. aZZ«. therefore, asi. there is, /i,<72/. thief, ladron„m.. thing, cosa, f. to think, pensar, 1. this, esto. this thing, esto. thre3, tres. through, por. thunder, trueno, m. thus, asi. tigar, tigre, in. till, hasta. time, tiempo, m. Aora, f. V6';i;, f. timid, timido. tired, cansado. to-day, ho7/. together, junto. to-morrow, manana. too, demasiado, tamhien. too many, demnsiados. too much, demasiado. tooth, dicnte, m. tower, tovi^e, f. town, pueblo, m. to translate, traducir, 3. translation, traducion, f. transparent, ^?'<]r52:>ar